M&E 1.0 Tender Specification

SECTION 4
COLD WATER AND SANITARY PLUMBING SYSTEM

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PAGE 1 OF 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE
4-1 SCOPE OF WORKS
4-2 PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
4-3 PLUMBING PIPING AND FITTINGS MATERIALS
4-4 PLUMBING HANGERS, ANCHORS AND SUPPORT
4-5 PLUMBING VALVES
4-6 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM
4-7 SOIL, WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM
4-8 PLUMBING TANKS
4-9 PLUMBING VIBRATION ISOLATION
4-10 PLUMBING INSULATION
4-11 FIRESTOPPING
4-12 PLUMBING PUMPS
4-13 THERMAL STORAGE ELECTRIC WATER HEATER
4-14 ELECTRICAL WORKS
4-15 PLUMBING TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
4-16 FREQUENCY INVERTERS
4-17 BIOMATIC GREASE INTERCEPTOR & OIL INTERCEPTOR

SCOPE OF WORKS
SECTION 4-1
PAGE 1 OF 2
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
.1 Provide the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
The work includes, but is not limited to the following:
.1 Cold & Hot Water Plumbing Services
.1 Incoming water piping from bulk meter location to all suction tanks
including meter stand, all valves, fittings and accessories.
.2 Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester tanks and all accessories in the

lower ground floor, intermediate mechanical floor and the roof
floor.
.3 All accessories & cast in pipes for RC tanks in the lower ground
floor.
.4 Pumpsets, starter and control panels, piping, fittings and

accessories within the domestic water pump room in the
basements, intermediate mechanical floor and the roof floor.
.5 Pumping mains piping, fittings, valves and accessories.
.6 Distribution of piping, fittings, valves and accessories to sanitary

fittings.
.7 Installation of architectural taps, basin, shower sets, hoses and

accessories.
.2 Sanitary Plumbing Services
.1 All soil, waste and vent piping and accessories.
.2 Floor traps, WC connector; floor gratings (where applicable), etc.
.3 Sewer house manhole fitting out.
.4 Sewer ejection system.
.5 Grease and oil interceptors.
.6 Carpark drainage pumping system.
.7 Installations of sanitary fixtures and accessories.

SCOPE OF WORKS
SECTION 4-1
PAGE 2 OF 2
.3 Others
.1 Electrical works.
.2 Vibration isolation.
.3 System identification.
.4 Supports, anchors, hangers and auxiliary structural members

required for support of mechanical work. Drawings templates,
structural steel anchor bolts, isolation materials.
.5 System flushing, cleaning, sterilizing, balancing, testing, adjusting

and commissioning.
.6 Operation and maintenance manuals.
.7 Firestopping.
.8 Adjusting, balancing and supervision of service and maintenance

during the 24-month Defects Liability Period.
.9 Training to Employer’s and Operator’s personnel.
.10 Approval and certification from the relevant authorities.
.11 All incidental works and materials for the installation of a complete
system in running order, whether or not as called for in the
Specification and Drawings.
END OF SECTION 4-1

PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
SECTION 4-2
PAGE 1 OF 5
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
.1 Work of this Section shall conform to the requirements of the Contract

Documents.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
.1 Pipe Sleeves
.2 Escutcheons
.3 Gauges
.4 Pipe Labeling
.5 Valve Tagging
.6 Drains
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Provide the following Manufacturer's Specifications and Engineering

Data:
.1 Materials
.2 Parts
.3 Devices
.4 Finish
.5 Performance Data
.6 Area of Use
.7 Layout
.8 Installation requirements
.2 Submit dimensional drawings to E.R. for approval showing pipe

penetration through core walls, slabs and other structural elements,
anchor & guide locations, etc.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1 Comply with requirements of the Malaysian Standards and British

Standards
.2 All piping specialties to be suitable for the pressure, temperate and liquid
quality of the service in which they are to be used or tested, whichever is
greater.
SECTION 4-2
PAGE 2 OF 5
.3 Minimum test pressures to be 1.5 times maximum system marking

pressure or a minimum of 10 bar (150 psig), whichever is greater.
.4 BS 5572: 1978 ; Code of Practice for Sanitary Pipework
.5 Local Water Authority Requirements
.6 UBBL
.7 Jabatan Kerja Raya Recommended Practice
.8 Code of Practice 310
.9 SIRIM Approval
.10 Suruhanjaya Perkhidmatan Air Negara (SPAN)
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 APPROVAL ASSURANCE
.1 All products to be used shall be approved by the local water authority

(SPAN Approval).
2.2 SLEEVES
.1 Provide sleeves for each pipe passing through walls, partitions, and
floors.
.2 Sleeve Materials
No Services Sleeve Materials

3mm, Standard weight galvanized
Cold Water – Mild Steel
1 steel pipe for service pipe less than
Pipe
100mm dia.
Sanitary Pipes for all areas
2 UPVC, ribbed (through wet floors)
except areas below
.3 Sleeve Sizes
.1 Sleeves for Uninsulated Piping: One pipe sizes larger than pipe
passing through sleeve or a minimum of 12mm clearance between
inside of sleeve and outside of pipe. Adequate clearance shall be
provided to install firestopping material.
SECTION 4-2
PAGE 3 OF 5
.2 Sleeves for Insulated Piping: Adequate size to accommodate the

full thickness of pipe covering with clearance for packing and
caulking. Adequate clearance shall be provided to install
firestopping.
.4 Sleeve Lengths
Location Sleeve Length

All floor sleeves to extend minimum of 50mm
Floor
above finished floor level.
Equal to depth of construction and terminated
Stair Landing
flush with finished surfaces.
Equal to depth of construction and terminated

Walls and Partitions
flush with finished surfaces.
.5 Retaining Wall Penetrations
.1 Link-Seals:
.1 Seals shall be modular mechanical type, consisting of

interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously
fill the annular space between the pipe and wall sleeve
opening. An absolute watertight seal between the pipe
and wall opening shall be assured. The seal shall be
constructed so as to provide electrical insulation between
the pipe and wall, thus reducing chances of cathodic
reaction between these two members.
.2 Contractor shall determine the required inside diameter of

each individual wall opening or sleeve before ordering,
fabricating or installing. The inside diameter of each wall
opening shall be sized as recommended by the
manufacturer to fit the pipe. If pipe O.D. is non-standard
due to coating, insulation, etc., consult manufacturer for
recommendation before proceeding with wall opening
detail.
2.3 ESCUTCHEONS
.1 Provide escutcheon on all exposed piping through walls, floors, partitions

and ceilings.
.2 Provide escutcheons on all piping passing through fire rated walls.
.3 Escutcheons shall be held in place by set screws.

SECTION 4-2
PAGE 4 OF 5
.4 Escutcheon Application
Location Material
Finished Spaces Galvanised Steel
Unfinished spaces: including
Galvanised Steel
mechanical equipment Rooms.
.5 Two-piece or hinged escutcheons will not be permitted.
2.4 FLASHING FITTINGS
.1 All pipes passing through roofs shall be provided with a flashing fitting set
at a suitable level above the roof to terminate the flashing being provided
by another division of this Specification. All piping passing through roofs
shall be so arranged to be a minimum of 300mm from walls or other
obstructions so as to permit proper flashing.
2.5 GAUGES
.1 Provide pressure gauges in accordance with the location given below. All
gauges shall be provided with snubbers. Gauges shall have 100mm
diameter dial, white coated with black figures and graduations. Gauges
shall have 150mm diameter dial shall be used for gauges located at more
than 2.5 metres above finished floor level. Shut off cock shall be provided
between gauge and piping to permit gauge removal while system is under
pressure.
.2 Gauges shall have graduation such that at normal working pressure the
needle is in the center of the field.
.3 Gauge Schedule
No Fittings Location of gauges

Pressure Reducing
1 Inlet and Outlet
Valves
Inlet and Outlet of Pumps (Compound
2 Pumps
gauges shall be used for suction end)
3 Strainers Inlet and Outlet
.4 Mount gauge not higher than 1.5 m above finished floor.
.5 The pressure gauge shall have accuracy of  3 % or better.
.6 Provide valid calibration for all gauges.

SECTION 4-2
PAGE 5 OF 5
2.6 DRAINS
.1 All drains shall include adjustable clamping collars device where

membrane or water proof floor occurs.
.2 All drains shall include suitable extension collars as required to suit floor
and roof construction.
.3 Furnish caulk support strap for all drains requiring same
.4 Low point drains shall be provided at the bottom of riser pipes
.5 All portions of equipment and drip tray, pump wells etc. in which water
may collect shall be drained to waste with copper drains. Drains shall be
connected to equipment with unions to facilitate cleaning and removal.
2.7 CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
.1 Provide valves and capped outlets on water piping where required under
other divisions of this Specification. Final connections are described in
other divisions of this Specification.
2.8 SUBMERGED INLETS
.1 Provide check valve and vacuum breakers on all water pipe supplied to
fixtures and equipment requiring inlet connections wherein a minimum air
break cannot be attained.
END OF SECTION 4-2

PLUMBING PIPING AND FITTINGS MATERIALS
SECTION 4-3
PAGE 1 OF 6
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1.1 Work of this Section shall conform to the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
.1 Piping
.2 Fittings
.3 Related Accessories
.4 Cleaning Out and Sterilization of Pipes
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Summit shop drawings indicating detailed piping layouts, anchoring

details, anchor points, guide details, etc.
.2 Submit a list of all proposed piping materials including system/material

(provide schedule), manufacturer’s data for pipe and fittings, all approvals
and certifications.
.3 Quality control submittals
.1 Welder's Certification
.4 Submit mill certificates for all pipes supplied.
.1 Each pipe length shall have the manufacturer's name cast, stamped or
rolled on.
.2 Each fitting shall have the manufacturer's name cast, stamped or rolled
on.
.3 All piping work to conform to the latest edition of the appropriate MS/BS
Code or ASME Code. All pipes and fittings shall have SIRIM certification.
.4 Employ only skilled welders registered with the Factories and Machinery
Dept., each holding a currently active certificate, dated within 12 months,
from a recognized testing laboratory, indicating satisfactory welding test
results in accordance with recommended practices. Retest is required if
welder has not performed welding for a period of 90 days. Maintain
copies of certificates at the job site. Non certified welders shall not be
employed.
LUMBING PIPING AND FITTINGS MATERIALS
SECTION 4-3
PAGE 2 OF 6
.5 The Contractor shall monitor the performance of each of its welders. The
individual welds performed by each welder shall be marked and recorded.
If a welder consistently produces unacceptable welds, the welder may be
dismissed from this project. All welds produced by this welder are subject
to inspection and replacement (if required) at the expense of the
Contractor.
.6 All welding consumable shall be stored and handled in accordance with

manufacturers recommendations.
.7 The following are references to the specifications standards or recognized

authorities to which pipe and fitting materials must conform to be
acceptable. All references shall be the latest edition.
Material Standards
Seamless Copper Water Tube BS - 2871 : Table X
Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and ASTM A888 or CISPI 301.
Fittings
Mild Steel Cement Lined Pipe BS - 534, BS - 3601
Ductile Iron Pipe & Fittings BS EN - 545 & 598, class K9
Unplasticized PVC Soil, Waste and BS - 4514
Vent Pipe and Fittings BS - 5255
ABS Pressure Pipe and Fittings BS - 5391,MS-1419: Part 1
PP-R BS - 4991
Stainless Steel TP 304 / 316 to ASTM A312
HDPE EN ISO12201-2, ISO 4427-2,
DIN 8074
Pipe handling and Storage
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 WATER METER CONNECTIONS
.1 The Contractor shall make application to the Water Supply Department

before connecting to the water meter connection point.
.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for all necessary, excavation,

trenching, laying pipes and set in concrete blocks, backfilling ramming
and making good where specified.
SECTION 4-3
PAGE 3 OF 6
2.2 MATERIALS OF PIPES/FITTINGS
.1 Cold & Hot Water Pipes And Fittings
Pipe Size
Item Materials Standard Remarks
(mm)
Above
Ground
Ductile Iron BS 4772,
100-150 / Mild Steel
Class K9 /
dia. Cement
Cold Water Lining BS534
External From bulk meter to all
Incoming suction tanks.
BS 1387
Pipe Below 100 Stainless
dia. Steel ASTM
A312,
TP304
EN
ISO12201-
Pump HDPE
Distribution 2, ISO
Feed PN12.5 From storage tank to
Pipe Work 4427-2, DIN
8074 sanitary fittings
Gravity HDPE
Feed PN12.5
Ductile Iron
/ Stainless BS 4772,
Pumping From suction
Steel / Mild
Main Pipe All Class K9, tank/pump to storage
Steel
Work tank
Cement
Lining
Hot Water All PPR PN20 MS 2286, 1) Concealed in wall-
& Vent- DIN: 8077 Factory
encapsulated
polyethylene.
Buried
Cold Water 100-150 BS 4772,

Ductile Iron From bulk meter to all
dia. Class K9
suction tanks wrapped
BS 1387,
Stainless with anti-corrosion
Below 100 ASTM bituminous tape
Steel (Sch
dia. A312,
40)
TP316
SECTION 4-3
PAGE 4 OF 6
.2 Soil, Waste, Vent/Anti-Syphonage Pipes & Fittings
Pipe Size
Item Materials Standard Remarks
(mm)
Above
Ground
Soil, Waste 32 – 150 Unplasticised BS 4514
& Vent dia. PVC & BS 5255
Insulated with Close-
cell insulation /
Unplasticised BS 5255 insulation foam to
BS 4514 All
PVC & BS 4514 eliminate any
& BS 5255 possible
condensation on its
surface
Water
Tanks
Overflow, All Ductile Iron BS EN 598
Scour &
Drain
Hubless Cast ASTM A888
For food preparation
Hot Waste All Iron Heavy or CISPI
discharge
Duty 301
Sump
All Ductile Iron BS EN 598 Waste Water
Waste
Sewer
All Ductile Iron BS EN 598 Flange Connection
Ejection
Burried
Soil, 100-150 Unplasticised
BS 4660
Waste and dia. PVC
Anti- BS 4514 &
32-75 dia. uPVC
Syphonage BS 5255
All (across
the road /
All VCP BS 65
manhole to
manhole)
.5 All pipes and fittings shall be suited for the operating and testing
pressures envisaged for a high rise building.
2.3 COLD WATER AND SANITARY SYSTEM
.1 Pipe and Fittings shall comply in all respects with the requirements of
relevant Malaysian Standard and British Standard
.2 Pipes shall be supplied in plain ended lengths.

SECTION 4-3
PAGE 5 OF 6
.3 The grade of UPVC used for the pipe shall have a minimum softening
point of 75°C and for the fittings a minimum softening point of 72°C when
tested by the Vicat method as described in British Standard 2782:1976,
Method 102A.
2.4 PIPE JOINTS
.1 The number of demountable joints, e.g. flanges, unions, etc. shall be kept
to a minimum.
.2 All screwed joints shall be made by using Teflon tape or approved jointing
compound. Machined flanges shall be used for flanged joints.
.3 True alignments are of importance. Flanged gasket shall be of asbestos

free composition or cotton duck reinforced rubber gaskets suitable for the
temperature and pressure of the particular system.
.4 Flexible connections shall be made for suction and discharge connections

to all water pumps and shall be rubber double bellow type of approved
manufacture.
3.0 EXECUTION
.1 All installations shall be done according to the drawings. Special care

shall be taken in the arrangement of piping to ensure a neat finishing and
alignment.
.2 All pipes and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned and free from burns,
scale and obstructions before erection. Clean sharp pipe cutters, not
hacksaws, shall be used to cut metal pipes. Threads shall be cut with
clean sharp die.
.3 Connections shall be as direct and as few as possible. Valves and fittings

shall be grouped where this will not affect their operation, to reduce the
number of joints to a minimum.
.4 All necessary isolating valves, check valves and either fittings as required
and as shown on the drawings for proper valving of the whole installation
shall be supplied and installed. Every section of major branch supply
piping shall be controlled by a stop-valve at the point of connection to the
supply.
.5 Pipe connection for 65 mm dia. and above connect to equipment shall be

flanged joints and pipe connection below 65 mm dia. shall be screwed
unions to permit removal for maintenance without disturbing other pipes.
.6 All pipework other than in pump rooms, basements and where stated
shall be run in false ceilings, ducts, or chase in wall.
SECTION 4-3
PAGE 6 OF 6
.7 All sanitary pipework shall be installed with uniform gradient at minimum

gradient as specified in drawings.
.8 Boss connections for sanitary piping are not allowed.
END OF SECTION 4-3

PLUMBING HANGERS, ANCHORS AND SUPPORT
SECTION 4-4
PAGE 1 OF 2
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION

Documents.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
.1 Hangers
.2 Structure Attachments
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Shop Drawings: Submit details of pipe hangers, anchors and supports for
each pipe size and pipe service. Submit details of support methods and
point loadings, and anchor reactions.
.2 Product Data: Manufacturer's latest published data for materials,

equipment and installation.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
.1 All hangers shall be galvanised and able to support the pipe and
maximum load carried.
2.2 SLEEVES AND COVER PLATE
.1 The Contractor shall supply and install sleeves where pipes penetrate
through walls, floors, etc. All exposed piping within occupied rooms shall
be heavily chrome plated. Escutcheons shall be installed to the point of
penetration by pipes or fittings at walls or ceiling where exposed to view.
3.0 EXECUTION
.1 The Contractor shall supply and install all necessary pipe supports,
hangers, anchors, guides or required for proper support. All pipe support
shall be galvanized.
.2 Risers shall be supported at each floor with galvanised steel riser clamps.
.3 Horizontal pipe runs shall be supported on hangers of split ring or clevis

type.
.4 Where practical, supports and hangers shall be located immediately

adjacent to any change in direction and at valves and heavy equipment.
PLUMBING HANGERS, ANCHORS AND SUPPORT
SECTION 4-4
PAGE 2 OF 2
.5 Where pipe lines run in a common group they shall be supported from a
common hanger bar fabricated from galvanised steel sections.
.6 The insulation method of jointing and fixing shall comply in all respects to
the manufacturer’s site work instructions.
.7 Pipe supports and hanger for metal pipes shall be spaced at interval not
exceeding the following or as recommended by the manufacturer’s
whichever is the more stringent:-
Nominal Pipe Dia Hanger Rod Horizontal Spacing

(mm) Dia.(mm) (m)
Up to 25 10 1.8
32 to 50 10 2.7
65 to 80 15 3
100 to 125 15 3.6

150 20 3.6
200 to 300 25 3.6
Pipe support and hanger for non-metallic pipe shall follow manufacturer’s
recommendation. Vertical pipes shall be supported at least at the top and
bottom of each riser, at each floor level, and at each isolating valve. In
addition, a further support shall be provided between floor levels for pipes
smaller than 1 ¼” dia.
.8 Pipes passing through walls or floors shall be sleeved to allow

unrestricted movement.
.9 The work shall be inspected and tested during installation at agreed

stages.
.10 All works which will be concealed shall be tested before it is finally
enclosed.
.11 A final test shall be made upon completion for soundness and
performance to the satisfaction of E.R. and the Local Water Authority.
END OF SECTION 4-4

PLUMBING VALVES
SECTION 4-5
PAGE 1 OF 7
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION

Documents.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
.1 Gate Valves
.2 Stop Cocks
.3 Check Valves
.4 Strainers
.5 Ball Float Valves
.6 Constant Flow Valves
.7 Globe Valves
.8 Vibration Coupling
.9 Automatic Air Release Valves
.10 Drain Valves
.11 Pressure Reducing Valves
.12 Butterfly Valves
.13 Air Vents
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Valve List: Figure numbers and catalog cuts of proposed valves (use
schedule to indicate location) and approval documents from SYABAS.
.2 Manufacturers latest published detail technical data for materials intended

service and installation.
.1 Each valve shall have the manufacturer's name, size, flow arrow, and
pressure rating cast or stamped on body.
.2 All valve components for cold water system which is used for potable
water shall be non-corrosive and shall be of material which is suitable for
sanitation health purpose supported with proper test report and test
certificate. All valves shall have SIRIM test certificate.
.3 All valves shall withstand a minimum 1.5 times working pressure or

minimum PN16.
2.0 PRODUCTS
PLUMBING VALVES
SECTION 4-5
PAGE 2 OF 7
2.1 GENERAL
.1 Provide valves of the same manufacturer throughout, where possible.
.2 All valves shall be with screwed or flanged ends as required by the piping
system in which they are installed.
.3 Valves shall be selected for the working pressure required.
.4 Adapters shall be provided on all screwed valves installed in the copper

water piping system.
.5 Provide valves suitable for connection to adjoining piping as specified for

pipe joints.
.6 All valves shall be full pipe size unless noted otherwise.
.7 Provide all valves used for future connection with lockable handles and
end capped.
.8 All valves and fittings necessary for the correct control, operation and
maintenance of all services shall be provided and installed to the
satisfaction of the E.R. Samples shall be submitted for E.R.’s approval
before installation.
.9 Valves shall be installed where they are easily accessible for maintenance
and operating purposes.
.10 Each valve shall be of the same nominal size as the line in which it is
installed.
.11 Valves shall be of replaceable components, valve bodies up to 2 ½” shall

be of brass construction with screw connection and cast iron or steel
construction with flanged connection for valves 3” and above.
.12 Before installation, every valve shall be blown out with air to remove any
foreign matter lodged in the valve.
.13 Every bib, pillar, globe and stop tap of the ordinary screw-down pattern
and of nominal size not exceeding two inches shall comply with B.S.
5154.
.14 Every bib, pillar and stop tap not being of the ordinary screw-down pattern
shall be capable of resisting a pressure of at least 70 p.s.i. and every
valve, spindle and other internal part and where the nominal size of the
tap does not exceed two inches the body there of shall be made of a
corrosion resisting alloy.
.15 Every sluice valve of nominal size of two inches or more shall comply as
regards to materials, workmanship, finish and testing with B.S. 5163 for
sluice valves for waterworks purposes.
PLUMBING VALVES
SECTION 4-5
PAGE 3 OF 7
.16 Every ball float valve of nominal size up to six inches shall comply with
B.S. 1212 for ball valves excluding floats and with B.S. 1968 for copper
floats.
.17 All valves shall be of approved manufacture and generally constructed in

accordance with relevant British Standard Specifications.
2.2 Gate Valves (to BS 5154, BS 5163 & BS 5150)
.1 Gate valves shall be used at connections to pumps, water mains, tanks,

main risers etc., where indicated in the drawing.
.2 The valve shall have hand-wheel with externally screwed bronze or

stainless steel spindle.
.3 Gate valves shall be back seating and suitable for repacking under
pressure. Packing shall be non-asbestos.
.4 All gate valves with wheel head up to 2” dia. shall be brass conforming to
BS 5154. All gate valves exceeding 2” shall be cast iron flanged gate
valve with wheel head to BS 5150 for internal plumbing or BS 5163 for
external water works.
2.3 Stop Cocks
.1 Stop cocks shall be used to isolate fixtures for maintenance purpose.
.2 All stop cocks and valves not exceeding 2” dia. shall be bronze with cross
head conforming to BS 5154.
.3 All stop valves exceeding 2” shall be flanged cast iron globe valves with
wheel head to BS 5152.
2.4 Check Valves (to BS 5154, BS 5152 and BS 5153)
.1 Check valve in vertical line of pump discharge side shall be stainless steel
spring loaded centre piece.
.2 Check valve shall conform to EN 12334 and of non-slam anti-hammer

type.
.3 Silent types shall be used on pumps with cycling control and larger than
50mm discharge. Valves shall have cast iron body with bronze or
stainless steel trim and shall be center guide type, with flanged end.
PLUMBING VALVES
SECTION 4-5
PAGE 4 OF 7
2.5 Strainers
.1 Y type with removable stainless steel or bronze mesh screen shall be

supplied and installed where shown in the drawings. Bronze body up to
50 mm and flanged cast iron body for 65 mm dia. and over.
.2 Screens shall be stainless steel with perforations suitable for the service
intended.
.3 Provide strainers in inlet line to all pressure regulating valves, automatic

modulating valves or open and shut control valves.
2.6 Ball Float Valves
.1 Pressure operated ball valve shall be supplied and installed to the water
tanks where shown on the drawings. Installation shall be carried out
strictly to the manufacturer’s recommendations shall be bronze to B.S.
1212 with copper float to B.S. 1968.
2.7 Constant Flow Valve
.1 An approved type constant flow valve shall be supplied calibrated and

installed to the requirements of SYABAS.
2.8 Globe Valves (to BS 5154and BS5152)
.1 Globe valves shall be of the globe pattern, screwed gun metal for sizes
up to and including 50 mm dia. Valve 65 mm dia. and above shall be of
the flanged cast iron type.
2.9 Vibration Coupling - Flexible Joint or Flexible Connector
.1 Piping connections to all pumps shall be by means of fabric reinforced

moulded high pressure convoluted rubber connectors. The fittings shall
be integral rubber flanges and be bolted onto the pipe. The coupling shall
have minimum bursting pressure of 40 Bar. Flexible joint shall be double
bellow.
2.10 Automatic Air Release Valves
.1 Automatic air release valves shall be installed on high points of piping.
2.11 Drain Valves
.1 Drain valves shall be installed at the base of pipe risers and at all low
points of water system. The valve shall be brass bib cock with hose
connections.
PLUMBING VALVES
SECTION 4-5
PAGE 5 OF 7
2.12 Pressure Reducing Valves
.1 The valve shall be the size as indicated on the contract drawings. The
valve shall be cast bronze and shall have all stainless steel trim. The
valve shall have ends suitable for piping system installed and shall have a
maximum working pressure of not less that the test pressure of the
respective installation concerned.
.2 The valve shall be a hydraulically operated, pilot controlled, diaphragm

type valve. The main valve shall have a single removable seat and a
resilient disc. The stem shall be guided at both ends by a bearing in the
valve cover and an integral bearing in the valve seat. No external packing
glands are permitted, and there shall be no pistons operating the main
valve or any pilot controls.
.3 The pilot control shall be a direct-acting, adjustable, spring loaded,

diaphragm valve, outlet adjustable from 103-550 kPa.
.4 The control system shall include a fixed orifice, strainer, an opening

speed control, and shall at times of rapid variations in operation
automatically permit greater flows to insure stable regulation.
2.13 Modulating Float Valves (Flushing Water Tanks)
.1 The valve shall be cast bronze stainless steel trim. The valve shall have
ends suitable for the piping system installed and shall have a maximum
working pressure of not less than the test pressure of the respective
installation concerned.
.2 The main valve shall be hydraulically operated and diaphragm actuated,

and shall contain a resilient, synthetic rubber disc, having a rectangular
cross section, contained on three and one half sides by a disc retainer
and disc guide, and forming a drip tight seal against a single removable
seat insert. The diaphragm assembly shall be the only moving part and
shall form a sealed chamber in the upper portion of the valve, separating
operating pressure from line pressure. The diaphragm shall consist of
nylon fabric banded with synthetic rubber. The main valve shall be
designed to operate with 18 kpa inlet pressure. All necessary repairs shall
be possible without removing the main valve body from the line.
.3 The float control pilot shall be a rotary disc type pilot to insure long term,
reliable, low maintenance service. The pilot valve shall include a lapped
monel multi-port disc with a matching stainless steel port plate and a cast
bronze housing. The float rod linkage assembly shall convert tank level
changes into gradual rotation of the internal disc.
.4 The control system shall include a variable orifice proportioning valve,

which will insure a smooth valve stroke which is directly proportional to
the position of the float control pilot. The pilot system shall also include a
self cleaning strainer to keep foreign particles from entering the pilot
system.
PLUMBING VALVES
SECTION 4-5
PAGE 6 OF 7
.5 Provide at each float valve all necessary accessories for complete valve
operation. Accessories shall include but not be limited to the following
items:
.1 Copper float
.2 Stainless steel float rod and all necessary non-corrosive supports
.3 PVC stifling well
2.14 Butterfly Valves (to BS 5155 or BS EN 593)
.1 Butterfly valves shall have ductile iron body and stainless steel stem with
bronze bushings and ductile iron or stainless steel disc.
.2 The stem journals will be a multiple seal design providing for completely
independent seals. The stem disc assembly will be such that the need for
pins, screws or bolts is not required. Positive stem retention to be
provided to permit removable of handle or actuator while under full
operating pressure.
.3 The valve seats to consist of replaceable resilient elastomer.
.4 Manual butterfly valves to size 100mm to be supplied with multi-position

handles; size 150mm and over to be supplied with enclosed worm gear
operator.
.5 Valve body shall comply with and be compatible with flanges of

appropriate pressure rating.
2.15 Air Vents
.1 Automatic air vents shall be provided as necessary and shall be complete

with isolating cock, and tail pipe arranged for visible discharge to the
nearest suitable floor drain.
3.0 EXECUTION
.1 All valves shall be installed only in the upright vertical or horizontal

positions unless specifically otherwise required by the design
requirements.
.2 All valves shall be installed in accessible locations to facilitate easy

removal for repair or replacement.
.3 Install with operating clearance to handle and stem.
.4 Install isolation valves on equipment so that valve and piping do not

interfere with equipment removal or maintenance. Install unions or
flanges on equipment side of valves.
PLUMBING VALVES
SECTION 4-5
PAGE 7 OF 7
.5 Provide 25mm drain valves with threaded ends for hose connections at
drain points, at main shutoff valves, low points of piping systems, bases
of vertical risers, and at equipment.
.6 Provide required manual or automatic vent valves at high points of piping

systems to facilitate venting of air and to ensure quiet operation.
.7 Provide renewable bronze seat rings and bronze spindles for cast iron
body valves.
.8 Provide chain operated sheaves and chains for all valves which are more
than 2.5m above the floor in Mechanical Equipment Rooms.
.9 Furnish and install other valves, check valves, cocks, etc., as required for
the complete and proper valving of the entire installation.
END OF SECTION 4-5

DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM
SECTION 4-6
PAGE 1 OF 3
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION

Documents.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
.1 Water Hammer Arrestors
.2 Dielectric Fittings
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Shop Drawings: Submit details of piping supports, inserts, structural

openings, including coordinates and elevation.
.2 Product Data: Manufacturer's latest published data for materials,

equipment and installation.
.3 Indicate the proposed changes in pipe sizes and basic system scheme.
.1 Applicable Standards:
.1 Code of Practice 310
.2 SYABAS / SPAN
.3 JKR
.4 DBKL
.5 UBBL
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 SHOCK ABSORBERS (WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS)
.1 Provide shock absorbers where required in design and immediately

adjacent to all flush valves and pieces of equipment wherein quick-closing
or solenoid valves are installed. Size of shock absorbers and installation
procedure shall be as recommended by manufacturer.
SECTION 4-6
PAGE 2 OF 3
2.2 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
.1 Provide dielectric flange or galvanic isolating gaskets on all connections

between dissimilar piping materials.
.2 Submit technical catalog of the dielectric fittings.
3.0 INSTALLATION
.1 All water piping shall be arranged to drain to low points and to provide for
air elimination at high points. Provide plugged drain valves at all low
points and automatic air relief valves at high points.
.2 Mains, risers and branch connections to same shall be arranged to permit

expansion and contraction without strain by means of elbow swings
and/or expansion joints.
.3 A riser control valve shall be provided on each water riser. Provide a

drain valve on each riser located upstream of riser control valve.
.4 Provide a control valve in suction and discharge connections to each

piece of equipment.
.5 All valves, check valves, pressure reducing valves, shock absorbers, etc.,
shall be easily accessible for maintenance and/or removal.
.6 All screwed joints shall be made with best quality pure red lead or
approved pipe compound, carefully placed on male threads only and not
on the fittings.
.7 All cut and threaded pipe shall have the cutting burrs and sharp edges
reamed out.
.8 In erecting chrome plated pipe, strap friction wrenches shall be used

exclusively, and any pipe cut, dented or otherwise damaged shall be
replaced.
.9 All ferrous to nonferrous pipe connections shall be made with dielectric

pipe or flange union isolating joints to prevent any electrolytic action
between dissimilar metals.
.10 All copper tubing shall be cut square and reamed to remove all burrs.
Outside and inside of the fittings and outside of the tubing at each end
shall be weir cleaned with sand cloth before soldering to remove all traces
of oxidation regardless of how clean the surfaces of the pipe and fittings
may appear.
SECTION 4-6
PAGE 3 OF 3
.11 Provide unions at connections to each piece of equipment for each

dismantling and at such other points to facilitate installation. Unions shall
be of same strength and manufacture used in the respective piping
systems and of ground joint type.
.12 Nipples: Any piece of pipe 200mm in length and less shall be considered
a nipple. All nipples with unthreaded portion 37mm and less shall be extra
heavy. All other nipples shall be of weight corresponding to fitting
connected. Only shoulder nipples shall be used, close nipples will not be
acceptable.
.13 All fittings, unions and connections at pumps, tanks or other major
equipment 75mm and over in size shall be assembled with flanged joints
and gaskets.
.14 No use of hemp on screwed joints will be allowed.
END OF SECTION 4-6

SOIL, WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM
SECTION 4-7
PAGE 1 OF 4
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION

Documents.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
.1 Drainage piping system conveying all sanitary water from building fixtures
and equipment to site utility connections
.2 Ventilation piping system for trap seal protection
.3 Inspection and cleaning eyes
.4 Grease And Oil Interceptors
.5 Multiple Inlet Collecting Sumps
.6 Floor and Gully Traps
1 .3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Coordinated piping, inserts and structural opening drawings including

coordinates and elevations
.1 Applicable Standards
.1 BS 5572
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 CLEANOUTS
.1 Provide cleanouts at the base of all soil, waste and leader stacks, all
changes in direction of horizontal piping, and every 15m of horizontal pipe
run.
.2 Extend cleanouts to walls and floor with long swept bends or "y" branch
bends with plugs and face or deck plates to conform to the architectural
finish in the room. Where no definite finish is indicated by other Divisions
of this Specification, use stainless steel wall plates and floor plates of
nickel bronze as access panels.
SECTION 4-7
PAGE 2 OF 4
.3 Inspection and cleaning eyes shall be provided on all soil, waste and
combined pipes so as to provide access for the proper inspection and
cleaning of the entire length of pipe. All bends and junctions shall be
provided with cleaning eye, secured airtight by means of a washer and
non-corrodible bolted cover for proper inspection and cleaning.
2.2 GREASE AND OIL INTERCEPTORS
.1 Grease and sediment interceptors shall be automatically-operated

prefabricated units whilst oil in oil and sludge interceptors is manually
collected. They shall be of floor mounted or fully recessed type complete
with extension where required. The Contractor must submit PP approval
letter, catalogues and sizing data of the proposed brand for approval
before ordering the units.
.2 The unit shall be complete with flow control fitting which should be
connected to vent or vent stack as far as possible, air relief, visible double
wall trap, removable baffles, neoprene gasket c/w non-skid cover,
stainless steel sediment basket.
.3 The interceptor shall be sized based on the number of fixture connected

to it or as shown in the drawings.
.4 The body of the interceptor shall be heavy duty stainless steel complete
with stainless steel frame and neoprene gasket, recessed lift rings and
securing bolts.
2.3 MULTIPLE INLET COLLECTING SUMPS
.1 Multiple inlet collecting sumps prior to grease and oil interceptors shall be
constructed to the requirements of the local Authorities. They should be
reinforced with steel of R16 at 150 c/c and with an overall concrete base
of 275mm thick and 225mm thick brickwork all round respectively. The
sumps shall be constructed with high alumina cement rendering of
minimum 20mm thick.
2.4 FLOOR AND GULLY TRAPS
.1 General
.1 All traps for showers and drains shall be of approved types with
water seal.
.2 All traps shall be set as close to the fixture as possible and in no

event shall this distance exceed 600mm. All traps shall be set
level with regard to their water line
.3 Floor Trap shall be top access type.

SECTION 4-7
PAGE 3 OF 4
2. Floor Traps
.1 Floor traps in all areas unless otherwise specified shall be with

access opening.
.2 Square strainer grating shall be of 150mm x 150mm (6" x 6")

stainless steel and shall be of vermin proof construction and shall
be securely connected to the trap. Where this is specified in the
architectural works, the architectural work specification shall take
precedence.
3. Gully Traps
.1 Gully traps are to be constructed to the requirements of the local

Authorities and as per detail drawings. They shall have a minimum
of 150mm thick of reinforced concrete base and brickwork all
round respectively.
.2 All gully traps shall be constructed to be water-tight so as to

exclude infiltration of any surface or ground water. Gully traps
shall be constructed with high alumina cement rendering of
minimum 20mm (3/4") thick.
.3 The round cover and frames shall be of 300mm diameter cast

iron.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 All materials shall be new and installed in a first class manner.
.2 All sanitary drainage piping, unless otherwise indicated, shall be pitched

to the direction of flow, according to the following schedule.
Branch connections to stacks or main drain shall not be made in a

manner which will permit backflow.
Pipe Diameter Soil & Water Gradient

50mm 1:20
75mm 1:30
100mm 1:40
150mm and larger 1:60
.3 All vent piping shall be arranged to drain any condensate back to waste
piping.
SECTION 4-7
PAGE 4 OF 4
.4 Nipples: Any piece of pipe 200mm in length and less shall be considered
a nipple. All nipples shall be of weight corresponding to fitting connected.
Only shoulder nipples shall be used unless otherwise directed.
.5 Plugged outlets shall be left in drainage and vent piping for future fixtures.
.6 The Contractor is responsible for all necessary measures to ensure that

all pipes, fittings, sanitary fittings, traps and floor wastes, etc. are clear of
rubbish, debris and any blockage, during installation.
.7 On completion and before handing over, all works shall be cleared out
and flushed with water. The Contractor shall provide all materials and
labor for carrying out the cleaning operation.
END OF SECTION 4-7

PLUMBING TANKS
SECTION 4-8
PAGE 1 OF 9
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION

Documents.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
.1 Water Tanks
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Tank constructions
.2 Manufacturer’s Technical Data
.3 15 years warranty for product and workmanship
.4 Written approvals on installers from manufacturer
.1 Applicable Standards
.1 BS 1564
.2 SYABAS / SPAN
.3 Local Authority
.4 J.K.R Guidelines
.5 Singapore Standards (SS)
.6 JIS
.7 Jabatan Kesihatan dan Keselamatan Pekerja (JKKP)

PLUMBING TANKS
SECTION 4-8
PAGE 2 OF 9
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 FIBEGLASS REINFORCED POLYESTER SECTIONAL WATER TANK
.1 TANK DESIGN AND STANDARD
.1 The water tank shall be designed and manufactured in

accordance with Singapore Standard 245: 1995, Specification for
Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester Sectional Water Tanks and the
tank so manufactured shall undergo and pass all tests specified.
Certified test certificate shall be submitted. Tanks manufactured
and tested to other approved Standard shall not be acceptable.
.2 Tanks shall be made using automatic press. Handmade or semi-

handmade tank is not acceptable.
.3 All tanks supplied shall be from manufacturers approved by JKR,

SYABAS and any local authorities having jurisdiction to the
installation.
.2 PANEL MATERIAL
.1 Materials for the manufacturing of panels shall be based on an

unsaturated polyester resin in combination with fiberglass. Results
of sanitation tests conducted must comply with local authority
requirement. A copy of Test Certificate shall be submitted with the
tender.
.2 The unsaturated polyester resin used shall be of suitable grade to

meet the requirements of JIS K. 6919 or equivalent.
.3 The fiberglass used shall be a non-alkaline type conforming to an

appropriate standard within JIS R. 3411 to 3417 or equivalent.
.3 METHOD OF MANUFACTURING
.1 The panels shall be designed and manufactured to have sufficient

strength to withstand the expected load and to conform to the
mechanical and physical requirements as stipulated in SS 245:
1995. Panel corners and other critical points shall be reinforced
with glass fibers roving cloth.
.2 For maximum panel strength, the manufacturing process shall use

the sheet moulding compound (SMC) or Matched Metal Die Hot
Press Moulding Method which uses continuous strand mat
fiberglass as reinforcement instead of chopped fiberglass.
PLUMBING TANKS
SECTION 4-8
PAGE 3 OF 9
.4 FABRICATIONS OF PANEL FLANGES
.1 Panels shall be manufactured with a combined double flange at an

angle of 45and 90o to the face of the panel. This is to facilitate
direct 90o connection (L - shaped) joints along the bottom edges
and the 4 corners to the tank. Panels installed in intermediate
positions may have single flanges at an angle of 90o to the face of
the panel.
.2 The width of the flanges shall be not less than 45mm holes for the
bolts shall have a clearance of 1.5 to 2.0mm in diameter. The
number of bolt holes drilled on the flanges shall be 8 - 15 per
meter length of flanges. The panel flanges shall be designed to
have the appropriate thickness and strength to withstand the
hydrostatic test as set forth in SS 245: 1995.
.5 BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS
.1 All internal bolts, nuts and washers in contact with water shall be
in stainless steel to JIS G4315 (SS304) or Rubber lined/Plastic-
Coated to JIS G3539 or equal.
.2 All external bolts, nuts and washers shall be hot dipped galvanised
in accordance to JIS H8641 (HDZ 35) or electrically galvanised
with coat of 0.008mm or more in accordance to JIS H8641 or
equal. The diameter of all bolts shall not be less than 10mm.
.6 SEALING MATERIALS
.1 Materials used for sealing shall be non-toxic and chemically

resistant to the water stored. The sealants shall also be able to
withstand the prevailing environmental conditions during service.
.2 Tests on the materials for the effects on water shall be carried out
and a certificate of approval complying with the sanitary standards
required by SYABAS shall be submitted with tender.
.3 Packing between panels shall be of sealing materials made of

foamed PVC gasket. Sealing at the corners is with corner blocks.
.7 INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL REINFORCEMENTS FOR PANELS
.1 The internal supports and reinforcement members for the panels

shall be chemically resistant to the water stored. They shall be
made of stainless steel, uPVC or GRP.
.2 The exterior reinforcement metal parts shall be fabricated from

mild steel, hot dipped galvanised in accordance to JIS H8641 or
equal.
PLUMBING TANKS
SECTION 4-8
PAGE 4 OF 9
.3 There shall be continuous external vertical bracing as required by

SYABAS.
.8 TANK COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES
.1 The FRP sectional tanks shall be provided with the following

components and accessories:
a. Floor Panels
.1 A non-slip design with stud-like protrusions shall be

incorporated to ensure the safety of workers during tank
installation and cleaning.
b. Air Vents
.1 Air vents shall be made of PVC complying to JIS K6741 or

equal with insect-proof screens that are corrosion-resistant
to chlorine vapor.
c. Access Manhole Hatches
.1 For uniformity, the manhole panel shall be made of

Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester complying with JIS K6919
or equal using the same manufacturing process as the
other panels. The hatch shall have an opening of not less
than 600mm in diameter and the hinges shall be made of
aluminum alloy or stainless steel. Hinges made from
rubber sheets shall not be acceptable.
d. Internal and External Ladders
.1 Internal & external ladders shall be of aluminum

comprising 25mm diameter solid rungs passing through
and fillet welded at 300mm centers to 75mm x 37mm
channel stringers spaced at 375mm apart. All aluminum
sections and bar shall comply with BS 1474 and BS 1161.
e. Openings for Piping Connections
.1 Openings, located at appropriate positions shall be

provided for inlet, outlet, overflow and drainage pipe
connections. The dimensions of these openings shall
comply with the requirements of BS 4504, 1990 or JIS
K6742 for flanges. In case the positions of the openings
cannot be confirmed at time of manufacture, the openings
shall be cut and drilled on site during installation. Panels
offered shall have this flexibility.
PLUMBING TANKS
SECTION 4-8
PAGE 5 OF 9
f. Anchors
.1 Anchors for securing the tank to the steel skid shall be

provided and they shall be made of mild steel galvanised to
JIS H8641.
g. Water Level Indicators
.1 Water Level Indicators shall be provided at suitable

positions. The indicators shall be with 600mm diameter
circular scale and supplied complete with non-corroding
floats, plastic coated steel cord and counter weights.
OR
.1 Water Level Indicators of the graduated scale type shall be

provided for attachment to the side of tank. The indicators
shall be supplied complete with non-corroding floats,
pulleys, plastic coated steel cord, weighted pointers and
scale graduated in meters to suit the depth of tank.
h. Warning and overflow pipes
i. Scour pipes complete with gate valves;
j. Incoming pipes complete with copper dual ball float valves brass
lever and heavy duty washer.
k. Sampling point of 25mm dia. shall be provided for all tanks.
.9 SANITATION REQUIREMENTS
.1 In addition to the test requirements of SS 245 for the effects of the

panels on water, the panels and sealing materials offered shall
also comply fully with the Food Sanitation Act (Notification No.
434) as required by the Japanese Ministry of Health and Welfare
or equal. A copy of Test Certificate shall be obtained and
submitted with the tender.
.10 PROTECTIONS FROM SUNLIGHT
.1 All panels exposed to the sun shall be coated externally to protect

against the penetrations of sunlight which could promote the
growth of algae and other micro organisms.
.2 The panel shall be manufactured with a shield layer of black non-

woven fabric in the panels. The screen layer shall not in any way,
affect the strength and durability of the panels.
PLUMBING TANKS
SECTION 4-8
PAGE 6 OF 9
.3 The effectiveness and performance of the shield screen provided

shall be tested in accordance with JIS Z8722 and a Test Report
obtained and submitted with tender.
.4 The use of color as means of protection against ultra violet light is

proven to be ineffective, therefore not acceptable.
.11 PANEL COLOUR
.1 A suitable color shall be used for the panels. It shall be pleasing in

appearance and suitable in contrast to the tank surrounding.
.12 STEEL BASE FOR WATER TANK
.1 Steel base (skid) shall be of the crossed girder type and it shall be
designed to provide continuous support to all flanges to the floor
panels of the tank. Provisions shall be made to anchor the tank to
the supporting structures.
.2 All steel members used for fabricating the steel foundation shall
comply with either JIS G3101 or BS 7668, 1994 and coated with
corrosion resistant paint
.13 WATERTIGHTNESS
.1 On completion of erection of the tank, it shall be filled with water to

leave 100m of freeboard and left for 24 hours. A thorough check
shall be made the following morning for any wetness or leaks. If
any leak is found, the tank shall be emptied. The panels bounding
the defective areas shall be unbolted, joints relined, panels bolted
up tight and the tank refilled as before.
.2 When the Contractor considers that the tank is satisfactory as

regards to water tightness, he shall notify the E.R. again for a re-
test to be conducted. This procedure shall be repeated until the
tank is to the satisfaction of the E.R.
.3 All expenses incurred for testing the tank including water tightness
and disinfection shall be the sole liability and responsibility of the
Contractor.
PLUMBING TANKS
SECTION 4-8
PAGE 7 OF 9
.14 DISINFECTION OF WATER TANK
.1 After the tank has been satisfactorily tested; it shall be thoroughly

scoured to remove whatever debris and dirt which may remain
therein. The tank shall then be disinfected by fully charging it as
directed by the E.R. with chlorinated water containing at least 40
part per million of chlorine and left for at least 24 hours. At the end
of this period samples of water shall be collected from the tank
and tested for residual chlorine. All samples shall have free
residual chlorine of not less than 0.2p.p.m. If any sample gives
free chlorine residual figure smaller than 0.2p.p.m. The tank shall
be scoured and the disinfection repeated until this condition is
satisfied.
.2 Disinfection shall be carried out to the entire satisfaction of the

E.R. All workmen engaged in the disinfection of the tank shall
have a valid certificate from the Health Office showing that they
are medically fit for carrying out the said work and free from water-
borne diseases.
2.2 R.C. TANK
.1 GENERAL
.1 The R.C. structured work shall be carried out by the builders. The
plumbing scope of work shall comprise of but not limited to the
following:-
a. Mechanical vertical type scale water level indicators
b. Internal and external aluminium cat ladders
c. Pipework, pipe specials and cast-in pipes
d. Access manhole hatches and air vent
e. Digital field sensors and associated wiring for BCS

interfacing of high and low water level status, together with
all the associated works for an efficient and effective
operational system.
PLUMBING TANKS
SECTION 4-8
PAGE 8 OF 9
.2 INSTALLATIONS OF PIPES
.1 The R.C. Tank shall be provided with:
a. inlet or rising main

b. outlet including bellmouths and strainers
c. warning, overflow and scour pipes
d. ball valves and other sluice valve
e. interconnecting pipes
and all other items as indicated on the contract drawings.
.2 In each case, the pipes shall terminate at the face or tank bottom
with flanged ends to BS10 Table E.
.3 ACCESS ALUMINIUM CAT LADDERS
.1 Aluminum cat ladders shall be installed in all the reinforced

concrete water tanks to provide access to the interior of the tanks
as shown in the drawings.
.2 All bolting done on the internal walls of the water tank shall not
penetrate through the reinforced concrete or in any way cause
any leakage at the bolt position.
.3 Aluminum cat ladders shall consists of 25mm diameter solid rungs

passing through and fillet welded at 300mm centers to 75mm x
37mm channel stringers spaced at 375mm apart. The cat ladder
shall be fixed securely to the structures with appropriate stainless
steel bolts.
.4 All aluminum sections and bars shall comply with BS 1474 and BS
1161.
.5 Access Manhole Hatches
.1 The manhole panel shall be made of heavy duty aluminum

material. The cover shall have facility for locking and shall
also have a sturdy hand hold on the ledge for ease of
entry. The hatch shall have an opening as shown on the
tender drawings or not less than 600mm in diameter and
the hinges shall be made of aluminum alloy or stainless
steel.
PLUMBING TANKS
SECTION 4-8
PAGE 9 OF 9
2.3 WATER TANK LEVEL CONTROLLER
.1 For normal operation, the starting and stopping of pumps shall be initiated
by level controllers unless otherwise specified. The level control units
shall be operated by suspended electrodes and shall be of "No Float"
type.
.2 The level control electrode ends shall be sealed. When required,

intermediate insulated support brackets shall be installed to prevent the
electrodes swaying. A complete set of electrodes shall be installed in
each tank compartment and be arranged to start and stop the pumps as
detailed in Controls Section. Each set of electrodes shall be enclosed by
a suitable casing, extending from the highest water level to bottom of the
tank, to minimize effect of wave of water.
END OF SECTION 4-8

PLUMBING PUMPS
SECTION 4-12
PAGE 1 OF 9
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION

Documents.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
.1 Domestic Water Variable Speed Pumps
.2 Domestic Water Transfer Pumps
.3 Submersible Drainage Pumps
.4 Sewer Ejector Pumps
.5 Casing connections for vent, drain, suction and discharge pressure

gauges.
.6 Quality Pressure Gauge
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Catalog Data: Manufacturer's literature and illustrations.
.2 Shop Drawings
.1 Dimensions
.2 Detail of valving and piping arrangements.
.3 Wiring diagram of prewired controllers, required control wiring and

power wiring diagrams.
.4 Written description of sequence of operation.
.5 Pump curves indicating service conditions.
.3 Installation: Manufacturer's installation instructions.
.4 Operating Instructions: Written operating instructions including start-up

and shutdown.
.5 Maintenance Data
.1 Written instructions on items requiring periodic maintenance.
.2 Parts List.
PLUMBING PUMPS
SECTION 4-12
PAGE 2 OF 9
.6 Factory Tests and Certificates
.1 Pumps hydraulically tested for pressure/flow performances.
.2 Provide certified test data.
.7 Responsibility of Manufacturer
.1 The manufacturer shall be responsible for the complete pumping

system and shall guarantee pumps, motors, controls and all
components of the pumping system.
.2 Select pumps so that when operating at rated RPM, the pump

motor cannot be overloaded despite variations in pumping head.
2.0 PRODUCT
2.1 GENERAL
.1 The Sub-Contractor shall supply, install, test and commission the

pumpsets installation and other instruments that are required for the
efficient operation of the water supply system to the satisfaction of the
Local Authorities having jurisdiction over the installation.
.2 All pipework including suction pipes and discharge pipes on connection

with the pumps installation and water tanks where specified on the
drawings shall be included.
2.2 WATER PUMPSETS (Domestic Water Transfer Pumps)
.1 The pump shall be of the vertical in-line multi-stage centrifugal type with
cast iron casing, stainless steel impeller and stainless steel shaft. Pumps
shall be fitted with mechanical seals. The mechanical seal should be of
tungsten carbide surfaces or approved equivalent.
.2 Pumps shall be direct coupled to an electric motor by means of two

coupling halves bolted with allen screws. The motor shall comply fully with
the Local Authorities requirements.
.3 Means must be provided for the release of air which might become
trapped in the upper part of the pump case. This must be achieved
automatically where a pump operates under suction lift conditions.
.4 Means must also be provided to follow a continuous flow of water through

the pump at a sufficient rate to prevent over-heating of the pump when
churning. The pump shall be capable of discharging not less than the
quantity indicated in the drawings against the indicating total head.
PLUMBING PUMPS
SECTION 4-12
PAGE 3 OF 9
.5 The total head shown is to used for tendering purposes only and the
tenderers are required to carry out the necessary calculations relating to
the pressure drops of the equipment and fittings selected by them and of
the system piping so that each pump shall be capable of providing the
necessary discharge and pressure available at each outlet. Such
calculation shall be submitted before procurement of pumps.
.6 The casing shall be of the high grade cast iron with integral connections
and tapped drained plug at the lowest point for drainage. The pump casing
shall be of adequate strength to withstand the pressure of the system or a
minimum of PN 16, whichever is greater.
.7 The pumps shall be fitted with high grade bronze impeller accurately
machined, statically and dynamically balanced and rigidly secured to the
stainless steel shaft by means of a square key and stream lined impeller
nut. The stainless steel shaft shall be protected by renewable bronze or
stainless steel sleeves.
.8 Bearings shall be of the heavy duty design, adequately sized and

effectively sealed against ingress of dust or moisture. It shall be of sealed
and lubricated for life type ball or roller bearings.
.9 A drain shall be provided for each pump seal and discharge to an

approved location.
.10 Each pump shall be provided with a name plate stating the performance
characteristic of the pump.
.11 Visual audible indication of pump in operation, pump fail to operate and
power of phase failure to the motor stating switch shall also be provided
at the panel.
.12 The efficiency of the pump should not be less than 70% at the design point
and maximum driven speed shall not exceed 2900 rpm.
.13 The working temperature of liquid shall be between 20C to 110C. (Hot
water circulating pump shall be between 20 oC to 150 o C)
.14 For ON/OFF/TRIP indications of the all necessary pumpsets, the plumbing
contractor shall provide volt-free contracts and wired to the control panel.
The contractor shall provide the cable to be terminated at the control panel
only.
2.3 VARIABLE SPEED PUMP (Domestic Water Booster Pumps)
.1 General
.1 The system shall consist of pumps, motors, pressure tanks, valves

and pipework, control and electrical system and other accessories.
.2 This system shall be a fully packaged unit with the whole system
and parts fully approved by the Local Authorities.
PLUMBING PUMPS
SECTION 4-12
PAGE 4 OF 9
.2 Pumps
.1 All pumps shall be vertical in-line multi-stage centrifugal type of

speed not exceeding 2900 rpm. The duty and standby pumpset
shall be alternated to maintain even wear. The efficiency of the
pump should not be less than 70% at the design point.
.3 Pump Casing
.1 Pump casing shall be constructed of high grade close grained cast

iron/stainless steel.
.2 The pump casing shall be of adequate strength to withstand the

pressure of the system or a minimum of PN 16, whichever is
greater.
.4 Pump Impeller
.1 The impeller shall be statically and dynamically balanced in factory.
.5 Pump Shaft
.1 The shaft shall be constructed of stainless steel. The diameter of

the shaft shall be sized to withstand all induced stresses.
.6 Pump Bearing
.1 The bearing, unless sealed in bearing housings and protected

from moisture and dust, shall be of sealed and lubricated for life
type ball or roller bearings.
.7 Motor
.1 The pump shall be directly coupled to an electric motor by means of

two coupling halves bolted with Allen screws. The coupling shall be
fitted with a sheet metal guard.
.2 The electric motor shall be a 415 volts, three (3) phase, 50 Hz.
totally enclosed fan cooled squirrel cage type with principal
dimension in accordance with the IEC and DIN standards. It shall
have enclosure of class of IP55 and Class F insulation. The motor
shall be flange mounted.
.3 Motors efficiency shall comply to IEC60034-2-1 2007 and

IEC60043-30 under IE2 (EFF 1) classification according to
estimated operating hours per year. Test report shall be provided to
verify the declared efficiency.
.4 All motor size shall be sized for pump operation based on non-
overloading conditions for the full QH curve. The motor shall also
be suitable for at least 40 start/stop per hour.
PLUMBING PUMPS
SECTION 4-12
PAGE 5 OF 9
.8 Mounting
.1 The system shall be enclosed into an inertia block as shown in the

drawing.
.2 The Contractor shall ensure that plinths are constructed in the

correct position and of sizes suitable for the respective pumpsets.
.3 Full details of anti-vibration mountings to be used must be submitted

to the E.R. for approval prior to installation.
.9 Pressure Vessel
.1 The pressure vessel shall be pre-charged type and shall be

designed for a working pressure of not less than 10 bar and shall
be so arranged that the water is wholly contained within a
removable bladder type diaphragm. The bladder shall be able to
withstand a maximum temperature 82 deg. C (180 deg. F) without
impairing its performance.
.2 The diaphragm shall be EPDM or butyl rubber in with the shell

liner to have a permanent separation of air and water. The non-
toxic EPDM or butyl bladder is the only component in contact with
the liquid.
.3 The vessel shall be of deep-drawn carbon steel or welded mild

steel cylindrical construction to relevant ASME Section I for unfired
vessel and shall be epoxy coated inside and painted outside. It shall
comply fully with the requirements of JKKP and local relevant
authorities.
.4 The vessel shall be fitted with pressure switches and gauges,

lifting lugs, level gauges, safety valve and air valve, drain cock and
inspection opening.
2.4 SUMP PUMP (Submersible Drainage Pumps)
.1 General
.1 The pumpset shall be centrifugal submersible constant speed type.
.2 The pump and motor shall be combined to form a single compact

unit.
PLUMBING PUMPS
SECTION 4-12
PAGE 6 OF 9
.3 The pumpset must operate within 5% of the maximum efficiency

point shall be sized for non-overloading characteristics.
.4 The pump efficiency shall not be less than 50 %
.5 Pump to be capable of continuous operation.
.2 Pump
.1 The pumpset shall be designed for easy removal of unit by

disconnecting the discharge line.
.3 Casing
.1 The casing of the pump shall be volute construction with flanged

connections and of high grade close grained cast iron. The casing
shall be hydraulically pressure tested to at least 1 1/2 times the total
pressure imposed on the casing.
.4 Impeller
.1 The impeller shall be of cast iron, statically and dynamically

balanced in factory. The reduction of the impeller diameter, if
necessary, shall be carried out in the factory.
.5 Shaft
.1 The shaft shall be constructed of stainless steel. The diameter of

the shaft be sized to withstand all induced stresses. The shaft shall
be protected by renewable shaft sleeves.
.6 Bearings
.1 The bearings, unless, sealed in bearing housings and protected

from moisture and dust, shall be of sealed and lubricated for life
type ball or roller bearings.
.7 Seal
.1 The shaft shall be sealed of double mechanical face seals type,

providing complete isolation between the electrical motor and
pumped liquid.
.8 Strainer
.1 Suction end of the pump to be fitted with strainer and must have a
large surface area.
PLUMBING PUMPS
SECTION 4-12
PAGE 7 OF 9
.9 Motor
.1 Each pump shall be driven directly, coupled directly to a totally

enclosed induction motor of class F insulation. Enclosure of motor
shall be of IP68 protection.
.2 Fan motor shall be designed for 415 volts, 3 phase, 50 hertz

continuous operation.
.3 Motor shall have built-in overload protection and designed for

continuous operation.
.4 Motor cable installed shall be suitable for submersible pump

applications and this shall be indicated by a code or legend
permanently labelled on the cable. Cable sizing and length to be
adequate to allow motor voltage conversion without replacing the
cable.
.5 Motor to be suitable for 415V/3P/50Hz or 240V/1P/50Hz power

supply.
.6 Motor speed to have full load speed not exceeding 2900rpm.
.10 Mounting
.1 Vibration isolation shall be effected by the use of spring plus/or

neoprene in shear mountings to suit the degree of vibration isolation
specified and the pump location. Not less than four (4) mountings
shall be provided for each pump/motor assembly. Sample of all
selected vibration isolators c/w catalogue and selection data shall
be submitted to the E.R. for approval prior to installation.
.2 The mountings shall be selected and positioned so as to produce

uniform deflection of all mountings acting in the same place when
the pump is operating and under all loads imposed by the pipework
under operating conditions.
.3 Inertia block shall be incorporated into the base plate to reduce

amplitude of vibration where necessary or as shown in the drawing.
.11 Building Control System (BCS) Interface
.1 For ON/OFF/TRIP indications of the all necessary pumpsets, the

plumbing contractor shall provide volt-free contacts and wired to the
control panel. The BCS Contractor shall provide the cable to be
terminated at the control panel only.
PLUMBING PUMPS
SECTION 4-12
PAGE 8 OF 9
2.5 VALVES
.1 Isolating bronze gate valves shall be installed for maintenance purposes.

Bronze non-return valves of special non-hammering pattern shall be
provided
2.6 PUMP FITTINGS
.1 The pumps shall be fitted with gate/butterfly valve, check valve, globe
valve, strainer, flexible connection, eccentric and concentric reducers, test
valves and pressure gauges with gauge cocks in suction and discharge
lines.
2.7 PUMP CONTROLS & OPERATION
.1 Switchboard shall be generally constructed, installed and tested to

Engineers approval. Meters for panel mounting shall be of the flush
pattern. Indicating instruments shall be to B.S. 89 1st grade. All meter
and relays shall be fully tropicalised. Labels shall be provided to identify
the items of equipment, circuits and cables and shall be clear perspex
and reverse engraved.
.2 Pumps shall have manual ON/OFF push button in addition to the

following automatic start/stop controls controlled by water level. A warning
bell shall sound if either or both duty and standby pumps are defective.
.3 A water level control unit shall be installed in the suction tank as shown
on the drawing to stop the pumps when the water level reaches the pre-
determined low level. An alarm shall then be sounded to warn this
condition.
.4 “No Float” electrode or other approved type level control shall be supplied
and installed for the above operations. Wiring, controls and connecting up
with the pumps shall be done by this Contractor to the Local Authority’s
requirements. Size of electrode wiring from “No Float” switches shall be
of 2.5 mm2 cross sectional area.
2.8 PAINTING AND LABELLING:
.1 Shall be as specified under “Painting and Labelling” Section.
2.9 BALANCING, TESTING & COMMISSIONING
.1 Shall be as specified under “Balancing, Testing & Commissioning”

Section.
PLUMBING PUMPS
SECTION 4-12
PAGE 9 OF 9
3.0 EXECUTION
.1 Unless otherwise specified in the drawings, each pump and motor

combination shall be mounted on an integral welded base frame of
minimum 6”high steel channels with spring mountings supporting the
base. The frame shall be filled with concrete. Base shall be large
enough to support the first pipe elbows. The pump shall be bolted directly
onto the inertia blocks wherever specified. Each pump shall be installed
with a minimum of four springs.
.2 The base frame shall be free standing and laterally stable without any
housing and complete with 5/16’ to 3/8’ neoprene acoustical friction pads
between the baseplate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling
bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall
be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.
Spring shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the
rated deflection. The spring static deflection shall be to the
recommendation of the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 4-12

THERMAL STORAGE ELECTRIC WATER HEATER
SECTION 4-13
PAGE 1 OF 2
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION

Documents.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
.1 Storage Hot Water Heater
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Provide the following Manufacturer's Specifications and Engineering

Data:
.1 Materials
.2 Parts
.3 Devices
.4 Finish
.5 Performance Data
.6 Area of Use
.7 Layout
.1 BS 5572: 1978 ; Code of Practice for Sanitary Pipework
.2 SYABAS Requirements
.3 Suruhanjaya Tenaga
.4 Perbadanan Putrajaya
.5 UBBL
.6 Test certificate (Including Test certificate from SIRIM and DOSH if

applicable)
2.0 PRODUCTS
.1 The Water Heater shall be of the thermal storage type electric heater and
designed for wall or ceiling mounting. The water heaters and its
accessories shall be approved by the IEC, SYABAS, JKR and other local
authorities having jurisdiction.
THERMAL STORAGE ELECTRIC WATER HEATER
SECTION 4-13
PAGE 2 OF 2
.2 Each heater shall incorporate an automatic thermostat control preset at

60 degree C’ (1400 degree F) and also a second stage thermostat with
manual reset. The wattage of heating element shall be 3 Kw for all
capacities unless otherwise.
.3 The inner water container shall be constructed with 18 gauge stainless

steel to type 304 with 14 gauge stainless steel at the disc end. The
constructional and water requirement of the thermal-storage shall comply
to B.S. 3456 part 1: 1969 & Part 2: Sec. 2.7: 1970. Every heater has to be
individually checked and tested to withstand a pressure of at least 150
psi. the container shall be lagged with thick fibre glass wool or equivalent
which is of non-degenerate type and non-corrosive to heater parts and
shall comply to B.S. 5615. The external casing shall be electro galvanised
treated against corrosion and finished with powder coating in beige colour
subject to Architect’s approval. The heater shall be mounted on
galvanised steel brackets against the wall or soffit of floor.
3.0 TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
.1 Each thermal storage electric water heater shall be complete with a

15mm dia. temperature and pressure relief valve to provide protection
against over-heating temperature and sudden change of pressure in
order to eliminate the hazard of water heater explosion.
.2 The relief valve shall be constructed of cast gun metal complete with
safety feature such a sealed spring cavity, safety drain relief device,
thermostatic probe and silicone seat disc.
.3 The thermostatic probe of the temperature / Pressure relief valve shall

facilitate the valve seat to expand and open before the water temperature
exceeds the boiling point at atmospheric pressure. The valve should be
preset at 100 psi and 99 degree C.
.4 The temperature and pressure relief valve shall be with SIRIM approval.
END OF SECTION 4-13

ELECTRICAL WORKS
SECTION 4-14
PAGE 1 OF 10
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
.1 Works of this Section shall conform to the requirements of the Contract

Documents.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
.1 The work under this section shall cover the following items:-
.1 Starter and Control Panel.
.2 Electrical wiring, conduits, trunkings, cable trays etc.
.3 Electric motors.
.4 Earthing.
.5 Interfacing with BCS.
.1 All items of equipment to be installed and all electrical works must conform
and comply to the following:-
.1 Local electricity supply authority and statutory requirements
.2 British Standards
.3 IEC Standards
1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 To submit the following:-
.1 Equipment data, manufacturer's catalogues and samples.
.2 Electrical schematic wiring diagrams and associated component

details, including drawings on the starter and control panel and
cabling layouts.
.3 Power supply single line diagrams
.4 Type-test certificates to BS 5486
.5 As-built drawings, operation and maintenance manuals

ELECTRICAL WORKS
SECTION 4-14
PAGE 2 OF 10
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 STARTER AND CONTROL PANEL (SCP)
.1 The starter and control panel shall be of the self-contained, extensible, wall
or floor, where mounting appropriate and flush-fronted metal cubicle type.
It shall house approved type moulded-base circuit breakers, contactors,
starters, relays, fuses, selectors switch and isolator switches, fuse
distribution boards, meters, busbars, indicating lamps and all other
necessary items of equipment whether specified hereinafter or not. The
degree of protection for the enclosures as per IEC 529 shall at least be IP
41. When the doors are opened, the degree of protection to all live parts
shall at least be IP 20. Distribution panels and auxiliary board shall have
Form 1 construction in compliance with IEC 439-1.
.2 The SCP shall be suitable for indoor service with an ambient temperature of
up to 40C with 100% RH at maximum continuous rating without exceeding
the maximum temperature permitted by the relevant BS specification to
which reference is made herein for operation on 415/240V, 3 phase/single
phase, 50Hz supply system operating with solidly earthed neutral.
.3 Each SCP shall be fabricated from polished steel sheets of not less than
1.6mm in thickness and shall be of rigid construction with all joints welded.
.4 The door shall also be constructed from polished steel sheets of not less
than 1.6mm in thickness and shall be rigidly reinforced in the inside. The
doors shall be provided with a push type door latch and of such
construction that the door cannot be opened unless the isolator switch or
handle is direct turned to the OFF position thereby cutting off the electric
power supply to the electrical mechanisms inside the starter and control
panel. To ensure dust-proof locking arrangements, felt rubber insert shall
be incorporated. Panels exposed to public shall be provided with a
secondary door with a window constructed of perspex material for viewing
of the indicator lamps beyond.
.5 Panel doors shall be fitted on the inside with slot to keep a copy of A4 size
As-Built laminated electrical circuit diagram.
.6 All incoming and outgoing circuits and wiring shall be brought to the
contactors, starters, relays and controllers via insulated terminal strips
mounted within the cubicle. All wiring between terminal strips and electrical
equipment inside the starter and control panel shall be neatly run and taped
in accordance with the requirements of the local electrical supply authority.
ELECTRICAL WORKS
SECTION 4-14
PAGE 3 OF 10
.7 Power supply to electrical anti-condensation heater inside the assembly

shall be supplied from a separate source connected between system phase
and neutral. The heating system of each assembly section shall be
separately protected and switched for isolation purposes by means of a
miniature circuit breaker in combination with a residual current device of
30mA sensitivity. When the heating system is live, this shall be indicated by
means of a prominently situated red light. The heating system shall be
designed in such a way that the heat is adequately distributed over all
functional units.
.8 Busbars
.1 The busbars installed in the starter and control panel shall:
.1 be of high Conductivity hard drawn copper and tinned;
.2 be of sufficient cross-sectional area to supply power to all

the intended equipment, with the maximum current density
not exceeding 155A per sq.cm;
.3 be sized for duct enclosed rating;
.4 be capable of withstanding the rated short circuit without any

deformation.
.5 have joints electro-tinned, coated with acid free vaseline and

bolted together with cadmium plated steel bolts, washers,
nuts and locknuts;
.6 be provided with a removable section for the installation of

current transformers;
.7 be supported on synthetic resin moulded type insulators,

panels and cleats;
.8 pass through 12mm thick (minimum) close fitting insulated

panels through a single hole in metalwork where installed
from one component to another;
.9 be provided with suitable phase identification:
LINE 1 - Red
LINE 2 - White
LINE 3 - Blue
NEUTRAL - Black
EARTH - Green / Yellow
Instrumentation - Grey
ELECTRICAL WORKS
SECTION 4-14
PAGE 4 OF 10
.2 Busbar markings, arrangement connections and grade of copper

shall comply with BS 158, 159, 1433 and 1977. Busbars shall be air
insulated, of high conductivity, hard-drawn copper, rigidly supported
to resist any mechanical force to which they may be subjected
under the maximum through fault conditions and also the
contribution from motors.
.3 Whenever possible busbar drops or secondary and smaller

apparatus shall be made to circular section busbar covered with
PVC tubing in appropriate colour and terminated in concentric lug
type, cone grip cable sockets.
.4 The neutral busbar shall be provided with adequate number of

terminals including cable lugs, bolts, etc. to suit the installation.
.5 The starter and control panel shall be arranged such that the
busbars run horizontally through each sectionalized length, rigidly
mounted on non-hygroscopic insulators with connections from the
busbars to the circuit breakers; switches effected by means of
copper bar or rod securely clamped to the bars and identified by
means of painting or coloured plastic sleeving to indicate the phase
colours.
.9 Fuse Switches
.1 Fuse switches shall comply with IEC 947 and shall be heavy duty,
double air break, quick-make and break pattern suitable for on-load
operation. The fixed contacts shall be fully shrouded so as to ensure
complete isolation of the cartridge fuse links when the switch is in
the open position.
.2 An 'ON' and 'OFF' position indicator shall be fitted to give clear

indication of switchgear position when in service.
.3 Fuse-switches shall be arranged and interlocked such that access

to the fuses for replacement purposes, or to other normally 'live'
connection, is only possible when the switch is in the 'OFF' position.
.4 Fuses shall be of the HRC type cat 440/AC4 Class Q to BS 88.
2.2 ELECTRICAL WIRING
.1 All wiring shall be carried out with PVC cables in fabricated conduits and
shall be run strictly in accordance with the requirements of the electrical
supply authority. Cables in which kinks or abrasions occur is not acceptable
and shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
ELECTRICAL WORKS
SECTION 4-14
PAGE 5 OF 10
.2 All cables shall be of approved manufacture and shall be of distinguishing

colours for their specified applications.
.3 Mineral insulated (MI) cables shall be used where specified for wiring to
motors and equipment witch are required to function during a fire situation.
Cables shall be neatly run in cable trays exposed in the plant rooms or in
suitable location whichever is applicable.
.4 Bending radius of cables shall be not less than eight times the overall cable
diameter. The cables shall be terminated at a brass junction box near the
motor or equipment terminal block and at earthbar inside the starter and
control panel. The each bar connection between the junction box,
equipment or motors shall be made by PVC cables and PVC heavy duty
flexible conduit fitted with approved 6.5 sq mm shall be terminated with a
lug type or grip cable sockets of approved manufacture.
.5 A steel sleeve shall be provided where cables pass through a concrete

floor, and shall extend at least 150mm above the floor to afford mechanical
protection to the cable. The sleeve shall be effectively sealed with approved
fire resistant sealant after the cables have been inserted.
.6 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) insulated cables shall be of the 600/1000V

MS274/BS 6346. PVC insulated cables may be used where cables are
installed in conduit or trunking, but where cables are installed in plaster, in
exposed positions or partly run in conduit and continued concealed directly
in plaster or run on the surface of walls and ceiling, PVC insulated and
sheathed type must be used.
2.3 CONDUITS AND CABLE TRAYS
.1 PVC cables shall be installed in conduits fixed to walls, metal work, ceiling
or buried in the ground. Conduits shall be of Class B heavy gauge, screwed
steel type, and together with conduit fittings shall comply with BS 31:1940.
All conduits and fittings shall be galvanised and the use of water or gas
pipe is prohibited. Conduits bearing traces of rust or damage shall not be
used.
.2 Conduits shall be of sufficiently large sections and so arranged with draw-in

boxes to allow for either an easy draw in or out of any or all the cables, the
total number of which must not exceed the number set out in BS 7671.
.3 All conduits shall be mechanically and electrically continuous throughout

and shall be efficiently earthed with heavy copper wire or tape and screw-
on clips. No conduit shall be less than 19mm in outside diameter.
.4 Conduit terminations to loop in boxes shall consist of a screwed socket and

smooth bore bush, but to adaptable boxes, fuse-boards etc. termination
shall consist of a flanged coupling, lead washers and smooth bore bush.
.5 Where conduits are exposed to damp situations, or are buried in the ground
they shall be made completely water tight by treating all joints with red lead.
ELECTRICAL WORKS
SECTION 4-14
PAGE 6 OF 10
.6 Cable trays may only be used in the Main Plant Room to support cables at
high level from the Main Switchboard to the motors.
.7 Cable trays shall be fabricated from perforated sheet steel with suitably
formed edges at each side, and sized in accordance with the number and
sizes of cables they are required to support. In this regard, cables shall be
installed in a single formation with the exception of single core cables which
require to be installed in a trefoil configuration with adequate space allowed
for air circulation.
.8 Cable trays shall be of 1.6mm thick for width not exceeding 300mm (1 ft.).
For width exceeding 300mm the thickness shall be 2mm.
.9 Cables trays shall be hot dip galvanised. Intersection pieces and bends
shall be factory made and not dip galvanised finish. The cut end of the
cable tray shall be made good with a coat of zinc rich primer and two coats
of approved aluminium paint.
.10 Cable trays shall be supported using purpose made brackets and
accessories and shall be installed in straight level runs, and in a manner to
minimise the number of bends.
.11 The cables shall be adequately fixed on the cable tray and braced with
purpose made clips, cleats or supports recommended by the cable maker
to ensure that damage is minimised under fault conditions.
.12 The screws used in fixing the cable trays shall be brass type.
2.4 TRUNKING
.1 Trunking shall be made of hot dipped galvanised steel, rigidly formed.

Thickness of the steel sheet shall be 18 SWG for trunking of sizes up to
100mm x 100mm (4" x 4") and 16 SWG for bigger sizes. Covers of same
material shall be protected and secured by means of plated screws. No
projection from screws or other sharp objects shall be allowed inside the
trunking.
.2 Trunking shall be mounted in a neat symmetrical manner suitably spaced to

permit easy removal of covers and supported by strap hangers at intervals
of not more than 1.5m (5 ft.).
.3 Connections between adjacent length of trunking and fittings shall be by

butt joint and earth continuity shall be provided across all joints by means of
copper bonding links along the whole trunking length.
.4 Rubber or insulated bushes shall be provided for holes in trunking where

cable or conduit penetrates through.
ELECTRICAL WORKS
SECTION 4-14
PAGE 7 OF 10
2.5 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING
.1 The exact location of the cable trench will be identified on site by the S.O.
.2 The cable shall be laid at a minimum depth of 750mm and shall be

terminated with mechanical glands. The glands shall be provided with earth
tails for connection to earth continuity conductors.
.3 Before the cables are laid, the bottom of the trench shall be covered with
sand to a thickness of 50mm to from a bed. After the cables are laid, the
first 75mm depth of cover backfill shall consist of sand. Following this the
trench shall be refilled in 150mm layers, each layer being well rammed and
consolidated.
.4 The surfaces of refilled trenches shall be temporarily reinstated and

maintained in a through safe condition until complete consolidation of the
soil is achieved before the final refilling and reinstating the group to the
same conditioning prior to excavation.
2.6 ELECTRIC MOTORS
.1 Electric motors shall be of 3-phase 415V, 50 cycles supply for 1HP and
above, and for motors of less than 1HP may be of 1-phase 240V 50 cycles
supply. They shall be of 1000rpm synchronous 6-pole unless otherwise
indicated in the drawings for quiet and over ceiling applications and shall be
of maximum 1450 rpm for main plantroom.
.2 Motors shall have a minimum IP 54 ingress protection unless otherwise

specified, conforming to BS 4999 Part 2. All motors shall be in accordance
with BS 5000 Part 99 and BS 2757 with Class F insulation to BS 2757.
Motors shall be continuously rated (CMR category of BS 5000 Part 99) and
shall have torque characteristics as required by their respective duties.
.3 Motors starters shall be in accordance with IEC 947 and equipped with
overload, single-phasing and under-voltage protection. Where remote
control is required, starters shall be of contactor type with coils wound for
240V 50 cycle supply.
.4 Local isolating switches installed adjacent to motors shall be rated not less
than the locked motor current of the motor.
.5 Weather proof IP 56 enclosure type switches shall be used where exposed

to weather and in damp locations, and all conduits entries shall be sealed.
.6 Starters shall be of the following types unless otherwise specified:-
.1 Fractional horsepower motors shall be single phase 240V, 50Hz

squirrel-cast and split phase start.
.2 1HP to 3HP single phase motors shall be squirrel-cage and

capacitor start.
ELECTRICAL WORKS
SECTION 4-14
PAGE 8 OF 10
.3 1HP to 3HP three phase motors shall be squirrel-cage and direct on

line start.
.4 3HP to 10HP motors shall be three phase 415V, 50Hz squirrel-case

and start delta start.
.5 10HP to 25HP motors shall be three phase 415V, 50Hz auto-

transformer start.
.7 All starters shall be of automatic type complete with 'Start/Stop' push

buttons, auxiliary contacts, Automatic/Off/Manual selector switch and
provision for remote control as required.
.8 Power factor correction capacitors shall be provided as required to correct

the power factor of all motors over 2HP in size to 0.9 lagging or better at all
loads. The capacitors shall be installed adjacent to the motors and
complete with necessary protection fuses discharge-resistors and all wiring
and connection.
.9 The rating of motors shall be such that they will not be over loaded at any
points within the range of operating of the equipment connected and shall
be of adequate rating and starting characteristics to allow equipment to be
brought up to speed on starting in a reasonable time.
.10 Bearings shall be of ball or lubricated for life roller or sleeve type as
applicable. Terminal boxes with gasket cover shall be provided suitable for
reception or screwed conduit entry or MICC cable as required.
2.7 EARTHING
.1 A complete earthing system comprising cables and copper tape necessary

to bond permanently and effectively to earth all non-current-carrying metal
shall be supplied, installed and connected.
.2 All earthing to individual items of equipment shall be looped on to the earth

of the incoming electricity supplies to be provided by others.
2.8 OVERLOAD PROTECTION
.1 Thermal Overload Relays in accordance with BS 4941 shall be fitted to all

motors except where the motors are used in fire fighting services.
.2 Thermal overload relays shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer

of the contactor. All the overload relays shall be of adjustable type, so that
the full-load current of the motor shall be about the mid-point of the
overload calibration.
.3 The thermal overload relay shall, by way of differential trip action between
the bimetal elements on each phase, be able to protect the motor single-
phasing burnt-out.
ELECTRICAL WORKS
SECTION 4-14
PAGE 9 OF 10
.4 The thermal overload relays shall be used in conjunction with thermistors in

motor windings.
.5 All thermal overload relays shall be of manual reset type.
.6 Thermistors and Thermistor Relays shall be provided for all motors

engaged in variable load drive and variable speed drive, except where
engaged in fire protection services.
.7 Thermistors shall have positive temperature co-efficient and shall be

installed during manufacture. These thermistors shall be installed in each
motor, one in each winding and each wired separately back to the motor
terminal box by the motor manufacturer.
.8 The thermistors shall be connected is series in a suitably matched relay unit

manual reset button, the active circuit to the thermistor relay shall be from a
source which is not interrupted by normal start-stop operations. Other
circuit arrangements with justification under certain circumstances will be
considered.
.9 Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB) incorporating overload release and short

circuit trip shall be used to protect outgoing motorised actuators, solenoid-
operated valves, heater circuits and single-phase motor circuits. Every
miniature circuit breaker in circuit protector shall be selected to match the
thermal and permissible current requirements. The short circuit rating of
this MCB's must be able to meet the fault level likely to be experienced at
the switchboards.
.10 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB) shall be used to protect all three
motor circuits. Moulded Case Circuit Breakers shall comply fully with IEC
947-2. The contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the type of
MCCB selected match the thermal and permissible current requirements
and provide good and proper protection and discrimination of the electrical
system. The short-circuit rating of the MCCB's must be able to meet the
most pessimistic fault level of 50 kA for Power and 10kA for Control Panel.
All motor feeders shall incorporate a set of motor type cartridge fuses
before the MCCB's.
.11 Solid-state Over-current Trip device with adjustable overload setting and
short-circuit trip shall be provided for the MCCB's and ACB's used as the
main isolators of switchboards above 100 A.
ELECTRICAL WORKS
SECTION 4-14
PAGE 10 OF 10
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 All electrical work and workmanship on materials covered by this section

shall conform to the best principles of modern engineering practice, be of
first grade quality with respect to design, manufacture and installation and
shall be complete for satisfactory operation, control, maintenance and
safety, under all conditions of services.
.2 The Contractor shall supply, install and connect all motors, starter and
control panel, switchgears and all other necessary equipments and
materials except where it is stated in the specification and/or drawings that
materials are to be supplied or works are to be carried out by others.
.3 The Contractor shall obtain, fill in and lodge all notices required by any
authority, public or private, having jurisdiction over the installation and shall
obtain all consent necessary for the various work to be executed and shall
pay all fees in connection herewith.
.4 The Contractor shall carry out the insulation resistance test using 1000V
insulation tester for MI cable. The test shall be carried out immediately after
the seals have been applied and again after a minimum of 48 hours later
before the final connections are made. Installation with reading less than
100 megaohm will not be acceptable.
.5 Supply floor mats of rubber material without perforation to be minimum

thickness of 12mm. The mat shall be placed in front of the starter and
control panel covering its entire length.
.6 Provide approved single line diagrams indicating details of switchboards

and control circuits. All drawings shall be framed in a glass panel and
mounted at the appropriate position acceptable to the Employer
Representative.
.7 Any floor mounted starter and control panel shall rest a concrete plinth of
150mm thick.
.8 All works shall be supervised by competent personnel with appropriate

Suruhanjaya Tenaga registration.
END OF SECTION 4-14

PLUMBING TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
SECTION 4-15
PAGE 1 OF 8
1.0 GENERAL
1 DESCRIPTION

Documents.
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
.1 Pressure testing of piping system.
.2 Preliminary and final balancing of all water systems.
.3 Temporary pipe connections, pipe caps, tees, valves, etc.
.4 Performance testing of all system.
.5 This section covers general pipe and equipment testing. Additional

specific equipment tests are covered in individual sections.
.6 Operation of systems as required for testing by other divisions of this

Specification.
.7 Cooperate with independent agent performing inspections.
.1 During the progress of the work, make tests as specified herein and as
required by authorities having jurisdiction, including local authorities’
Inspection Department or E.R. Include all qualified personnel, equipment
apparatus, and services required to perform the tests.
.2 All field test instruments to have calibration certificate not more than 6
months old and issued by a recognised independent testing authority
prior to testing and/or balancing.
2.0 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
.1 Perform all tests required by Codes, Ordinances, and as specified herein,

as well as demonstration of operation for all equipment. Each final test to
be witnessed by the E.R. Give a minimum of seven (7) days written notice
before performing tests.
SECTION 4-15
PAGE 2 OF 8
.2 When directed by the E.R. and/or the authorities having jurisdiction or

when the situations of site favour tests to be carried out on complete
sections or parts as the installation work progress, such tests shall be
carried out at Contractor’s cost. Advance notice shall be given for such
tests.
.3 Perform preliminary tests and repair leak, damage, defects or replace.

Retest systems repaired before notifying the E.R. of final tests.
.4 A minimum of fourteen (14) days notice shall be given to the E.R. to verify
the test result at site. Should the E.R. find discrepancies between the
recorded test results and the measurement demonstrated to him, further
tests shall be repeated at no additional cost.
.5 Maintain a logbook of all tests, preliminary and final, showing dates,

personnel, observer’s initials, description of test, and test status. Provide
updated log to E.R. each month throughout the construction period. Initial
log submitted to include listing of all anticipated tests.
.6 Should any failure occur due to or arising from faulty materials or poor
workmanship, the E.R. shall decide if further tests will be required after
remedial works have been successfully carried out.
.7 Install all temporary and permanent equipment and instruments required

for tests, as well as additional thermometer wells, gauge and instrument
connections, at no additional cost to the Employer.
.8 Furnish all fuel, water, and electricity required in performing the testing,
balancing and adjustment mechanical systems.
.9 When the final tests have been successfully carried out, two (2) copies of
all test results, shall be submitted in loose leaf bound form to the E.R.
within two weeks of completion of tests. Tests which are to be carried out
under certain atmospheric conditions may be submitted later for insertion
into the test binder. All test data shall be on A4 size sheet paper.
Manufacturer’s literature, apart from published drafts or tables will not be
accepted. All test data shall be tabulated with design requirements and
shall be signed and dated.
.10 Clean all piping and tanks before testing.
.11 Use calibrated test gauges with at least 100mm diameter dial. Gauge
range not to be more than three (3) times test pressure.
.12 Provide and demonstrate operation of all test equipment and apparatus
required for the complete testing and inspection of all systems at such
time and locations as may be directed by the E.R. and/or by the
authorities having jurisdiction.
SECTION 4-15
PAGE 3 OF 8
.13 All tests shall be successfully completed and approved prior to the
application of insulation and prior to the concealment of any portion of the
system being tested.
.14 In the event of any dispute with regard to scope of testing, adjusting and
balancing, the decision of the E.R. shall be taken as correct and final.
3.2 TESTING
.1 General
.1 All systems shall be tested to confirm that they perform in

accordance with the intent of the Specification. Should such tests
prove unsatisfactory, remedial work shall be repeated to the
satisfaction of the E.R.
.2 Factory Assembled Equipment
.1 All factory assembled equipment shall be factory manufactured

and tested to conform to the relevant specifications.
.2 The design data and test certification of any factory assembled

equipment shall be submitted to the E.R. if requested to do so at
no additional cost.
.3 Failure to supply the design data and test certification of the

equipment if so required may result in the rejection of the
equipment.
.3 Inspection and Testing by Authorities
.1 All necessary arrangements must be made for the inspection and

testing of the installation by the relevant authorities inclusive of
obtaining all necessary certificates/clearances and the expenses
incurred must be inclusive in the tender price.
.4 Pipework Test
.1 Pipework and fittings shall be hydraulically pressure tested to one

and a half (1 ½) times the working pressure, or 16 bar (PN 16)
minimum whichever is greater. The pressure shall be recorded
over a minimum period of 24 hours and extended, if necessary,
until a satisfactory result has been obtained. The test pressure
shall not drop more than 3% over a period of 24 hours.
.2 Special care shall be taken during pressure testing to ensure that

the controls, safety devices, meters, etc. whose operating
pressure ranges are below the test pressure, are not damaged or
have their accuracy impaired.
SECTION 4-15
PAGE 4 OF 8
.5 Vibration Test
.1 Take vibration and alignment field measurements on every pump.

Readings shall include shaft alignment, equipment vibration,
bearing housing vibration and foundation vibration. Readings shall
be made using portable IRD (or as approved) equipment capable
of filtering out various unwanted frequencies. Maximum vibration
at any point listed above, or where specified, shall not exceed 2
mils on pumps, unless otherwise specified. Equipment
manufacturers shall certify in writing that the field readings, which
do not exceed the maximum specified, are acceptable.
.6 Water Tank Test
.1 Tank shall be filled up with water and checked for leaks at panel
joints. Check sides and edges of sectional tank for any distortion.
.7 Pumps Tests
.1 Pumps
Adjust each pump for design flow and record flow, head and
power absorbed. Check alignment before putting them in
operation.
.2 Motors
Test for quietness and correct operation. Adjust all controls to

maintain designed condition. Check direction of rotation of all
motors. Check actual current being drawn.
.3 Record the following design requirements for pumps and pump

motors from the Drawings and reviewed shop drawings.
.1 Manufacturer, model and size.
.2 Water quantity (litre/sec)
.3 Total head (m)
.4 Pump speed (revolutions per minute)
.5 Impeller size
.6 Net positive suction head
.7 Motor kW and brake kW.
.8 Voltage, supply frequency, and amperage (V, Hz, A)
.4 Record the following data from pumps and pump motors installed:
SECTION 4-15
PAGE 5 OF 8
.1 Manufacturer, model and size.
.2 Impeller size.
.3 Motor kW, service factor and revolutions per minute.
.4 Volts, hertz and full load amperes.
.5 Motor starter and heater size.
.6 Equipment location.
.5 Record the following data for pumps and pump motors installed at
final balanced conditions :
.1 Pump speed-revolutions per minute.
.2 Total head at shutoff or dead-end discharge in m. (Plot this

value on pump curve as a verification of impeller size).
.3 Suction, discharge and total head at final adjusted flow in

m.
.4 Calculate brake kW and show on pump curve.
.5 Motor amperage and voltage on each phase at operating

conditions.
.6 In conjunction with pump manufacturer for multiple pump,

pumping systems, construct and submit system curves
indicating operating point with one pump operating, two
pumps operating, three pumps operating, etc.
.6 Electrical Test
.1 As-built power and control diagrams shall be submitted to

the E.R. if there are modifications to or deviations from the
original drawings that have been approved by the E.R.
These ‘as-built’ diagrams shall be submitted two (2) weeks
in advance of the test.
.2 The system control, safety devices, etc., shall be fully

tested, the latter by stimulation of faults.
.3 The whole electrical works shall be tested as required and

as prescribed by the Local Authorities.
SECTION 4-15
PAGE 6 OF 8
.4 The testing of the installation shall comply in all respects

th
with Section E of the 16 Edition of the IEE Regulations
and shall be carried out wholly or in part at the discretion of
the E.R. These shall include but shall not be limited to the
following:-
.1 Insulation resistance
.2 Verification of polarity.
.3 Earth continuity path.
.4 Effectiveness of earth.
.5 Tests to prove correct operation of interlocks,

tripping and closing circuits, indications, etc.
.6 Operation of all protective gear circuits by primary

injection and system fault tests to check sensitivity
and stability.
.7 Protective gear timing tests as may be necessary.
.8 Test operation of alarm devices.
.9 Rotational tests on all motors.
.10 Polarity tests to verify that single pole switches are

installed in the phase or live conductor of each
circuit, and not in the neutral conductor.
.11 A test to verify the continuity of all conductors in

every ring circuit, correct connections to terminals
or all sockets.
.12 Insulation resistance test to earth and between

conductors before and after fitting of lamps.
.13 Insulation resistance tests on any electrical plant,

equipment, machine and apparatus before and
after connecting such plant equipment, machine
and apparatus to the power supply.
.14 Earth continuity tests for each final sub-circuit and

the completed installation.
.15 Full load test, which shall be sustained for at least

one hour to ensure that all motors are operating as
intended and that all circuits are protected correctly.
.5 Electrical systems shall be adjusted and recorded as follows:

SECTION 4-15
PAGE 7 OF 8
.1 Adjust each thermal overload to 10% above the actual load

on each motor on a hot day and not more than the rated
full load amps of the motor.
.2 Record the nameplate rating, the measured current drawn

on each phase and the thermal overload setting for each
motor and electric heater.
.3 Where thermistors are used, the operation of the

thermistor, and the calibration of the thermistor relay shall
be checked.
.6 Motor starter over-load relay setting shall be 10% above the actual
load current but shall not exceed the rated full load current of the
motor.
.7 Where the motor is protected with thermistors the motor starter

over-load relay shall be so adjusted that the thermistors function
only as a back-up over-load cut-out.
3.3 BALANCING
.1 After the entire installation has been completed; make required

adjustments to balance valves, air vents, automatic controls, pumps, etc.,
until performance requirements are met. Make these adjustments with
equipment operating.
.2 Permanently mark the balanced position of each balancing valve on the

pipe with indelible paint or marker.
.3 Before any hydronic balancing work is done, install clean strainers, check
proper pump rotation, proper control valve installation and operation.
Verify that each system is adequately bled and vented, proper system
static pressure is available to assure a full system, flow meter and check
valve is properly installed. Maintain throttling devices and control valves
open at this time as required and appropriate.
.4 After piping systems have been installed, tested, cleaned and flushed,
complete with all pumps, piping, valves, and other items as herein
specified, make adjustments as required to deliver the water volumes at
each piece of equipment to within 5% of design flow as shown on the
Drawings, or as required to properly balanced the load throughout the
areas.
.5 Do not perform balancing until the entire system has been pressure
tested, flushed and cleaned.
3.4 FINAL REPORT

SECTION 4-15
PAGE 8 OF 8
.1 Demonstrate to the E.R. that all systems and/or equipment have been
balanced and adjusted properly, and that the system and/or equipment
are in compliance with the Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION 4-15

PACIFIC STAR
IMPLEMENTATION OF TESTING AND ADJUSTING COMMISSIONING, HANDOVER
EMPLOYER ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURE
SECTION 4-37
PAGE 1
1.0 INTRODUCTION
.1 The importance of the management of the test and adjust/commissioning/

handover - employer acceptance procedure must be emphasized.
.2 Successful operation of a completed facility involves a staged sequence

of testing, witnessing, training and information delivery to the employer by
the contractor. The end result is a completed facility with an employer
being confident of the proper installation of operating system, meeting the
full intent of the contract drawings and specifications; such systems
successfully operated and demonstrated; and operating personnel fully
trained with detailed as-built drawings and operation and maintenance
manuals on hand allowing confidence in the ability to operate and
maintain the facility.
.3 The accompanying information presented is in the form of a

"Commissioning Manual".
.4 The "Commissioning Manual" is intended to provide a common

framework of standards and employer expectations across the project. It
is not substitute for individual project specification requirements. It is,
however, a minimum standard that all contractors must recognize as
complementing the specifications, providing a framework for facility
completion and employer acceptance.
.5 This manual, with its suggested minimum requirements and handover

procedures, is required of each contractor.
2.0 TASK DEFINITIONS
.1 Task Description
.1 General Contractor Commissioning Manager - The general

contractor shall appoint a responsible manager for the
management, planning, coordination and implementation of the
process described in this Manual.
.2 The Commissioning Manager shall prepare a detailed and

comprehensive commissioning programme and event schedule.
The schedule shall be submitted no later than ten months prior to
the contract completion date. The schedule shall be based on the
input of the trade contractors and sub-contractors own detailed
programme and schedule. The overall schedule shall include (for
each trade) main activity items and duration's identified within the
major components of:
.1 Pre-commissioning/installation testing as required by

specification and by the code authority
.2 Final snagging/defect clearance

PACIFIC STAR
SECTION 4-37
PAGE 2
.3 Commissioning (system operation, test and adjust)
.4 Employer Training/Documentation Submittal
.5 Handover Employer Acceptance
.3 Progress measured against this schedule shall be monitored by

the Commissioning Manager and shall identify critical path
network items by other trades which could impact/delay progress.
Such impact/delay shall be highlighted on the event schedule with
the schedule revised as necessary to maintain progress.
.4 In addition to the Commissioning Programme and Event

Schedule, the Commissioning Manager shall identify critical path
network items by other trades which could impact/delay progress.
Such impact/delay shall be highlighted on the event schedule with
the schedule revised as necessary to maintain progress.
.5 The Commissioning Manager shall call regular commissioning

team meetings. The meetings shall be minuted with action items
and responsibility clearly identified. Weekly meetings shall be
required for the final six months of construction for each facility.
Meeting minutes (and progress against the event schedule) shall
be reported to the Employer.
.6 The Commissioning Manager shall ensure each major trade

contractor appoints a person responsible for progressing
commissioning. Such a person may typically be the trade
contractor's project manager. In any event, such person shall have
the authority to progress decisions taken within the text of
commissioning. Each trade contractor's designated
commissioning manager's name shall be reported to the
Employer.
.7 The Commissioning Manager shall be responsible for and shall

maintain the snagging/defects system from contract initiation to
finish.
.8 Employer - The Employer shall designate a responsible manager

to coordinate with the General Contractor's Commissioning
Manager.
.9 Commissioning Specialist - A trade contractor may elect to source

start-up and handover by a specialist commissioning company. In
some cases, at least a portion of the commissioning work (air and
water balance for instance) is required to be performed by
independent contractors.
.10 If a trade contractor elects to hire a specialist company, the details

of such company must be reported to the Employer prior to such
company starting work. Details to be submitted include personnel
PACIFIC STAR
SECTION 4-37
PAGE 3
with relevant project experience, previous similar assignments,

scope of work to be undertaken on this assignment, company
resources and equipment.
.11 Use of a Commissioning Specialist by a trade contractor shall not

relieve him of his obligation to name one of his own employees as
the person responsible for progressing commissioning.
.12 Trade Contractor
.1 The trade contractor shall appoint a responsible manager

for the implementation of the commissioning process
described in this Manual. He shall prepare a trade specific
commissioning programme and event schedule for
submission to the General Contractor’s Commissioning
Manager. He shall work closely with the General
Contractor Commissioning Manager to help develop the
overall commissioning programme.
.2 Progress against his trade specific schedule shall be

reported to the General Contractor Commissioning
Manager prior to each scheduled commissioning team
meeting. Slippage shall be reported with the intended
means to recover to the General Contractor
Commissioning Manager. Commissioning delay without an
intended work programme to recover the delay is not
acceptable.
.3 The trade contractor commissioning manager is explicitly

charged with the responsibility to fulfill the obligations
imposed by this commissioning manual.
.2 Documentation Example
.1 Trade Specific Commissioning Programme
2.1 TYPICAL ACTIVITIES TO BE DESCRIBED WITHIN A COMMISSIONING

PROGRAMME
.1 Important Note
.1 The following list is NOT EXHAUSTIVE. It is intended to highlight

some of the main items required to be included in the
commissioning/ handover programme.
.2 The list shall be expanded by the contractor to cover the specific

detailed needs of individual buildings and their systems.
.3 The following lists are indicative of activity main items required to

be included for each facility commission/handover programme.
PACIFIC STAR
SECTION 4-37
PAGE 4
Although not specifically listed, such programmes are required for

site work utilities and area development work packages.
.2 Mechanical Services
Main Activity Sub-Activity
.1 Water Systems .1 Fill and Pressure Test (by

sections)
.2 Initial Flushing
.3 Re-fill and Chemically Clean
.4 Drain, Flush, Re-fill and

Water Treatment Dosing
.5 Pre-Commission Pumps
.6 Commission Pumps
.7 Check Controls Interface
.2 General Activities .1 Employer Training Date (By

System)
.2 Power on Dates (By System)
.3 Employer
Witnessing/Demonstration
(By System)
.4 Operating and Maintenance

Manual Submission
.5 Statutory Inspections
.6 Insurance Certification
.7 Rainwater System Tests
.8 Drainage System Tests
.9 Environmental Tests .
PACIFIC STAR
SECTION 4-37
PAGE 5
3.0 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
.1 Required Action
.1 Specific Testing During Construction
.1 Trade Contractor to schedule, notify General Contractor

Commissioning Manager prior to specified test.
.2 General Contractor Commissioning Manager to confirm

schedule, notify E.R.,
.3 E.R. to witness or authorise General Contractor

Commissioning Manager to witness E.R. to sign
documentation.
.4 General Contractor Commissioning Manager to log and

maintain signed Test Certificates. One copy to Trade
Contractor for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance
Manuals.
.2 Code Authority Testing
.1 During construction.
.2 After commissioning to prove performance to code

requirements.
.3 Trade Contractor to preliminary schedule, notify General

Contractor Commissioning Manager prior to scheduled
test/demonstration.
.4 For finished system, prior to scheduling the Code

Authority, the Trade Contractor shall furnish a “Certificate
of Compliance” to General Contractor Commissioning
Manager. The General Contractor Commissioning
Manager may then confirm the schedule.
.5 General Contractor Commissioning Manager to confirm

schedule, notify all parties. Notify and confirm schedule
with Code Authority after Employer approval that test/
performance demonstration may proceed.
.6 General Contractor Commissioning Manager and

Employer to attend with the Code Official. General
Contractor Commissioning Manager to provide and secure
Code Authority signature on required document.
PACIFIC STAR
SECTION 4-37
PAGE 6
.3 Commissioninq/start-Up/Testing/Adjusting/Balancing
.1 Trade Contractor to verify that system is complete, and

ready for testing and balancing. Trade Contractor to submit
to the E.R. (thru the General Contractor Commissioning
Manager) detailed proposals for testing and balancing
procedures four weeks prior to scheduling such tests.
Reporting formats outlined in this Manual shall be used.
.2 General Contractor Commissioning Manager to field verify

trade contractor's verification of system completeness.
General Contractor Commissioning Manager to notify
Trade Contractor to proceed.
.3 Trade Contractor to schedule, notify General Contractor

Commissioning Manager prior to scheduled testing/
balancing.
.4 General Contractor Commissioning Manager to notify E.R.

that procedure is ready to proceed.
.5 E.R. to witness as required to satisfy Trade Contractor is

doing properly.
.6 Trade Contractor Commissioning Manager to log and

maintain signed test and balance data. One copy to
General Contractor Commissioning Manager for
verification. One copy to E.R. (by General Contractor
Commissioning Manager) for approval. Include in
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
.2 Test Equipment
.1 General Requirements
All field test instruments to be used on the works shall comply with
the following:
.1 Be complete with calibration certificate not more than 6

months old and issued by a recognised independent
testing authority.
.2 Copies of calibration certificates together with instrument

serial numbers shall be submitted to the General Contract
Commissioning Manager, prior to their use on site.
.3 Be free from damage, or if damaged during use shall be

recalibrated.
.4 Be complete with all manufacturers Instructions.

PACIFIC STAR
SECTION 4-37
PAGE 7
.5 Instructions shall be carried at all times by the personnel

conducting the test/balance procedure.
.6 The following schedules indicate the suggested basic

types of equipment required for testing of air and water
systems. The Trade Contractor shall provide detailed
inventories of all equipment held at site (prior to use) to the
General Contractor Commissioning Manager. Such
inventory lists shall be submitted by the General Contractor
Commissioning Manager to the E.R. for approval prior to
use.
.2 Suggested Test Equipment - Water Systems
INSTRUMENT AND DUTY TYPICAL RANGES
.3 Differential Pressure
.1 Mercury Manometer 0 - 60 kpa
4 System Gauges Pressure
.1 Dial Pressure Gauge 0 - 10 bar
.5 Rotation
.1 Mechanical Tachometer 0 - 3000 RPM

.2 Optical Tachometer 0 - 3000 RPM
.6 Current
.1 Induction Ammeter 0-1200 AMP

.2 Hall Effect Ammeter 0-1000 AMP
.7 Temperature
.1 Digital Electronic - 50/+1200C

Contact Thermometer
.3 Documentation Examples
.1 Specified Testing During Construction
.1 Fluid System Pressure Test Certificate
.1 During Construction
.2 After Commissioning to Prove Compliance with Code

Requirements
PACIFIC STAR
SECTION 4-37
PAGE 8
.3 Commissioning/Start-up/Test/Adjust and Balance
.2 After Commissioning to Prove Compliance with Code

Requirements
.5 Commissioning/Start-up[Test/Adiust and Balance
4.0 IMPLEMENTATION / DESCRIPTION
.1 The snagging system shall be maintained by the General Contractor

Commissioning Manager from contract initiation to completion.
.2 All input to this system shall be coordinated through the General

Contractor Commissioning Manager.
.3 Additionally each snagging report, regardless of whomever generated

shall be copied to the E.R. The E.R. shall periodically check that all snags
have been properly documented by the General Contractor
Commissioning Manager.
.4 The snagging system also is used to define outstanding/incomplete work.

Thus the snagging report becomes the single document allowing the E.R.
to monitor progress towards completion.
.5 Additionally, a thorough log allows the E.R. a rational basis to judge both
the progress of the work and payment for same.
4.1 TASK DESCRIPTION
.1 General Contractor
.1 The General Contractor Commissioning Manager shall maintain

the overall Defect Control Log. All input to the system shall be
coordinated through him.
.2 He shall maintain the log and report on a regular basis to the E.R.
.3 No defect shall be cleared from the report log until it has been
signed by the General Contractor, the organisation initiating the
snag, and the E.R.
.4 Two defect logs shall be maintained. The main log showing all
defects shall be maintained in a complete form.
.5 A supplement log shall be maintained which is print command

from the main log.
PACIFIC STAR
SECTION 4-37
PAGE 9
.6 It only lists uncleared defects.
.7 Other print commands shall be available which SORT defects by

trade.
.8 The General Contractor Commissioning Manager shall ensure that

desnagging is accomplished by the responsible trade contractor.
The General Contractor Commissioning Manager shall hold
regular review meetings with each trade contractor's project
manager. The defect log shall be reviewed with the trade
contractor and specified dates agreed for defect clearance.
.9 If a trade contractor becomes seriously arrears in his defect

clearance, the General Contractor Commissioning Manager shall
report such to the E.R.
.10 Defect clearance performance should be incorporated into the

General Contractor's recommendation for each trade contractor's
monthly application for payment.
.11 Handover procedures to the E.R. shall not be implemented by the

General Contractor Commissioning Manager until that trade
contractor's outstanding defects list has been reduced to a
minimum.
.2 Employer’s Representative
.2 The E.R. shall not sign that a defect has been cleared until he has
personally viewed the defect repair/reinstatement.
.3 Employer/Construction Manager
.1 The Employer shall periodically check the General Contractor

Commissioning Manager maintained Defect Control Log to ensure
that all initiated reports have been logged and are being properly
maintained.
.2 The Employer shall also participate, on a regular basis, in defect

clearance procedures with the General Contractor Commissioning
Manager.
.3 The Employer may, at his discretion, allow minor snags to be

cleared from the log by designating such authority to the E.R. or
the General Contractor Commissioning Manager.
PACIFIC STAR
SECTION 4-37
PAGE 10
5.0 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
.1 General
.1 The Trade Contractors shall provide the specified number of O&M

Manuals.
.2 The manuals shall be submitted to the General Contractor

Commissioning Manager initially fly in draft format for E.R. review
a minimum of 60 days before intended demonstration /handover.
The final version to be available a minimum of 30 days before
intended demonstration/ handover.
.3 The Trade Contractors shall ensure that the necessary information

is requested from all other parties in adequate time for the above
requirements to be met.
.4 The manual cover shall be stiffened PVC /Rexine covered 4 ring

clip binders in an agreed color. The manual cover and spine tab
shall contain the project name, title etc., generally as set out in the
attached sample format.
.5 The manual page size shall be ISO size A4.
.6 Each section and sub-station within the manual(s) shall be

subdivided with color coded and numbered dividing tabs.
.7 The Trade Contractors O&M Manuals shall also incorporate

manufacturer’s technical literature and spare parts manuals.
.8 Additionally all test certificate, balancing and adjusting reports,

code authority compliance documents shall be included in the
O&M Manual.
.9 Attached to this procedure is a typical operation and maintenance

manual index which will need fine tuning to suit individual building
needs. In all cases the General Contractor Commissioning
Manager shall obtain the draft manual from the Trade Contractors
and submit for E.R. review within the above listed time free.
.10 It is likely that some sub-sections of the manual will need to be a

complete manual in their own right; however the format, cover,
number system etc., must coordinate with other manual(s) to form
a comprehensive set.
.1 Draft Cover
.2 Draft Tab
PACIFIC STAR
SECTION 4-37
PAGE 11
.3 Sample Format
6.0 AS-BUILT /RECORD DRAWINGS
.1 Requirements
.1 Generally all works shall be installed as per the approved shop

drawings. Where on-site revisions are necessary to overcome
coordination problems, such revisions shall be incorporated into
marked-up copies of the working drawings on a regular basis
throughout the course of the works. These marked-up prints will
form the basis of as-built/record drawing production.
.2 All as-built/record drawings shall be suitable for microfilming.
.3 The contractor shall submit a schedule of his proposed as-built

drawings when submitting his draft O&M manual.
.4 All drawings will require a card index number to match microfiche

number.
.5 All drawings shall be clearly marked "As-Built/Record Drawings" in

minimum 12mm high lettering. All submittals of "As-Built/Record
Drawings shall be made via the existing drawing control system.
.6 All manufacturer supplied drawings shall also be provided with the

standard project title block and issued as an "as-built" drawing
generally as set out as above.
.7 A typical format for as-built drawing title blocks based on Project

Procedures Manual Standard is included within this section.
.8 The quantities and types of print and negatives to be issued for

"as-built" use are the same at for normal document issues, as set
out in the Project Procedures Manual.
.9 All existing revision information on working drawings shall be

removed prior to their issue for "as-built" status. A new series
starting "R1" shall be instituted for first "as-built" issue.
6.1 SAMPLE FORMAT - TYPICAL INDEX TO OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

MANUALS
.1 Important Note
.1 The following list is not exhaustive. Is intended to highlight some

of the main items required to be included in the operating and
maintenance manuals. The list will need to be expanded to cover
the specific detailed needs of the individual buildings and their
system.
PACIFIC STAR
SECTION 4-37
PAGE 12
Sec. Description Sub-Sections
.1 GENERAL .1 Introduction
.2 Services Identification
.3 List of Abbreviations
.4 Schedule
.5 Directory of Suppliers
.6 Warranty Contacts (list all
major equipment with
warranty beginning and end
dates)
.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTIONS
OF SYSTEMS
.1 PLUMBING .1 Domestic Water Systems

.2 Drainage Systems
.3 Rainwater Systems
.4 Interceptor Systems
.5 Storage Facilities
.3 OPERATING .1 General
PROCEDURES .2 Initial Set-Up
.3 Routine Inspection Charts
.4 Equipment Start-Up/Shut
Down procedures
.5 Filling-Up
.6 Draining Down
.7 Lubrication Charts
.8 Filtration Charts
.9 Preventative Maintenance
.10 Lead/Lag Arrangements
.11 Fault Finding
.4 EMERGENCY .1 General
PROCEDURES .2 Health and Safety
.3 Failure of Electrical Supply
.4 Failure of Water Supply
.5 Failure of Gas Supply
.6 Refrigerant Leak
.7 Water Leaks
.8 Fuel Oil Leaks
.9 Fire Situation on MEP
Systems
.10 First Aid Procedure
PACIFIC STAR
SECTION 4-37
PAGE 13
.5 MANUFACTURERS .1 Factory Test Certificates

DATA .2 Certified Drawings
.3 Nameplate Date
.4 Specific/Specialised
Maintenance
Recommendation
.5 Performance Curve
.6 Catalogue Cuts
.6 SPARES .1 Recommended Spare

Schedule
.2 Spares Policy
Recommendation
.3 Schedule of Spares Supplied
at Handover
.7 TEST .1 Pressure Tests

.2 Chlorination Certificates
.3 Chemical Cleaning
.4 Commissioning Checklists
.5 Snagging Sign-offs
.6 Tank Test Certificates
.7 Electrical Safety
.8 Generator Tests
.8 SYSTEM .1 Valve Charts

.3 Water System Schematics
7.0 OPERATING TRAINING
7.1 TRAINING TO EMPLOYER’S PERSONNEL
.1 General
.1 This section defines the general scope and content of Employer’s

personnel training.
.2 Given the requirements of the Health and Safety at Work Act and
the need to maintain warranty conditions it is an absolute pre-
requisite that full training occurs prior to handover of any
equipment or systems.
.3 The General Contractor Commissioning Manager shall coordinate

all training proposals into a comprehensive training schedule.
This schedule is to be submitted to the Employer for review and
agreement. The General Contractor Commissioning Manager
shall incorporate all reasonable requirements into a final training
programme and arrange attendance of the required training
personnel.
PACIFIC STAR
SECTION 4-37
PAGE 14
.4 As a general matter of policy the Employer will require training on

equipment to be carried out by engineers/instructors of the original
equipment manufacturer (OEM) supplemented by the Trade
Contractors as necessary.
.5 In submitting a comprehensive training schedule the General

Contractor Commissioning Manager must confirm the following:-
.1 Name and title of persons carrying out training
.2 Name of company employing trainers
.3 Proposed location of training i.e. job site, classroom or

factory
.4 Details of training aids to be used, i.e. manual, audiovisual

etc.
.5 Details of any spares/tools to be provided
.6 For each training session a training agenda shall be provided,

generally set out as per the attached standard format.
.7 Where practicable the contractor shall arrange to video tape the

training session and provide a copy of the tape for Employer
retention.
.2 Training Periods
.1 The following schedule sets out for each facility, the general
systems/equipment requiring demonstration/training and also
gives minimum durations and responsibilities; unless otherwise
noted in the specifications:
System/Subject Minimum Duration Who Carried

(Hours) Out Training
.1 Plumbing and Drainage 3 Mechanical Trade

Contractor
.2 Pumps 3 Equipment
Manufacturer
.2 Where more than 1 manufacturer supplies a given type of

equipment or system the duration gives above apply to each
individual manufacturer.
.3 Additional training course to those noted above may be required to

cover specific items of equipment in a particular building.
PACIFIC STAR
SECTION 4-37
PAGE 15
.4 Documentation Examples:
.1 Training Seminar Agenda
.5 Sample Format
Building:
Contractor:
Date of Seminar
Time of Seminar
Location of Seminar
.7 Title of Seminar
.8 Opening Introduction by Chairperson
.1 Introduction of Instructors
.2 Introduction of Employers Representatives
.3 Introduction of Manufacturers Specialists
.4 Presentation of Course Training Aids
.5 Statement of Course Aims/Scope
.9 Training (Classroom)
.1 Description of System and Equipment
.2 Inter-Relationship with other Systems
.3 Recommended Maintenance Requirements
.4 Presentative Maintenance Check List and Recommended

Spare Parts
.5 Health and Safety Precautions
.10 Field Training
.1 View Equipment at Location
.2 Demonstrate Maintenance Access
.3 Review of Overall System and Associated Interfaces with

Other Systems
.4 Demonstrate Actual Start-Up Procedures

PACIFIC STAR
SECTION 4-37
PAGE 16
.5 Demonstrate replacement of Common Spare Parts
.11 Review of O&M Documentation and Spare Parts List
.1 Site Review to Compare with Actual Installation of

Accuracy
.2 Review Description of Systems and Certified

Manufacturers Drawings
8.0 SPARE PARTS
.1 General
.1 The General Contractor Commissioning Manager shall coordinate

the supply of all specified spare parts to the Employer’s operations
staff.
.2 The information for a given project shall be organised by system

and shall include the following:-
.1 A list of spare parts, special tools, lubricants etc. for each

item equipment which has been purchased as part of the
relevant trade contract.
.2 Similar list to (a) above covering spare parts etc. for all
other equipment for each spare parts have not been
included in the Trade Contract.
.3 A list of spare items for standard systems i.e. fuses,

gaskets etc.
.4 The above lists shall be based on manufacturers

recommendation and cover a period of two years from
handover of equipment/system to Employer.
.5 Standard spare parts schedules shall provide the following

information as a minimum: -
.1 Manufacturers part name
.2 Manufacturers name, address, phone and fax

numbers
.3 Manufacturers part number
.4 Quantity recommended for 1 year
.5 Unit
PACIFIC STAR
SECTION 4-37
PAGE 17
.6 Lead time
.7 Shelf life
.8 Alternative suppliers of parts
.9 Local stockist(s) name, address, phone and fax

number
.6 Preliminary list of spare parts, tools etc. shall be submitted

a minimum of 60 days prior to intended system handover
for employer review. The employer reserves the right to
add to, reduce, or omit entirely the recommendations
contained on these lists.
.7 Upon approval by the employer of the spare lists either

original or amended form the General Contractor
Commissioning Manager shall instruct the Trade
Contractor to supply those items covered by the relevant
trade contracts.
.8 Those items so supplied shall be in manufacturers original

packaging and shall be tagged with a unique number
coordinated with the relevant handover schedule.
.9 These parts shall be available for handover to employers

operations personnel at least 30 days prior to handover of
the associated systems.
9.0 DESCRIPTION OF THE HANDOVER PROCESS
.1 Introduction
.1 As buildings reach the final stages of completion the Employer will

require operations to take over areas and systems as they are
almost complete. This initial phase is part of the inheritance of the
buildings by operational management who will control security and
access to the areas and systems prior to the acceptance into
service and practical completion. This is the first step towards the
acceptance into service.
.2 The Documentation Summary is a required document to be

maintained by each building's Employer assigned Commissioning
Manager. It lists each system proposed to be handed to
operations. The proposed systems shall be agreed with the
General Contractor Commissioning Manager at an early date and
shall be transmitted to each trade contractor as a requirement.
PACIFIC STAR
SECTION 4-37
PAGE 18
.3 The take over confirmation is an internal document of operations

recording the steps leading to areas/system being offered to
operations.
.4 The certificate of readiness for owner acceptance is a document

signed by the Project Executive/Manager of the Employer to
operations signifying the willingness of the Employer to receive the
systems and areas of building into service.
.2 Takeover Confirmation - Systems
.1 This certificate is based on a check list extracted from the MEP

Commissioning and Handover Procedures Manual.
.2 O&M Manuals and Test Certificates
This information may be presented in draft form but the content

must encompass all aspects relating to the operation and fault
finding areas.
.3 As-Built or Record Drawings
The suppliers recommended spare list should be provided in the

O&M Manuals although further revisions may be incorporated in
the final issue with operations agreement.
.4 This training will take place after receipt of the draft documents
and with the agreement of the Building Manager or Building
Services Manager in respect of content, timescale and dates for

training.
.5 Current Snags List
The snag list will consist of items both in numbers and content that
are considered manageable by the Building Manager. The
attachment of the list at this time does not deem to represent or
limit the scope for adding items that arise through the operation of
areas and system by operations throughout the defects liability
period. A status report of the current snag list will be provide with
the certificate of readiness.
.6 Keys
All door keys are to be presented to the Building Manager from

the Project Executive in an orderly manner at a mutually
acceptable time. This will also include all keys associated with
engineering items of plant and equipment.
PACIFIC STAR
SECTION 4-37
PAGE 19
.7 Authorities
The Building Manager is the authorized representative for

operations and will issue the certificate.
.8 Warranty & Maintenance
These items are covered by the narrative for the certificate of

readiness and do not from part of this procedure.
.9 Certificate
.1 The certificate of readiness attached as Appendix II is

initiated by the General Contractor Commissioning
Manager, signed by the Employer before a signature of
agreement by the authorised representative of operations.
The distribution of the completed certificate to be arrange
by operations as required.
.2 A list of plant that is operational in the building must be

provided with the certificate.
.3 A status report on the current snag list as the date of issue

of the certificate will also be attached.
Documentation Examples
.1 Employer/Construction Manager Documentation

Summary
.2 Takeover Confirmation
.3 Certificate of Readiness
END OF SECTION 4-37

FIRE PROTECTION SERVICES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE
4-1 PARTICULAR PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
4-2 ACCESS DOORS IN GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
4-3 FIRE PROTECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
4-4 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING AND FITTING MATERIALS
4-5 FIRE PROTECTION HANGERS, SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND GUIDES
4-6 FIRE PROTECTION VALVES AND ACCESSORIES
4-7 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
4-8 WET RISER SYSTEMS
4-9 FIRE PROTECTION PUMPS
4-10 FIRST AID HOSE REEL SYSTEMS
4-11 FIRE PROTECTION PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

`
4-12 FIRE PROTECTION CARBON DIOXIDE SYSTEM
4-13 FIRESTOPPING
4-14 WET CHEMICAL SYSTEM
4-15 GAS SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
4-16 FIRE PROTECTION VIBRATION ISOLATION
4-17 FIRE PROTECTION HYDRANT SYSTEM
4-18 FIREMAN INTERCOM SYSTEM
4-19 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
4-20 IMPLEMENTATION OF TESTING AND ADJUSTING, COMMISSIONING

HANDOVER – EMPLOYER ACCEPTANCE
PARTICULAR PROJECT REQUIREMENT
SECTION 4-1
Page 1 OF 15
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF THIS DIVISION
.1 This division shall include the supply, packing for transport, delivery to site,
unloading, installation, connecting, final testing and putting into commission,
handing-over in approved working order and supervision of maintenance of the
fire protection system during the defects liability period. This includes the whole of
the Works, as detailed hereunder, and as shown in the drawings.
.2 The works to be carried out under this division shall include the whole of the
materials (except equipment specified as supplied by others), and all necessary
labour for the completion of the works, in every detail, ready for continuous and
economic operation whether such be directly mentioned in the specifications or
not.
.3 The Contractor shall apply for and obtain all necessary certificates and approvals
for the work done from the relevant authorities and shall lodge the same with the
E.R. before final payment is made.
1.2 PARTICULARS OF THE WORK SCOPES
.1 Provide all labour, materials, equipment, tools, appliances, auxiliaries, services,

hoisting, scaffolding, support, supervision, and perform all operations for the
furnishing, installation, testing, commissioning, service and maintenance of the
complete Fire Protection Service.
.2 Manufacture, test at Works, deliver to site, test and commission at site, service
and maintain the complete Fire Protection Service.
.3 The works of this package shall include co-ordination with other Contractors so as
to provide a Complete, Operational and Acceptable Fire Protection Service.
.4 Provide Wet Riser or Dry Riser system as required by the Uniform Building By-
Laws. Riser mains shown in the specification drawings shall be supplied and
installed as construction progresses to within two floors of the topmost floor under
construction.
.5 The works to be included in this Section shall cover but not limited to the following
items:-
.1 Piping and Accessories
.2 Piping Specialties
.3 Hangers, Supports, Anchors and Guides
.4 Valves
.5 Systems Identification
.6 Sprinkler Systems
.7 Wet or Dry Riser Systems as required by UBBL
.8 Fire Protection Pumps
.9 Fire Alarm Systems

SECTION 4-1
Page 2 OF 15
.10 Hose Reel Systems
.11 Carbon Dioxide Fixed Fire Extinguishing System
.12 Fire Protection Portable Fire Extinguishers
.13 Fireman Intercom System
.14 Vibration Isolation
.15 Painting
.16 Firestopping
.17 Fire Pump Control Panels
.18 Power Cabling, Control Cabling And Fire Rated Cabling
.19 Clean Agent Gas Suppression System
.20 Building Control System (BCS) Interfacing
.21 Inspect and witness testing and site testing, adjusting, commissioning
and handing over.
.22 Supervision of Service and Maintenance for for period as specified in

contract.
.23 Equipment supports and miscellaneous steel supports for all Fire
Protection Service.
.24 Sealing of sleeves and other electrical openings with approved materials.
.25 Shop drawings, construction/installation drawings and installation

manuals. Ten (10) copies of „Buku Operasi‟ to be furnished subject to the
approval and endorsement of Jabatan Perkhidmatan Bomba.
.26 All Equipment‟s Authorities approvals.
.27 As-built AutoCAD drawing files and operation and maintenance manuals.
.28 Adequate instructions and Training for Employer‟s Representatives and

end-users‟ maintenance personnel.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit all shop drawings, manufacturer‟s data, samples and test reports as called
for hereinafter.
.2 Submit a single guarantee stating that all parts of the work are in accordance with
Contract requirements. Guarantee work against faulty and improper material and
workmanship during defects liability period from date practical completion, except
that where guarantees or warranties for longer terms are specified herein, such
longer term to apply. Within 24 hours after notification, correct any deficiencies
which occur during the guarantee period at no additional cost to the Employer, to
the satisfaction of the E.R. Obtain similar guarantees from manufacturers,
suppliers and other specialists.
SECTION 4-1
Page 3 OF 15
.3 Indemnify the Employer and the E.R. against loss, liability, damage or expense,
including attorneys fees, in connection with any claim resulting from damage
which may be asserted by any third party.
.1 Comply with current governing codes, ordinances and regulations, as well as with
requirements and all other applicable codes.
.2 Comply with the requirements of agencies or authorities having jurisdiction over

any part of the work and secure all necessary permits.
.3 Where codes or standards are listed herein, the applicable portions apply.
.4 Plans, specifications, codes and standards are minimum requirements. Where

requirements differ, apply the more stringent one, subject to E.R.‟s approval.
.5 Should any change in plans or specifications be required to comply with governing

regulations, notify the E.R. at the time of submitting this bid.
.6 Execute work in strict accordance with the best practices of the other Divisions of
this Specification in a thorough, substantial, workmanlike manner by competent
workmen. Provide a competent, experienced full-time Superintendent who is
authorized to make decisions on behalf of the Contractor.
1.5 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
.1 Definitions
.1 “PROVIDE” means to supply, purchase, transport, place, erect, connect,

test and turnover to Employer, complete and ready for regular operation,
the particular work referred to.
.2 “INSTALL” means to join, unite, fasten, link, attach, set up or otherwise

connect together before testing and turning over to Employer, complete
and ready for regular operation, the particular work referred to.
.3 “FURNISH” means to supply all materials, labor, equipment, testing

apparatus, controls, tests, accessories and all other items customarily
required for the proper and complete application for the particular work
referred to.
.4 “AS DIRECTED” means as directed by the E.R.
.5 “CONCEALED” means embedded in masonry or other construction,

installed behind wall furring or within double partitions, or installed within
hung ceilings.
.6 “SUBMIT” means submit to E.R. for review. Refer to Project General and
Special Conditions for proper procedures.
.2 Abbreviations
ARI American Refrigeration Institute
ANSI American National Standards Institute

SECTION 4-1
Page 4 OF 15
API American Petroleum Institute
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, Air Conditioning

Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing Materials
ASA Acoustical Society of America
AWS American Welding Society
BS British Standards
MBPJ Majlis Bandaraya Petaling Jaya
DGFS Director General Fire Department
IEC International Electrotechnic Commission
ISO International Standards Organisation
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
UL Underwriters Laboratories
LPC Loss Prevention Council
1.6 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
.1 If products and materials are specified for a specific item or system, use those
products or materials. If products and materials are not listed in either of the
above, use first class products and materials, subject to approval of the Employer.
.2 Preference to the use of materials produced or assembled in Malaysia is required.

Use of materials produced elsewhere will be considered if the Contractor
demonstrates to the E.R. that the use of comparable domestic material is
impractical, will unreasonably increase costs, or is not available in sufficient
quantity.
.3 Provide products and materials that are new, clean, free of defects and free
damage and corrosion.
.4 Replace materials of less than specified quality as designated by the Employer

and relocate work incorrectly installed as determined by the E.R.
.5 Provide name/data plates on all components of equipment with manufacturer‟s

name, model number, serial number, capacity data and electrical characteristics
attached in a conspicuous place.
.6 Install materials and equipment with qualified trades people.
.7 Maintain uniformity of manufacture for equipment used in similar applications and

sizes.
.8 Applicable equipment and materials to be approved by local authorities having

jurisdiction.
SECTION 4-1
Page 5 OF 15
.9 Fully lubricate equipment when installed.
.10 Do not operate water systems until piping has been cleaned and startup strainers
are in place.
.11 Locate all floor mounted equipment on concrete plinths. Concrete work to be
provided by another section of the specifications. Coordinate size and location
with division providing concrete plinths.
.12 Secure equipment with bolts, washers and locknuts of ample size to support
equipment. Embedded anchor bolts to have bottom plate and pipe sleeves. Grout
machinery set in concrete under the entire bearing surface. After grout has set,
remove wedges, shims and jack bolts and fill space with grout.
.13 Locate valves, traps, damper operators, access doors, etc. to be easily
accessible, either in mechanical spaces or through access panels as specified
hereinafter, or as required. Coordinate and obtain Employer‟s approval of access
panel locations.
.14 Follow manufacturers‟ instructions for installing, connecting, and adjusting

equipment. Provide one copy of such instructions to the Employer before installing
any equipment. Provide a copy of such instruction at the equipment during work
on the equipment.
.15 Equipment capacities, etc., are scheduled or specified for job site operating
conditions. Equipment sensitive to altitude shall be derated with the method of
derating identified on shop drawings.
.16 Where factory testing of equipment is required to ascertain performance and

attendance by the E.R. is required to witness tests, associated travel costs and all
other costs incurred for the testing shall be borne by the Contractor. Witness
testing by the E.R. does not relieve the Contractor of the requirements of the
contract documents.
1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
.1 Shop drawings, project data sheets and samples shall be submitted with Project
General and Special Conditions.
.2 Within one (1) month after notice to proceed by the E.R., or after execution of
Employer/Contractor Agreement, submit to the E.R. for review, a complete typed
list of all mechanical equipment manufacturers and material suppliers for the
equipment intended to be furnished and installed on this project. The submission
shall be in stages and provide sufficient time for review before confirmation of
procurement.
.3 Within two (2) months after notice to proceed by the E.R., prepare an index of all
submittals for the project. Include a submittal identification number, a cross-
reference to the Specification sections or Drawing number, and an item
description. Prefix the submittal identification number by the Specification sections
to which they apply. Indicate on each submittal, the submittal identification
number in addition to the other data specified.
SECTION 4-1
Page 6 OF 15
.4 After the Contractor is awarded, obtain complete shop drawings, product data and
samples from the manufacturers, suppliers, vendors, and all other parties, for all
materials and equipment as specified herein in various sections of the
specification. Submit data and details of such materials and equipment for review
by the E.R. Prior to submission of the shop drawings, product data and samples
to the E.R., review and certify the shop drawings, product data and samples are in
compliance with the Contract Documents. Further, check all materials and
equipment upon their arrival on the job site and verify their compliance with the
Contract Documents. Modify any work which proceeds prior to receiving accepted
shop drawings as required to comply with the Contract Documents and the shop
drawings, at no cost to the project.
.5 Prior to fabrication or installation of any work, completely coordinate all work and
prepare a complete set of Coordination Drawings.
1.8 REVIEWS
.1 E.R.‟s review is for general compliance with the design concept and contract
documents. Markings or comments or the lack thereof does not relieve the
Contractor from compliance with the project plans and specifications. The
Contractor remains solely responsible for details and accuracy, for confirming and
correlating all quantities and dimensions, for selecting fabrication processes, for
techniques of construction, for performing his work in a safe manner, and for
coordinating his work with that of other Divisions of this Specification.
.2 No part of the work shall be started in the shop or in the field until the E.R. have
reviewed the shop drawings and samples for that portion of the work.
.3 A minimum period of twenty (20) working days, exclusive of transmittal time, will
be required by the E.R. each time a shop drawing, product data and/or samples
are submitted for review. This time period must be considered by the Contractor
when scheduling his work.
.4 Submit one sepia transparency and six (6) prints of all sheet metal and piping
drawings. Submit sufficient copies of original catalog cuts (to ER requirement)
with minimum of five(5) copies of catalog cuts.
.5 Submissions will be stamped as follows:
.1 Reviewed and Accepted (A)
Fabrication, manufacturer or construction may proceed providing

submittal complies with the Contract Documents.
.2 Reviewed and Accepted (B)
Work may proceed as above so long as Noted as the E.R.‟s notations are
complied with.
.3 Not Accepted (C)
The submittal does not comply with the Contract Documents; do not
proceed with fabrication, manufacture or construction. The work and shop
drawings are not permitted at the job site. Resubmit appropriate shop
drawings.
1.9 FEES
SECTION 4-1
Page 7 OF 15
.1 Pay all required fees, taxes, duties and other surcharges.

.2 Pay royalties or fees required in connection with the use of patented devices and
systems.
1.10 SHOP DRAWINGS & PRODUCT DATA
.1 Submit materials and equipment by manufacturer, trade name and model

number. Include copies of applicable brochure or catalog material. Do not assume
applicable catalogs are available in the E.R.‟s office. Maintenance and operating
manuals are not suitable substitutes for shop drawings.
.2 Identify each sheet of printed submittal pages (using arrows, underlining or

circling) to show applicable sizes, types, model numbers, ratings, capacities and
options actually being proposed. Cross out non-applicable information. Note
specified features such as special tank linings, pump seals, materials or painting.
.3 Include dimensional data for roughing in and installation, technical data sufficient
to verify that equipment meets requirements of drawings and specifications.
Include wiring, piping and service connection data, motor sizes complete with
voltage ratings and schedules.
.4 Maintain a complete set of reviewed and stamped shop drawings and product
data on site (at the work locations).
.5 Prepare and submit detailed shop drawings for ductwork piping work and other
distribution services of suitable sale, including locations and sizes of openings in
floor decks, walls and roofs.
.6 The Contractor is not relieved of the responsibility for dimensions or errors that
may be contained on submissions reviewed by the E.R., or for deviations from
requirements in the Contract Documents. Understand clearly that E.R.‟s noting
some errors but overlooking others does not grant the Contractor permission to
proceed in error. Regardless of any information contained in the shop drawings,
product data and samples, the Contract Documents govern the work and are
neither waived nor superseded in any way by the review of shop drawings,
product data and samples.
.7 Inadequate or incomplete shop drawings, product data and/or samples will not be
reviewed by the E.R. and will be returned to the Contractor for resubmittal.
.8 Indicate in the lower right hand corner of each shop drawing, and each product
data brochure on the front cover, the following: The submittal identification
number; title of the sheet or brochure; name and location of the Project; names of
the E.R., Contractor, manufacturer, supplier, and vendor; the date of submittal;
and the date of each correction and version and revision. Number all pages and
drawings in product data brochures consecutively from beginning to end. Unless
the above information is included, the submittal will be returned for resubmission.
Include with resubmittals of product data or brochures a cover letter summarizing
the corrections made in response to the review comments and the submittal page
numbers which were revised.
1.11 CONTRACTOR‟S COORDINATION DRAWINGS
.1 Coordinate efforts and furnish, in writing, any information necessary to permit the
work of all Divisions to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible
interference or delay.
SECTION 4-1
Page 8 OF 15
.2 Prepare a complete set of construction Coordination Drawings indicating the

equipment actually purchased and the exact routing for all lines such as piping,
busway, conduit, ductwork, etc., including conduit embedded in concrete. Use the
sheetmetal shop drawings as the base drawings to which all work will be shown.
Complete each Coordination Drawing prior to the installation of the work in the
area covered by the specific drawing.
.3 Indicate piping loads and support points for all piping 100mm and larger, racked
piping, racked conduit, and busway, and submit to the E.R. for review and
approval. Indicate the elevation, location, support points, static, dynamic and
expansion forces and loads imposed on the structure at support, anchor points,
and size of all lines. Indicate all beam penetrations and slab penetrations sized
and coordinated. Indicate all work routed underground or embedded in concrete
by dimension to column and building lines.
.4 This requirement for Coordination Drawings is not authorization to make any

unauthorized changes to the Design Drawings, unless prior written authorization
is received from the E.R. to change them.
.5 Work installed which interferes with work of any other Division of this Specification
shall be corrected at no cost to the project.
1.12 COORDINATION OF WORK
.1 The plans show the general arrangement of equipment, ductwork, piping and
appurtenances. Follow these drawings as closely as the actual construction and
the work of other Divisions of this Specification will permit. Provide offsets, fittings,
and accessories which may be required but not shown on the drawings.
Investigate the site, structural and finish ground conditions affecting the work, and
arrange the work accordingly. Provide such work and accessories as may be
required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost to the project.
.2 Certain materials will be provide by other specification divisions. Examine the

Contract Documents to ascertain these requirements.
.3 Carefully check space requirements to insure that material can be installed in the
spaces allotted thereto with sufficient access space, including finished suspended
ceilings.
.4 Wherever work interconnects with work of other specification divisions, coordinate

with those divisions to insure that they have the information necessary so that
they may properly install the necessary connections and equipment. Identify items
(valves, dampers, coils, etc.) requiring access in order install access doors and
panels in the ceiling.
.5 Furnish and set sleeves for passage of pipes, ducts and conduits through
structural masonry and concrete walls and floors and elsewhere as will be
required for the proper protection of each pipe and duct passing through building
surfaces.
.6 Properly provide firestopping around all pipes, conduits, ducts, sleeves, etc. which
pass through rated walls, partitions and floors.
.7 Provide detailed information on openings and holes required in precast members.

Cast holes of all diameters. Field-cut holes will not be allowed.
.8 Provide required supports and hangers for ductwork, piping and equipment,
designed so as not to exceed allowable loadings of structures.
SECTION 4-1
Page 9 OF 15
.9 Examine and compare the contract drawings and specifications with the drawings
and specifications of all divisions, and report any discrepancies between them to
the E.R. and obtain from him written instructions for changes necessary in the
work. Install and coordinate the work in cooperation with other related divisions.
Before installation, make proper provisions to avoid interferences.
.10 Wherever the work is of sufficient complexity, prepare additional detail drawings
to scale similar to that of the design drawings, prepared on tracing medium. With
these layouts, coordinate the work. Such detailed work to be clearly identified on
the drawings as to the area to which it applies. Submit these drawings to the E.R.
for review. At completion, include a set of such drawings with each set of as-built
drawings.
.11 Before commencing work, examine adjoining work on which this work is in any
way dependent for perfect workmanship and report conditions which prevent
performance of first class work. Become thoroughly familiar with actual existing
conditions to which connections must be made or which must be changed or
altered.
.12 Adjust location of pipes, ducts, panels, equipment, etc., to accommodate the work
to prevent interferences, both anticipated and encountered. Determine the exact
route and location of each pipe and duct prior to fabrication.
.1 Right-of-Way: Lines which pitch have the right-of-way over those which
do not pitch. For example; condensate, and plumbing drains normally
have right-of-way. Lines whose elevations cannot be changed have right-
of-way over lines whose elevations can be changed.
.2 Make offsets, transitions and changes in direction in pipes and ducts as

required to maintain proper head room and pitch on sloping lines. Furnish
and install air vents, drains, etc., as required to effect these offsets,
transitions and changes in direction.
.13 Install work to permit removal (without damage to other parts) of coils, fan shafts
and wheels, filters, belt guards, sheaves and drives, and other parts requiring
periodic replacement or maintenance. Arrange pipes, ducts, and equipment to
permit access to valves, cocks, starters, motors, and control components, and to
clear the openings of swinging doors and access panels.
.14 Provide access panels in equipment, ducts, etc., as required for inspection and
maintenance of internal equipment, dampers, plenums, etc.
.15 In cases of doubt as to the Work intended, or in the event of need for explanation
thereof, request supplementary instructions from the E.R.
1.13 CUTTING AND PATCHING
.1 Layout the work in advance and fully coordinate. Where cutting, channeling,
chasing or drilling of floors, walls partitions, ceilings or other surfaces is necessary
for the proper installation, support or anchorage of ductwork, piping or other
equipment, do the work carefully so as not to damage adjacent work. Repair any
damage to the building, piping, equipment or defaced finish plaster, woodwork,
metalwork, etc. using skilled mechanics of the Divisions involved at no additional
cost to the Employer.
SECTION 4-1
Page 10 OF 15
.2 Do not cut, channel, chase or drill unfinished masonry, tile, etc., unless
permission from the E.R. is first obtained. If permission is granted, perform this
work in a manner approved by the E.R.
.3 Where ductwork, piping or equipment are mounted on a painted finished surface,

or a surface to be painted, paint to match the surface. Cold galvanize bare metal
whenever support channels are cut.
.4 Slots, chases, openings and recesses through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs will
be provided by the various division with their respective materials. The division
requiring them shall properly locate such openings and be responsible for any
cutting and patching caused by the neglect to do so.
1.14 RESPONSIBILITY FOR EVALUATION
.1 The E.R. makes no representations, regarding the character or extent of the

subsoil, water levels, existing structural, mechanical and electrical installations,
above or below ground, or other subsurface conditions which may be
encountered during the work. The Contractor must make his own evaluation of
existing conditions which may affect methods or cost of performing the work,
based on his own examination of the facility or other information. Failure to
examine the drawings or other information does not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for satisfactory accomplishment of the work.
1.15 FIRE ACCESS TO FIRE APPARATUS
.1 Do not interfere with access to hydrants and fire alarm boxes. In no case allow
material or equipment to be within 6 meters of a hydrant or fire alarm box.
1.16 EQUIPMENT PAD AND ANCHOR BOLTS
.1 Concrete plinths for various pieces of equipment will be furnished by the

Contractor under another Division. This Contractor shall include floor mounted
equipment, equipment mounted on legs and pipe support stands. Generally
conform equipment pads to the shape of the piece of equipment it serves with a
minimum 80mm margin around the equipment and supports. Pads will be a
minimum of 100mm high. Use shop drawings stamped “NO EXCEPTIONS” for
dimensional guidance in sizing pads.
.2 Furnish and install galvanized anchor bolts for all equipment placed on concrete
equipment pads, inertia blocks, or on concrete slabs. Provide bolts of the size
and number recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment and locate by
means of suitable templates. When equipment is placed on vibration isolators,
secure the equipment to the isolator and secure the isolator to the floor, pad, or
support as recommended by the vibration isolation manufacturer.
.3 Where control panels, motor controllers, etc., are mounted on gypsum board
partitions, the mounting screws will pass through the gypsum board and be
securely attached to the partition studs. At the Contractor‟s option, the mounting
screws may pass through the gypsum board and be securely attached to 150mm
square galvanized metal backplates which are attached to the gypsum board with
an approved non-flammable adhesive. Toggle bolts installed in gypsum board
partitions are not acceptable.
SECTION 4-1
Page 11 OF 15
1.17 DELIVERY, DRAYAGE AND HAULING
.1 Include all drayage, hauling, hoisting, shoring and placement in the building of
equipment specified herein. Be responsible for the timely delivery and introduction
of equipment to the project as required by the construction schedule for this
project. If any item of equipment is received prior to the time it is required, be
responsible for its proper storage and protection until such time as it may be
required. Pay for all costs of demurrage or storage. Storage procedures and
transportation procedures shall protect equipment and materials in tropical
environments. Equipment and materials requiring storage in temperatures and
humidity controlled environments shall be done at contractor‟s expense.
.2 If any item of equipment is not delivered to or installed at the project site in a

timely manner as required by the project construction schedule, be solely
responsible for disassembly, re-assembly, manufacturer‟s supervision, shoring,
general construction modification, delays, overtime cost, etc. No additional cost
or delays to be incurred by the Employer.
.18 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL PROTECTION
.1 Protect the work, equipment and materials from damage by work or workmen.
Correct all damage without additional cost to the Employer.
.2 Be responsible for all work, materials and equipment until finally inspected, tested
and accepted; protect work against theft, injury or damage; and carefully store
material and equipment received on site which are not immediately installed.
Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during construction to
prevent entry of obstructing material. Cover and protect in an acceptable manner
to the Employer, all equipment and materials from damage due to weather, water,
spray-on fireproofing, construction debris, etc. Protection measures shall be
adequate for tropical environments. Equipment and material requiring storage in
temperature and humidity controlled environments shall be done at Contractor‟s
expenses.
.3 Provide adequate means for fully protecting finished parts of the materials and
equipment against damage from whatever cause during the progress of the work
until final acceptance. Protect materials and equipment in storage and during
construction in such a manner that no finished surfaces will be damaged or
marred, and moving parts kept clean and dry. If items are damaged, do not
install, but take immediate steps to obtain replacement or repair.
1.19 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND ELECTRICAL ROOM PRECAUTIONS
.1 In general, do not install any piping systems not included as part of the electrical
work, in any switchgear, transformer, elevator equipment, telephone, or electrical
equipment room.
.2 Do not install piping above switchboards, panelboards, control panels, motor

control centres, individual motor controllers, etc.
1.20 EQUIPMENT GUARDS
.1 Provide easily removable expanded metal guards for all belts, couplings, exposed
fan inlets and outlets, and other moving parts of machinery. Provide tachometer
openings in the guards at least 50mm in diameter, for all belt-driven or variable
speed machinery. Comply with applicable requirements for all equipment guards.
SECTION 4-1
Page 12 OF 15
1.21 LUBRICATION
.1 Provide means for lubricating all bearings and other machine parts. If a part
requiring lubrication is concealed or inaccessible, extend a metallic lubrication
tube with suitable fitting to an accessible location and suitably identify it.
.2 After installation, properly lubricate all parts requiring lubrication and keep them
adequately lubricated with a lubricant recommended by the equipment
manufacturer until the Employer issues a Certificate of Substantial Completion for
the specific equipment item or system.
.3 Provide list to E.R. of lubricants that are locally available. Use of these lubricants
will not in any manner decrease guarantee and/or warranty liability to Employer.
1.22 DATE OF COMPLETION AND TESTING OF FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
.1 Comply with the project construction schedule for the date of final performance
and acceptance testing, and be sufficiently in advance of the Contract completion
date to permit he execution of the testing prior to occupancy and the closeout of
the Contract. Complete any adjustments and/or alterations which the final
acceptance tests indicate as necessary for the proper functioning of all equipment
prior to the completion date. See individual sections for extent of testing required.
.2 Provide a detailed schedule of completion indicating when each system is to be

completed and outlining when tests will be performed. Submit completion
schedule to the E.R. for review within four (4) months after the notice to proceed
by E.R. has been given. Update this schedule periodically as the project
progresses.
1.23 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
.1 Provide the services of a factory trained specialists to supervise the operation of

all equipment specified herein and to instruct the Employer‟s operators for a thirty
(30) day operating instruction period. The operating instruction period is defined
as straight time working hours and not including nights, weekends or travel time to
and from the project. See individual sections for additional instructions by
manufacturer‟s trained specialists.
1.24 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE BOOKS
.1 Provide operating instructions and maintenance data books for all equipment and
materials furnished under this Division.
.2 Submit six (6) final copies of operating and maintenance data books for review at
least ten (10) weeks before final review of the project. Assemble all data in a
completely indexed volume or volumes in three-ring binders and identify the size,
model, and features indicated for each item. Print the project name and logo on
the outside of the binders.
.3 Deliver four (4) initial copies of the operation and maintenance data books to the
E.R. six (6) months after notice to proceed has been given. Include in the initial
copies all the information in Paragraph 1.24.5 below, except item 1.24.5.4)
.4 Maintenance instruction manuals to include complete oiling, cleaning, and

servicing data compiled in clearly and easily understandable form. Show all model
numbers of each piece of equipment, complete lists of replacement parts, motor
ratings, and actual loads.
SECTION 4-1
Page 13 OF 15
.5 Include the following information where applicable:
.1 Identifying name and mark number.
.2 Locations (where several similar items are used, provide a list).
.3 Complete nameplate data.
.4 Certified Record Drawings and “Final Reviewed” Shop Drawings.
.5 Parts list.
.6 Performance curves and data.
.7 Wiring diagrams.
.8 Lubrication charts.
.9 Manufacturers‟ recommended operating and maintenance instructions

with all non-applicable information deleted.
.10 List of spare parts recommended for normal service requirements.
.11 Assembly and disassembly instructions with exploded view Drawings

where available.
.12 Trouble shooting diagnostic instructions where applicable.
.13 Factory and site testing records.
1.25 RECORD DRAWINGS
.1 Maintain on a daily basis at the project site a complete black and white set of “As-
Built Drawings”, reflecting an accurate dimensional record or all deviations
between work shown on Drawings and that actually installed.
.2 Record dimensions clearly and accurately to delineate the work as installed;

suitably identify locations of all equipment by at least two dimensions to
permanent structures. In addition, mark the Record Drawings to show the precise
location of concealed work and equipment, including concealed or embedded
piping and valves and all changes and deviations in the mechanical work from
that shown on the Contract Documents. This requirement is not construed as
authorization for the Contractor to make changes in the layout or work without
written definite instructions from the E.R.
.3 Upon completion of the installation, obtain from the E.R. a complete set of mylar
transparencies on heavy gauge film with firm names removed. Enter thereon, in
a neat and accurate manner, a complete record of all revisions of the original
drawings, as actually installed. Bear the cost for transparencies and for making
required changes. Submit three (3) sets of black and white prints of these revised
transparencies to the E.R. for review of completeness. After review by the E.R.,
make necessary changes to transparencies and then deliver them to the E.R. for
transmittal to the Employer. E.R. will not review these drawings for accuracy nor
will the E.R. bear any responsibility for accuracy or completeness.
SECTION 4-1
Page 14 OF 15
.4 Mark all As-Built Drawings on the front lower right hand corner with a rubber
stamp impression that states the following:
“AS-BUILT DRAWINGS” (10mm high letters)

To be used for recording Field Deviations and
Dimensional Data Only”. (15mm high letters).
As built drawings will be prepared on “AutoCAD”. Version to be determined by

E.R.
.5 The record Drawings will also consist of a set of prints of the final “Signed Off”
Contractor‟s “Coordination Drawings”.
1.26 CERTIFICATION
.1 Any certifications required by the Specifications, in addition to those required for

shop drawings, product data, equipment and other items, are to be so certified by
the Employer, a Partner, or a Corporate Officer of the firm required to provide the
Certification, or by another person duly authorized to sign binding agreements for
and in behalf of the Employer, Partner or Corporation.
.2 All tests as required by this division of the specification that reference an agency
such as ASME shall be properly certified. Each and every piece of equipment,
piping system, etc. tested shall have a certificate from the factory stating test
conditions, date of test, inspector, equipment identification and test requirements.
1.27 FINAL REVIEW
.1 At a time designated by the E.R., the entire system will be reviewed for
compliance with the Design/Contract Drawings and Specifications. Be available
at all times during this review.
.2 Demonstrate to the E.R. prior to the Final Review that all systems and all
equipment have been properly balanced and adjusted and are in compliance with
the requirements of the Contract Documents. After these demonstration tests are
satisfactorily completed, but prior to the Final Review field visit, the Contractor will
submit to the E.R. a written certification that: 1) attests to the Contract Document
compliance for this Project prior to the E.R.‟s Final Review field visit.
.3 Operate the entire system properly with all systems balanced and all controls
adjusted.
.4 Certificates and Documents required herein to be in order and presented to the

E.R. at least eight (8) weeks prior to the Final Review.
5. After the review, any changes or corrections noted as necessary for the work to
comply with these specifications and the Drawings to be accomplished without
delay in order to secure final acceptance of the work.
1.28 EARLY OCCUPANCY
.1 Be responsible for completing those systems which are necessary to allow partial
occupancy of the buildings even if systems in the unoccupied areas are
incomplete.
.2 Verify requirements for temporary occupancy with the local Building Department.
SECTION 4-1
Page 15 OF 15
1.29 RELEVANT REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS
.1 The whole of the works covered by this Specification shall be carried out in
accordance with the latest Uniform Building By-Laws. Works performed shall be
to the approval of the relevant local Authorities.
.2 Comply with all statutory obligations and regulations of any Local Authority, Public
Service or Statutory Undertaking relating to the execution of the Works as well as
with requirements of the Uniform Building By-Laws and all other applicable codes.
.3 Where codes or standards are listed herein, the applicable portions apply. The
published version current at the time the Tenderer receives the tender documents
will apply.
.4 Plans, specifications, codes and standards are all minimum requirements. Where
requirements differ, apply the more stringent.
.5 Should any changes in plans or specifications be required to comply with

governing regulations, the Tenderer to notify the E.R. at the time of submitting his
tender.
.6 All items of plate and equipment, including gauges and all drawings and
schedules shall be in system international (SI) units. The specific approval of the
shall be obtained before any equipment dimensioned or calibrated in imperial
units is incorporated in works.
END OF SECTION 4-1

FIRE PROTECTION PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
SECTION 4-11
Page 1 OF 2
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION

Documents.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
.1 Fire extinguisher
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Manufacturing certificates
.2 Approval certificates from BOMBA
.1 MS 566: Part 3 Code of Practice for Portable Fire Extinguisher

MS 1179: 1990 Portable Fire Extinguisher
MS 1180 Fire Extinguisher Media
MS 1181 Recharging Fire Extinguishers
.2 Factory and Machinery Department (FMD).
.3 Bomba
The Contractor shall be responsible for testing and obtaining the necessary approval and
certificates from the Jabatan Perkhidmatan Bomba Malaysia.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
.1 The Contractor shall supply, install, test and commission the necessary
equipment as generally shown on the drawings and to the Specification of Local
Fire Authorities. Samples of equipment before installation shall be submitted for
the Engineer’s approval. Evidence of approval of fire extinguishers shall be
accompanied with the tender.
2.2 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
.1 Portable fire extinguishers to the approval of the Local Authority shall be supplied
and installed as shown in the drawings. Similar portable fire extinguishers
supplies shall have the same method of operation. The number and type of
extinguishers shall be hung or hooked or securely placed on brackets fastened to
a wall, partition or column in a suitable conspicuous and accessible position. No
extinguishers shall be sited where temperature exceeds 140 deg. F. Generally, it
shall be installed and maintained to B.S. Code of Practice CP 402: Part 3: 1964.
.2 Dry chemical powder shall be capable of extinguishing Class A, B and C fire. The
powder shall be non-toxic, non-corrosive, non-abrasive and non-freezing. It shall
not solidify or evaporate and conform to B.S 3465.
FIRE PROTECTION PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
SECTION 4-11
Page 2 OF 2
.3 Carbon dioxide extinguisher shall be able to extinguisher Class A, B and C fire

and conform to B.S. 3326 and shall be supplied with horn, hole and valve
assembly.
.4 The Contractor shall include in the Tender Price cost of installation including
brackets and the approval fee from the Fire Authority. All extinguishers should be
installed at height at 4’ 6” height from the floor level to the handle.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 MOUNTING HEIGHT
.1 Extinguishers having a gross weight not exceeding 9kg shall be installed so that
the top of the extinguisher is not more than 1.5m above the floor. Extinguishers
having gross weight greater than 9kg (except the wheeled types) shall be so
installed that the top of extinguisher is not more than 1.0m above the floor.
.2 Ensure that the mounting location is coordinated with the architect or ID

consultants.
END OF SECTION 4-11

SECTION 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Page 1 of 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE
4-1 PARTICULAR PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
4-2 LIGHTING WIRING, POWER CABLING AND CONTROL WIRING
4-3 CONDUIT, ‘RACEWAY’ TRUNKING, CABLE TRAY AND CABLE LADDER
4-4 BUSBAR TRUNKING SYSTEMS (BUSWAYS)
4-5 PVC SHEATED CABLES (NON-FIRE RESISTANT & FIRE RESISTANT)
4-6 SWITCHES AND SWITCHED SOCKET OUTLETS
4-7 PROTECTION, METERING AND CONTROL
4-8 DISTRIBUTION PANELS, AUXILIARY BOARD AND MARSHALLING CABINETS
4-9 FIRESTOPS
4-10 LOW VOLTAGE AC SWITCHBOARDS, MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE
4-11 LIGHTING LUMINAIRES
4-12 EARTHING REQUIREMENT
4-13 LIGHTNING PROTECTION
4-14 EMERGENCY STANDBY GENERATOR SETS
4-15 FIBER OPTIC CABLE
4-16 TELEPHONE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
4-17 SATELLITE MASTER TELEVISION (SMATV) SYSTEM
4-18 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) SYSTEM
4-19 CARD ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
4-20 QUALITY ASSURANCE, INSPECTION, TESTING & COMMISSIONING
4-21 IMPLEMENTATION OF TESTING AND ADJUSTING, COMMISSIONING,

HANDOVER
PARTICULAR PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 4-1
PAGE 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Work shall include the supply, packing for transport, delivery to site, unloading,
installation, connecting, final testing and putting into commission, hand-over in
approved working order and maintenance of the electrical systems thereafter for a
period of twelve months, the whole of the Works, as detailed hereunder, and as
shown in the Drawings.
B. The works to be carried out shall include the whole of the materials (except
equipments specified as supplied by others), and all necessary labour for the
completion of the works, in every detail, ready for continuous and economic
operation whether such be directly mentioned in the specification or not.
C. The Contractor shall apply for and obtain all necessary certificates and approvals for
the work done from the relevant authorities and shall lodge the same with the
Employer's Representative before final payment is made.
D. All required fees for inspection by authorities and royalties or fees required in
connection with the use of patented devices and systems shall be paid by the
Contractor.
E. The Contractor shall arrange for and provide inspection where required by local
authorities or by these specifications.
F. Provide a single guarantee stating that all parts of the work are in accordance with
Contract requirements. Guarantee work against faulty and improper material and
workmanship for a period of one (1) year from date of final acceptance by the
Employer's Representative, except that where guarantees or warranties for longer
terms are specified herein, such longer term to apply.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Tender Stage
1. Submit all manufacturer's data as called for hereinafter and in the Project
Procedures Manual.
2. Submit in writing to the Employer's Representative proposals to supply

alternative materials or equipment giving sufficient lead time for review by
the Employer's Representative prior to the tender date. Contractor
submitting alternative will reimburse Employer's Representative for all costs
associated with the review of the proposed alternative whether alternative is
accepted or rejected.
3. Proposed changes and substitutions of systems, apparatus, equipment and

manufacturers may be considered, subject to the approval of the Employer's
Representative. Include the following information with the proposal.
4. A description of the difference between the existing contract requirements

and that proposed, the comparative features of each, and the effect of the
change on the end result performance. Include the impact of all changes on
other specification Divisions and acknowledge the inclusion of
implementation costs.
5. Schematic drawings and details to supplement the description.

SECTION 4-1
PAGE 2
6. A list of the contract requirements that must be revised if the change is

accepted, including any specification revisions.
7. Complete list of materials and equipment proposed for use in the change.
8. Include a description and estimate of costs the Employer may incur in

implementing the change, such as test, evaluation, operating and support
costs.
9. A projection of any effects the proposed change would have on collateral

costs to the Employer.
10. A statement of the time by which a contract modification accepting the

change must be issued, noting any effect on the contract completion time or
the delivery schedule.
11. A statement indicating the reduction to the tender price if the Employer
accepts the change. Be responsible for appropriate modifications to all work
described in this and other specification Divisions.
B. Include all revisions required to adapt alternatives in such proposals, including

revisions to work described in other specification Divisions. No increase in the tender
price will be considered to accommodate the use of alternative equipment.
C. Wherever operating results such as quantity delivered are scheduled, or when the
make and size of apparatus, for which such quantities are readily determinable, is
specified, the substitution being proposed must conform substantially to the
quantities specified or implied. The substitution must fit into available space
conditions and must function properly in coordination with the rest of the system.
D. Should any change in plans or specifications be required to comply with governing

regulations, the Employer's Representative shall be notified at the time of submitting
this Tender.
1.3 Shop Drawings, Product Data And Samples
A. Within two (2) months after notice to proceed by the Employer or Employer's
Representative, or after execution of the Agreement, submit for Employer's
Representative's review, a complete list of all electrical equipment manufacturers
and material suppliers for the equipment intended to be furnished and installed on
this project.
B. Within four (4) months after notice to proceed by the Employer or Employer's
Representative, prepare an index of all submittals for the project. Include a submittal
identification number, a cross-reference to the Specification sections or Drawing
Number, and an item description. Prefix the submittal identification number by the
Specification sections to which they apply. Indicate on each submittal, the submittal
identification number in addition to the other data specified. The contractor will utilize
the assigned submittal identification number.
C. Submit complete shop drawings, product data, test reports and samples from the
manufacturers, suppliers, vendors, and all materials and equipment as specified
herein in various sections of the specification. Submit data and details of such
materials and equipment for review by the Employer's Representative. Prior to
submission of the shop drawings, product data and samples to the Employer's
Representative, review and certify in writing on each, the shop drawings, product
data and samples are in compliance with the Contract Documents.
SECTION 4-1
PAGE 3
D. Application for payments may be delayed at the Employer's Representative's

discretion if the above paragraphs (1.2.A.1, 1.2.A.2 and 1.2.A.3) of the described
works are not provided in a timely manner.
E. Submit materials and equipment according to manufacturer, trade name and model
number. Include copies of applicable brochure or catalog material. Do not assume
applicable catalogs are available in the Employer's Representative's office.
Maintenance and operating manuals are not suitable substitutes for shop drawings.
F. Identify each sheet of printed submittal pages (using arrows, underlining or circling)
to show applicable sizes, types, model numbers, rating, capacities and options
actually being proposed. Cross out non-applicable information. Note specified
features such as materials or painting.
G. Include dimensional data for roughing in and installation, technical data sufficient to
verify that equipment meets requirements of drawings and specifications. Include
wiring, piping and service connection data.
H. Maintain a complete set of reviewed and stamped shop drawings and product data
on site. Copies of stamped drawings shall be posted at the work place.
I. Prepare and submit detailed shop drawings for major cable trays bus ducts and other
distribution services on suitable scale, including locations and sizes of openings in
floor decks, walls and roofs.
J. For each room or area of the building containing switchboards, panelboards,

dimming cabinets, fire alarm terminal cabinets, fire alarm control panels, consoles,
etc. the following is required to be submitted for review and acceptance at the time of
the equipment submittal.
1. Floor Plans
a. Plan views (including sections & elevations when requested) of the

equipment indicated in the exact location in which it is intended to be
installed. These plans shall be of a scale not less than 1: 50. They
shall be prepared in the following manner:-
b. Indicate the physical boundaries of the space including door swings

and ceiling heights and ceiling type (as applicable).
c. Illustrate all electrical equipment proposed to be contained therein.

Include top and bottom elevations of all electrical equipment. The
Drawings must be prepared utilizing the dimensions contained in the
individual equipment submittals.
d. Illustrate all other equipment therein such as conduits, detectors,

luminaries, ducts, registers, pullboxes, cable trays/ladders, structural
elements.
e. Note the operating weight of each piece of equipment.
f. Note the heat release from each piece of electrical equipment in

terms of BTU per hour. This information shall be that which is
supplied by the respective manufacturers.
g. Illustrate all concrete pads, curbs, etc.
h. Note all code clearances from all equipment by dimensions.

SECTION 4-1
PAGE 4
i. Indicate maximum normal allowable operating temperature for each

piece of equipment (as per each respective manufacturer's
recommendation).
2. Equipment Removal Routes
a. Provide in conjunction with the above, a set of documents

reproduced from the then current Contract Documents indicating the
methods of equipment removal for all major pieces of equipment.
b. Indicate on floor plans by means of arrows, the complete path for

equipment removal.
c. Where equipment will be required to be hung temporarily from a

slab or beam, note same on the submission including the weight of
the equipment to be hung and the weight of the hoisting equipment.
d. Note all heights of conduits, ductwork, link beams, doorways,

transoms, piping, etc. in the proposed path assuring that adequate
headroom is provided.
K. The Contractor is not relieved of the responsibility for dimensions or errors that may
be contained on submissions reviewed by the Employer's Representative, or for
deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents. Understand clearly that
the Employer's Representative's noting some errors but overlooking others does not
grant the Contractor permission to proceed in error. Regardless of any information
contained in the shop drawings, product data and samples, the Contract Documents
govern the work and are neither waived nor superseded in any way by the review of
shop drawings, product data and samples.
L. Inadequate or incomplete shop drawings, product data/or samples will not be

reviewed by the Employer's Representative and will be returned to the Contractor for
resubmittal.
M. Indicate in the lower right hand corner of each shop drawing, and each product data
brochure on the front cover, the submittal identification number, title of the sheet or
brochure, name and location of the Project, names of the Architects, Employer's
Representative, Contractor, manufacturer, supplier, and vendor, the date of
submittal, and the date of each correction and version and revision. Number all
pages and drawings in the product data brochures consecutively from beginning to
end. Unless the above information is included, the submittal will be returned for
resubmission. Include with resubmittals of product data or brochures a cover letter
summarizing the corrections made in response to the review comments and the
submittal page numbers which were revised.
1.4 REVIEWS
A. Employer's Representative's review is for general compliance with the design

concept and Contract Documents. Marking or comments or the lack thereof does
not relieve the Contractor from compliance with the project plans and specifications.
The Contractor remains solely responsible for details and accuracy, for confirming
and correlating all quantities and dimensions, for selecting fabrication processes, for
techniques of construction, for performing his work in a safe manner, and for
coordinating his work with that of work described in this and other specification
Divisions.
SECTION 4-1
PAGE 5
B. No part of the work shall be started in the shop or in the field until the Employer's
Representative have reviewed with no exceptions the shop drawings and samples
for that portion of the Work.
C. A minimum period of ten (10) working days, exclusive of transmittal time, will be
required in the Employer's Representative's office each time shop drawings, product
data and/or samples are submitted for review. This time period must be considered
by the Contractor when scheduling his work.
D. Submit one sepia transparency and two prints of all items requiring shop drawings.
E. Submit six (6) copies of catalog cuts.
1. Submissions will be stamped as follows:-
a. Reviewed and Accepted
(1) Fabrication, manufacture or construction may proceed

providing submittal complies with the Contract Documents.
b. Reviewed and Accepted and Noted
(1) Work may proceed as above so long as the Employer's

Representative's notations are complied with.
c. Not Accepted
(1) The submittal does not comply with the Contract

Documents; do not proceed with fabrication, manufacturer
or construction. The work and shop drawings are not
permitted at the job site. Resubmit appropriate shop
drawings.
1.5 CONTRACTOR'S COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Prior to fabrication or installation of any work, completely coordinate work of all work
described in this and other specification Divisions and prepare a complete set of
Coordination Drawings.
B. Coordinate efforts of all work described in this and other specification Divisions and
furnish, in writing, any information necessary to permit the work of all Divisions to be
installed satisfactorily and with the least possible interference or delay.
C. Prepare a complete set of construction Coordination Drawings indicating the

equipment actually purchased and the exact routing for all lines such feeder conduit,
etc. Complete each Coordination Drawing, signed-off by the other specification
Divisions and the Contractor prior to the installation of the work in the area covered
by the specific drawing.
D. Wherever the work is of sufficient complexity, prepare additional detail drawings to

scale similar to that of the design drawings, prepared on tracing medium of the same
size as contract drawings. With these layouts, coordinate the work with the work
described in other specification Divisions. Such detailed work to be clearly identified
in the Drawings as to the area to which it applies. Submit these drawings to the
Employer's Representative for review. At completion include a set of such drawings
with each set of as-built drawings.
E. Indicate structural loads and support points for all racked cable tray, conduit and
busduct, and submit to the Employer's Representative for review and approval.
SECTION 4-1
PAGE 6
Indicate the elevation, location, support points, and forces and loads imposed on the
structure at supports, anchor points, and size of all lines. Indicate all beam
penetrations and slab penetrations sized and coordinated. Indicate all work routed
underground or embedded in concrete by dimension to column and building lines.
F. This requirement for Coordination Drawings is not authorization for the Contractor to
make any unauthorized changes to the Contract Drawings. Maintain all Design
Drawing space allocations such as ceiling height for future tenant built out and
flexibility, chase walls, equipment room size, etc., unless prior written authorization is
received from the Employer's Representative to change them.
G. Work installed which interferes with work described in any other specification
Divisions shall be corrected at no cost to the Employer.
1.6 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Provide operating instructions and maintenance data books for all equipment and
materials furnished under this Contract. See the "Commissioning Manuals" for
further requirements.
B. Submit three (3) final copies of operating and maintenance manual for review at least
ten (10) weeks before final review of the project. Assemble all data in a completely
indexed volume or volumes in four-ring binders and identify the size, model, and
features indicated for each item. Print the project name and logo on the outside of
the binders.
C. Deliver two (2) initial copies of the operation and maintenance manuals six (6)
months after notice to proceed has been given by the Employer or Employer's
Representative. Include in the initial copies all the information in Paragraph 1.6.E.5
below.
D. Maintenance instruction manuals to include complete cleaning and servicing data

compiled in clear and easily understandable form. Show all model numbers of each
piece of equipment, complete lists of replacement parts, ratings, and actual loads.
E. Include the following information where applicable:
1. Identifying name and part number.
2. Locations (where several similar items are used, provide a list).
3. Complete nameplate data.
4. Certified Record Drawings and "Final Reviewed" Shop Drawings.
5. Parts list.
6. Performance curves and data.
7. Wiring diagrams.
8. Lubrication charts
9. Manufacturers' recommended operating and maintenance instructions with

all non-applicable information deleted.
10. List of spare parts recommended for normal service requirements.

SECTION 4-1
PAGE 7
11. Assembly and disassembly instructions with exploded view Drawings where
available.
12. Trouble shooting diagnostic instructions where applicable.
1.7 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Maintain on a daily basis at the project site a complete black and white set of "As-
Built Drawings", reflecting an accurate dimensional record of all deviations between
work shown on Drawings and that actually installed.
B. Record dimensions clearly and accurately to delineate the work as installed; suitably
identify locations of all equipment by at least two dimensions to permanent
structures. In addition, mark the Record Drawings to show the precise location of
concealed work and equipment, including concealed or embedded raceways and
cables and all changes and deviations in the electrical work from that shown on the
Contract Documents. This requirement is not construed as authorization for the
Contractor to make changes in the layout or work without written definite instructions
from the Employer's Representative.
C. Upon completion of the installation, obtain from the Employer's Representative, a

complete set of drawings in computer software. Enter thereon, in a neat and
accurate manner, a complete record of all revisions of the original drawings, as
actually installed. Bear the cost for transparencies and for making required changes.
Submit one (1) set of black and white prints of these revised transparencies to the
Employer's Representative¬ for review of completeness. After review by the
Employer's Representative, make necessary changes and then deliver to the
Employer's Representative for transmittal to the Employer. Employer's
Representative will not review these drawings for accuracy nor will the Employer's
Representative bear any responsibility for accuracy or completeness.
D. Mark all As-Built Drawings on the front lower right hand corner with a rubber stamp
impression that states the following:
"AS-BUILT DRAWINGS" (10mm high letters)

To be used for recording Field Deviations
and Dimensional Data Only". (5mm high letters).
The Record Drawings will also consist of a set of prints of the final "Signed
Off" Contractor's "Coordination Drawings".
1.8 CERTIFICATION
A. Any certifications required by the Specifications, in addition to those required for shop
drawings, product data, equipment and other items, are to be so certified by the
Employer, a Partner, or a Corporate Officer of the firm required to provide the
Certification, or by another person duly authorized to sign binding agreements for and
on behalf of the Employer, Partner or Corporation.
A. The whole of the works covered by this Specification shall be carried out in
accordance with the latest Malaysian Standards and Codes, British Standards
Specification, Codes of Practice, IEC, UL and the local By-laws. Works performed
under this Contract shall be to the approval of the relevant local Authorities.
SECTION 4-1
PAGE 8
B. Comply with current governing codes, ordinances and regulations and the rules,
regulations and requirements of the utility companies serving the building and
agencies or authorities having jurisdiction over any part of the work, and secure all
necessary permits.
C. All equipment shall meet or exceed minimum requirements of IEC, BS and UL.
Plans, specifications, codes and standards are all minimum requirements. Where
requirements differ, apply the more stringent.
D. Where codes or standards are listed herein, the applicable portions apply. The
published version current at the time the Tenderer receives the tender documents
will apply.
E. The codes and standards listed in the Specifications are either IEC or British
Standards unless otherwise noted. Where Malaysian Standards are available, these
shall be followed and shall take precedence over the relevant IEC or British
Standard.
F. All items of plate and equipment, including gauges and all drawings and schedules
shall be in System International (SI) units. The specific approval of the Employer's
Representative shall be obtained before any equipment dimensioned or calibrated in
imperial units is incorporated in works.
G. Execute work in strict accordance with the best practices of the trades in a thorough,
substantial, workmanlike manner by competent workmen registered with the Energy
Commission where required. Provide a competent, experienced full-time
superintendent who is authorized to make decisions on behalf of the Contractor.
1.10 COMPLIANCE WITH STATUTORY AUTHORITY'S REQUIREMENTS
A. The following authorities having jurisdiction over electrical installations in Malaysia

are as follows:-
1. Energy Commission
2. Fire Rescue Department Malaysia
B. Notwithstanding the list of acceptable manufacturers as listed under Products under

the various sections of the specification, all products intended to be used for the
project shall be approved and confirmed to the latest edition of the Electricity Supply
Act and proof of such approval shall be submitted together with the Tender.
C. The installation of all electrical works shall comply with the latest edition of the
Department of Electricity Supply Regulations and the Contractor shall abide by all the
requirements stipulated therein.
D. All materials and electrical equipment associated with fire safety systems shall be of
the type approved by Director General of Fire and Rescue Department. Proof of
such approval shall be submitted.
E. The Contractor shall pay all fees, make all arrangements and obtain all approvals
and permits required by each of the above authorities. All certificates required by the
authorities shall be submitted by the Contractor.
1.11 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS
A. Abbreviations
1. ASA Acoustical Society of America

SECTION 4-1
PAGE 9
2. AWA Aluminium Wire Armour
3. BIL Basic Impulse Level
4. BS British Standards
5. IEC International Electrotechnic Commission
6. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
7. IES Illuminating Engineering Society
8. LED Light Emitting Diode
9. NEC National Electrical Code
10. OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
11. SWA Steel Wire Armour
12. UL Underwriters Laboratories
13. XLPE Cross-linked Polyethylene
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. If products and materials are specified or indicated in the Drawings for a specific item
or system, use those products or materials. If products and materials are not listed in
either of the above, use first class products and materials, subject to approval of the
Employer's Representative.
B. Contract Documents are based on the materials, the equipment specified and the
equipment manufacturers indicated in the Documents. Approval by the Employer's
Representative of the equipment manufacturers other than those indicated in the
Contract Documents or materials other than specified, does not relieve Contractor of
any responsibility to provide equipment and materials which will meet the
performance as stated or implied by the Contract Documents.
C. Only those equipment manufacturers listed in the individual sections are acceptable
for this project, subject to requirements of the Contract Documents.
D. Provide products and materials that are new and unused, clean, free of defects,
damage and corrosion.
E. All products and materials used in this project shall not contain asbestos, PCB's or
any other materials which are considered hazardous by the Department of
Environmental or any other agency having jurisdiction.
F. Equipment capacities, etc., shall be scheduled or specified for job site operating
conditions. Equipment sensitive to altitude or site conditions shall be derated with the
approved method of derating.
G. Provide name/data plates on major components of equipment with manufacturer's

name, model number, serial number, capacity data and electrical characteristics
attached in a conspicuous place.
SECTION 4-1
PAGE 10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Install materials and equipment with qualified trades people.
B. Maintain uniformity of manufacture for equipment used in similar applications and

sizes.
C. Fully lubricate equipment after installation.
D. Locate all floor mounted equipment on 100mm high concrete pad or as shown in the
Contract Document. Coordinate size and location.
E. Follow manufacturers' instructions for installing, connecting, and adjusting

equipment. Produce one copy of such instructions to the Employer's Representative
before installing any equipment. Provide a copy of such instructions at the
equipment during work on the equipment.
F. Replace materials of less than specified quality as designated by the Employer's

Representative and relocate work incorrectly installed as determined by the
3.2 DELIVERY, DRAYAGE AND HAULING
A. Include all drayage, hauling, hoisting, shoring and placement in the building for the
equipment specified herein. Be responsible for the timely delivery and introduction of
equipment to the project site as required by the construction schedule for this project.
If any item of equipment is received prior to the time it is required, be responsible for
its proper storage and protection until such time as it may be required.
B. If any item of equipment is not delivered to or installed at the project site in a timely
manner as required by the project construction schedule, be solely responsible for
disassembly, re-assembly, manufacturer's supervision, shoring, general construction
modification, delays, overtime costs, etc. No additional cost or delays to be incurred
by the Employer.
C. Check all materials and equipment upon their arrival on the job site and verify their
compliance with the Contract Documents. Modify any work which proceeds prior to
receiving accepted shop drawings as required to comply with the Contract
Documents and the shop drawings, at no cost to the Employer.
3.3 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL PROTECTION
A. Protect the work equipment and material of all other specification Divisions from
damage by work or workmen of this specification Divisions, and correct all damage
thus caused without additional cost to the Employer.
B. Be responsible for all work, materials and equipment until finally inspected, tested
and accepted; protect work against theft, injury or damage; and carefully store
material and equipment received on site which are not immediately installed. Close
open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent
entry of obstructing material. Cover and protect in an acceptable manner to the
Employer's Representative, all equipment and materials from damage due to water,
spray-on fireproofing, construction debris, etc.
SECTION 4-1
PAGE 11
C. Provide adequate means for fully protecting finished parts of the materials and
equipment against damage from whatever cause during the progress of the work
until final acceptance.Protect materials and equipment in storage and during
construction in such a manner that no finished surfaces will be damaged or marred,
and moving parts kept clean and dry. If items are damaged, do not install, but take
immediate steps to obtain replacement or repair.
3.4 COORDINATION OF WORK
A. The Drawings show the general arrangement of equipment, and appurtenances.

Follow these Drawings as closely as the actual construction and the work described
in this and other specification Divisions will permit. Provide offsets, fittings, and
accessories which may be required but not shown in the Drawings. Investigate the
site, structural and finish ground conditions affecting the work, and arrange the work
accordingly. Provide such work and accessories as may be required to meet such
conditions.
B. The locations of lighting fixtures, outlets, panels and other equipment indicated in the
Drawings are approximately correct, but they are understood to be subjected to such
revision as may be found necessary or desirable at the time the work is installed in
consequence of increase or reduction of the number of outlets, or in order to meet
field conditions or to coordinate with modular requirements of ceilings, or to simplify
the work, or for other legitimate causes.
C. Exercise particular caution with reference to the location of panels, outlets, switches,
etc., and have precise and definite locations approved by the Employer's
Representative before proceeding with the installation.
D. The Drawings show only the approximate location of outlets. Any significant changes
in the location of outlets, cabinets, etc., necessary in order to meet field conditions
shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Employer's Representative and
receive his approval before such alterations are made. All such modifications shall be
made without additional cost to the Employer.
E. Obtain from the Employer's Representative in the field the location of such outlets or
equipment not definitely located in the Drawings.
F. Circuit "tags" in the form of numbers are used where shown to indicate the circuit
designation numbers in electrical panels. Show the actual circuit numbers on the
finished record tracing and on a typed panel directory card. Where circuiting is not
indicated, electrical trade must provide required circuiting in accordance with the
loading indicated in the Drawings and/or as directed.
G. The Drawings generally do not indicate the number of wires in conduit for the branch
circuit wiring of fixtures, and outlets, or the actual circuiting. Provide the correct wire
size and quantity as required by the indicated circuiting and/or circuit numbers
indicated and control, wiring diagrams, if any, specified voltage drop or maximum
distance limitations, and the applicable requirements of the Malaysian Standards,
IEC or BS and local regulations.
H. Certain materials will be provided by other specification Divisions. Examine the

Contract Documents to ascertain these requirements.
I. Carefully check space requirements with other specification Divisions to insure that
material can be installed in the spaces allotted thereto including finished suspended
ceilings.
SECTION 4-1
PAGE 12
J. Wherever work interconnects with work described in other specification Divisions,

coordinate with other specification Divisions to insure that they have the information
necessary so that they may properly install the necessary connections and
equipment. Identify items (remote ballast, pull boxes, etc.) requiring access in order
that the ceiling trade will know where to install access doors and panels.
K. Consult with other specification Divisions regarding equipment so that, wherever

possible, distribution equipment are of the same manufacture.
L. Furnish and set sleeves for passage of conduits through structural masonry and
concrete walls and floors and elsewhere as will be required for the proper protection
of each duct and conduit passing through building surfaces.
M. Properly provide fire stopping around all conduits, sleeves, etc. which pass through
rated walls, partitions and floors. Submit fire stopping details.
N. Provide detailed information on openings and holes required in precast members for
electrical work. Cast holes 100mm and larger in diameter. Field-cut holes smaller
than 100mm.
O. Provide required supports and hangers for conduit and equipment, designed so as
not to exceed allowable loadings of structures.
P. Examine and compare the contract drawings and specifications with the Drawings
and specifications of other specification Divisions, and report any discrepancies
between them to the Employer's Representative and obtain from him written
instructions for changes necessary in the work. Install and coordinate the work in
cooperation with other related specification Divisions. Before installation, make
proper provisions to avoid interferences.
Q. Contractor shall furnish services of an experienced Superintendent, who shall be in

constant charge of all work, and who shall coordinate his work with the work of other
specification Divisions. No work shall be installed before coordinating with other
specification Divisions.
R. Coordinate, with work under other Divisions of this specification, for all work
necessary to accomplish the work described in this specification Divisions.
S. Before commencing work, examine adjoining work on which this work is in any way
dependent for perfect workmanship and report conditions which prevent
performance of first class work. Become thoroughly familiar with actual existing
conditions to which connections must be made or which must be changed or altered.
T. Adjust location of conduits, panels, equipment, etc., to accommodate the work to

prevent interferences, both anticipated and encountered. Determine the exact route
and location of each conduit prior to fabrication.
1. Right-of-Way: Lines which pitch have the right-of-way over those which do
not pitch. For example: condensate, and plumbing drains normally have
right-of-way. Lines whose elevations cannot be changed have right-of-way
over lines whose elevations can be changed.
2. Make offsets, transitions and changes in direction of conduits as required to

maintain proper head room and pitch on sloping lines.
U. In cases of doubt as to the Work intended, or in the event of need for explanation
thereof, request supplementary instructions from the Employer's Representative.
SECTION 4-1
PAGE 13
V. Immediately upon the award of this Contract, but prior to commencing any work,
confer with the Employer's Representative concerning the Work under this Contract.
3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Lay out the work carefully in advance. Where cutting, channelling, chasing or drilling
of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings or other surfaces is necessary for the proper
installation, support or anchorage of conduit or other equipment, do the work
carefully. Repair any damage to the building, piping, equipment or defaced finish
plaster, wood work, metalwork, etc. using skilled mechanics of the trades involved at
no additional cost to the Employer.
B. Do no cutting, channelling, chasing or drilling of unfinished masonry, tile, etc., unless

permission from the Employer's Representative is first obtained. If permission is
granted, perform this work in a manner approved by the Employer's Representative.
C. Where conduit or equipment is mounted on a painted finished surface, or a surface

to be painted, paint to match the surface. Cold galvanize bare metal whenever
support channels are cut.
D. Slots, chases, openings and recesses through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs will be
provided by the various trades with their respective materials. The trade requiring
them to properly locate such openings and be responsible for any cutting and
patching caused by the neglect to do so.
3.6 MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A. Unless otherwise noted or required because of special conditions, locate outlets as

per architectural contract documents.
3.7 EQUIPMENT PAD AND ANCHOR BOLTS
A. Concrete pads for various pieces of equipment may be furnished under another
Specification Division. Provide pads in all electrical equipment rooms. Generally
conform equipment pads to the shape of the piece of equipment it serves with a
minimum 80mm margin around the equipment and supports. Construct pads a
minimum of 100mm high and made of a minimum 28 days, 17225kpa concrete
reinforced with 150mm x 150mm welded wire mesh. Trowel tops and sides of pad to
smooth finishes, equal to those of the floors, with all external corners bullnosed to a
20mm radius. Use shop drawings stamped "NO EXCEPTIONS" for dimensional
guidance in sizing pads.
B. Furnish and install galvanized anchor bolts for all equipment placed on concrete
equipment pads, inertia blocks, or on concrete slabs. Provide bolts of the size and
number recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment and locate by means
of suitable templates. When equipment is placed on vibration isolators, secure the
equipment to the isolator and secure the isolator to the floor, pad, or support as
recommended by the vibration isolation manufacturer.
C. Where control panels, etc., are mounted on gypsum board partitions, the mounting
screws will pass through the gypsum board and be securely attached to the partition
studs. At the Contractor's option, the mounting screws may pass through the
gypsum board and be securely attached to 150mm square galvanized metal
backplates which are attached to the gypsum board with an approved non-flammable
adhesive. Toggle bolts installed in gypsum board partitions will not be acceptable.
D. Secure equipment with bolts, washers and locknuts of ample size to support
equipment. Embedded anchor bolts to have bottom plate and pipe sleeves. Grout
SECTION 4-1
PAGE 14
machinery set in concrete under the entire bearing surface. After grout has set,
remove wedges, shims and jack bolts and fill space with grout.
3.8 EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Provide supports, hangers and auxiliary structural members required for support of
the work.
B. Furnish and set all sleeves for passage of raceways through structural, masonry and
concrete walls and floors and elsewhere as will be required for the proper protection
of each raceway (and bus duct) passing through building surfaces.
C. Wall mounted equipment may be directly secured to wall by means of steel bolts.
Maintain at least 25mm air space between equipment and supporting wall. Groups
or arrays of equipment may be mounted on adequately sized steel angles, channels,
or bars. Prefabricated steel channels providing a high degree of mounting flexibility,
such as those manufactured by Kindorf, Globe-Strutt and Unistrut, may be used for
mounting arrays of equipment.
3.9 SUPPORTS
A. Support work in accordance with the best industry practice and the following.
B. Include supporting frames or racks extending from floor slab to ceiling slab for work
indicated as being supported from walls where the walls are incapable of supporting
the weight. In particular, provide such frames or racks in electric closets.
C. Include supporting frames or racks for equipment, intended for vertical surface
mounting, which is required in a free standing position.
D. Supporting frames or racks shall be of standard angle, standard channel or specialty

support system steel members. They shall be rigidly bolted or welded together and
adequately braced to form a substantial structure. Racks shall be of ample size to
assure a workmanlike arrangement of all equipment mounted on them.
E. Nothing (including outlet, pull and junction boxes and fittings) shall depend on electric
conduits, or cables for support, except that threaded hub type fittings having a gross
volume not in excess of 1600m/litre may be supported from heavy wall conduit,
where the conduit in turn is securely supported from the structure within 125mm of
the fitting on two opposite sides.
F. Nothing shall rest on, or depend for support on, suspended ceiling media (tiles, lath,
plaster, as well as splines, runners, bars and the like in the plane of the ceiling).
G. Provide required supports and hangers for conduit, equipment, etc., so that loading
will not exceed allowable loadings of structure.
3.10 FASTENINGS
A. Fasten electric work to building structure in accordance with the best industry
practice and the following.
B. As a minimum procedure, where weight applied to the attachment points is 45kg or

less, fasten to building elements of:
1. Wood: with wood screws.
2. Concrete and solid masonry: with bolts and expansion shields.

SECTION 4-1
PAGE 15
3. Hollow construction: with toggle bolts.
4. Solid metal: with machine screws in tapped holes or with welded studs.
5. Steel decking or subfloor: with fastenings as specified below for applied

weights in excess of 45kg.
C. As a minimum procedure, where weight applied to building attachment points

exceeds 45kg, but is 135kg or less, conform to the following:
1. At concrete slabs utilize 600mm x 600mm x 12mm steel fishplates on top

with through bolts. Fishplate assemblies shall be chased in and grouted
flush with the top of slab screed line, where no fill is to be applied.
2. At steel decking or subfloor for all fastenings, utilize through bolts or

threaded rods. The tops of bolts or rods shall be set at least 25mm below
the top fill screed line and grouted in. Suitable washers shall be used under
bolt heads or nuts. In cases where the decking or subfloor manufacturer
produces specialty hangers to work with his decking or subfloor such
hangers shall be utilized.
D. Where weight applied to building attachment points exceeds 135kg, coordinate with
and obtain approval of Employer's Representative and utilize suitable auxiliary
channel or angle iron bridging between building structural steel elements to establish
fastening points. Bridging members shall be suitably welded or clamped to building
steel. Utilize threaded rods or bolts to attach to bridging members.
E. For items which are shown as being ceiling mounted at locations where fastening to
the building construction element above is not possible, provide suitable auxiliary
channel or angle iron bridging tying to the building structural elements.
3.11 PAINTING
A. All manufactured electrical equipment such as switchgear, control equipment, lighting

fixtures, etc., shall have factory-applied finish as specified in the appropriate article in
the Specifications.
B. All other uncoated steel items such as boxes, supports, hangers, rods, etc., shall be
galvanized or have a shop coat of paint applied under this Part of the Specification.
Normally, shop coats shall be an approved primer containing at least 50 percent rust
inhibitive pigment, applied before assembling the different parts.
C. Include painting and retouching of:-
1. Prefinished enclosures of switchgear, panelboards, switches, etc., where the

finish has been slightly damaged in transit before assembling the different
parts.
2. Any woodwork furnished in the Electrical Work.
3. Fitting hangers, except those received from manufacturers that are

prefinished.
4. Miscellaneous iron brackets and supports.
D. Woodwork installed under this Part of the Specification shall be finished with filler
sealer plus two (2) coats of polyurethane varnish.
SECTION 4-1
PAGE 16
3.12 PROHIBITED LABELS AND IDENTIFICATIONS
A. In all public areas, tenant areas and similar locations within the project, the inclusion
or installation of any item, element or assembly which bears on any exposed surface
any name, trademark, or other insignia which is intended to identify the
manufacturer, the vendor, or other source(s) from which such object has been
obtained, is prohibited. Also prohibited is the inclusion or installation of any article
which bears visible evidence that an insignia, name, label, or other device has been
removed.
3.13 WATERPROOFING
A. Avoid, if possible, the penetration of any waterproof membranes such as roofs,

machine room floors, basement walls, and the like. If such penetration is necessary,
perform it prior to the waterproofing and furnish all sleeves or pitch-pockets required.
Advise the Employer's Representative and obtain written permission before
penetrating any waterproof membrane, even where such penetration is shown in the
Drawings.
B. If walls or surfaces are penetrated after they have been waterproofed, restore the
waterproof integrity of that surface at Contractor's own expense and as directed by
the Employer's Representative.
3.14 CLEANING UP
A. Take care to avoid accumulation of debris, boxes, crates, etc., resulting from the
installation work. Remove from the premises promptly each day all debris, boxes,
etc., and keep the premises and work areas in broom-clean condition, subject to the
Employer's Representative's instructions.
B. Clean all fittings and equipment at the completion of the project.
C. All switchboards, panelboards, wireways, cabinets, enclosures, etc. to be thoroughly

vacuum cleaned prior to energizing equipment and at the completion of the project.
Equipment shall be opened for observation by the Employer's Representative as
required.
3.15 FIRE ACCESS TO FIRE APPARATUS
A. Do not obstruct access to hydrants and fire alarm boxes. In no case allow material
or equipment to be within 6 metres of a hydrant or fire alarm box.
3.16 PROGRESS OF WORK
A. The progress of work is to conform to the progress of the work of other trades. The
entire installation is to be completed as soon as the conditions of the building will
permit. Any cost resulting from the defective or ill-timed work performed under this
section is borne by the Contractor.
3.17 DATE OF COMPLETION AND TESTING OF SYSTEMS
A. Comply with the project construction schedule for the date of final performance and
acceptance testing, and be sufficiently in advance of the Contract completion date to
permit the execution of the testing prior to occupancy and the closeout of the
Contract. Complete any adjustments and/or alterations which the final acceptance
tests indicate as necessary for the proper functioning of all equipment prior to the
completion date. See individual sections for extent of testing required.
SECTION 4-1
PAGE 17
B. Provide a detailed schedule of completion indicating when each system is to be

completed and outlining when tests will be performed. Submit completion schedule
to the Employer's Representative and Employer for review within six (6) months after
the notice to proceed by the Employer or Employer's Representative has been given.
Update this schedule periodically as the project progresses.
3.18 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. Where indicated, provide the services of a factory trained specialist to supervise the
operation of all equipment specified herein and to instruct the Employer's operators.
The operating instruction period is defined as straight time working hours and not
including nights, weekends or travel time to and from the project. See individual
sections for additional instructions by manufacturer's trained specialists.
B. Notify the Employer in writing at least two (2) weeks before each operating instruction
period begins. Commence no instruction period until the Employer has issued his
written acceptance of the starting time. See the "Commissioning Manual" for the
specific requirements.
3.19 FINAL REVIEW
A. At a time designated by the Employer, the entire system will be reviewed for
compliance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. Be available at all times
during this review.
B. Demonstrate to the Employer and/or the Employer's Representative's prior to the

Final Review that all systems and all equipment are properly operating and are in
compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. After these
demonstration tests are satisfactorily completed, but prior to the Final Review field
visit, the Contractor will submit to the Employer's Representative a written
certification that:
1. Attests to the Contract Document compliance for this Project prior to the
Employer's Representative's Final Review field visit, and
2. Certifies that the equipment and materials installed in this project under this
Contract contain no asbestos or P.C.B.'s.
C. Operate the entire system properly with all systems balanced and all controls
adjusted.
D. Certificates and Documents required herein to be in order and presented to the

Employer's Representative at least two (2) weeks prior to the Final Review.
E. After the review, any changes or corrections noted as necessary for the work to
comply with these specifications and the Drawings to be accomplished without delay
in order to secure final acceptance of the work.
3.20 EARLY OCCUPANCY
A. Be responsible for completing those systems which are necessary to allow partial
occupancy of the buildings even if systems in the unoccupied areas are incomplete.
B. Verify requirements for temporary occupancy with the local authorities.
END OF SECTION 4-1

LIGHTING WIRING, POWER CABLING AND CONTROL WIRING
SECTION 4-2
PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
.1 To install, test and commission lighting wiring, power cabling and control wiring in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
.1 Wiring of lighting circuits.
.2 Cabling of power circuits.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Tender Stage
.1 Company's proven track record.
.2 Wiremen competency certificates.
.3 Technical data and products catalogues
.2 Construction Stage
.1 Construction drawings showing the circuitry and conduits, cable trays,

trunking and raceways layouts.
.2 Catalogues and samples of cables and accessories if requested by

.3 Site Installation
.1 Installation methods / Work method statements prior to installation work.
.2 Pre-commissioning test procedures prior to pre-commissioning testing.
.3 Pre-commissioning test records subsequent to testing.
.4 Inspection and Commissioning Test
.1 Site test reports prior to commissioning test.
.2 Commissioning test reports after testing.
.3 O&M manuals
.3 As-built AUTOCAD drawings.
.1 Standards To Comply
.1 Except as modified by the Contract Document, comply with the latest

applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following:
.1 Electricity Supply Regulations, Department of Electricity and Gas

Supply, Suruhanjaya Tenaga, Ministry Of Energy, Water and
Telecommunication.
SECTION 4-2
PAGE 2
.2 IEC 60364 – Low Voltage Electrical Installations of Buildings
.3 BS 7671 - Regulations for Electrical Installations (formerly IEE

Wiring Regulations 16th Edition).
.4 MS 136 & BS 6004 – For cable size 1.5mm2, 2.5mm2 &

4mm2 insulated cable used for final sub-circuit.
.2 Workmanship
.1 Contractor shall have a proven track record and the wiremen shall have
at least 10 years experience in wiring for commercial building and hold a
"Class A" Wiremen Certificate.
.2 PRODUCT
.1 General requirement
.1 Installation works shall conform to this specification and conform to the

best principle of modern installation practice and be carried out by fully
competent tradesmen of appropriate grade.
.2 The workmanship shall be of first grade quality and shall be complete for
satisfactory operation, control, maintenance and safety under all
conditions of services.
.2 Composite wiring diagrams
.1 The electrical Trade shall furnish all data and wiring diagrams for those
items of equipment where there is joint coordination and responsibility for
the wiring and interface between the Electrical Trade and the BSS and/or
BCS Contractors. Such items shall include but are not limited to the motor
starters, fire pump and controllers, domestic water pumping units,
terminal units, water chilling unit control panels, emergency generator,
transfer switches, fire alarm system (point location, point type
identification), etc. the data and wiring diagrams furnished to the BSS
and BCS Contractors shall indicate those terminals which have been
provided for the use of the BCS and BSS Contractor. The diagrams shall
first be submitted to the BSS Contractor who, upon completion of marking
up the drawings showing BSS interfaces and connections, shall forward
them to BCS Contractor.
.2 The BCS Contractor shall create a composite wiring diagram indicating

the control and/or monitoring of the motors, dampers, and other items of
equipment. The completed diagram shall include all line and low voltage
wiring between temperature control items, motor start/stop and/or hand-
off-auto stations, control relays, pumps, controllers, end switches, etc.
.3 Provide one composite drawing for each item of equipment indicating the
wiring in its entirety including interlocks. Any omissions or errors noticed
by the BCS Contractor shall be brought to the electrical trade and BSS
Contractor or relevant parties immediately.
.4 Identify each line (wire) termination by a termination number or symbol. In

addition, index each line (wire) termination to identify the termination
location of the other end of the line (wire).
SECTION 4-2
PAGE 3
.5 Include all internal wiring of panels (in detail) in the composite wiring
diagram. For such items as motor starters, etc. All jumpers added or
removed shall be clearly indicated as being “added” or “removed”.
.6 Include in the composite wiring diagrams a description of the interlock
sequence of operation. The description shall include complete
identification of each item shown (relay motor controller, etc.) and each
item’s exact operation shall be related to the interlock sequence.
.7 Complete the composite wiring diagrams and return the diagrams to the
Electrical trade who will verify that the composite wiring drawings are
correct. Any corrections required shall be made by the BCS Contractor.
.8 Provide composite wiring diagrams in a sturdy hard-cover loose-leaf

binder separate from other shop drawing submittals and documentations.
.3 Examination of documents
.1 Prior to starting, the contractor shall familiarize himself/herself with all

conditions affecting the proposed installation of equipment requiring
electrical connections. Failure to comply with the intent of this paragraph
shall in no way relieve the contractor of performing all necessary work
required for final electrical connections and equipment and the
coordination thereof.
.2 Connections shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations and approved shop/installation drawings and
installation methods.
.4 Cables used for wiring
.1 All cables used shall be of the appropriate grade complying with the
relevant standards e.g. MS 136, BS 6004 & BS 7671 and to the approval
of the latest electricity Supply Regulations, Suhanjaya Tenaga, Ministry of
energy, Water and Telecommunication.
.2 Cables shall be of PVC insulated cables, and where indicated XLPE

cables shall be used for power circuits. Cable sizes shall be as indicated
in the design drawing, or otherwise comply to BS 7671. They shall be
correctly coloured coded, black for neutral, green for earth, red-yellow-
blue for phase.
.3 Conductors shall be of adequate size and rating for the particular duties
and terminations.
.4 All cables shall be installed in one continuous length between the points
of connection and no joints of any description, other than those required
for terminating the cables, shall be allowed.
.5 All cables shall be multi-stranded type. It shall be minimum 7 strand.
.5 Method of wiring
.1 The wiring shall be drawn into the conduits after the conduits have been
completely fitted.
.2 The wiring system will be of the loop-in type and connections will only be
allowed in switches, lamp fittings, switched socket outlets.
.3 No connections will be allowed in conduit boxes.

SECTION 4-2
PAGE 4
.4 No exposed wiring are allowed unless otherwise indicated.
.5 The maximum numbers of PVC insulated cables drawn into any conduit
must comply with BS 7671.
.6 Wires shall be kept clear of auxiliary components. The method of clipping

shall be such as to prevent damage to the insulation. adhesive tape shall
not be used for clipping or looping of wires.
.7 A fixed two terminal connector block with an earth terminal adjacent or

integral shall be provided near the incoming cable entry of each
fluorescent fitting.
.8 Lighting and small power circuits shall be in conduit or on raceway.
.9 The lighting circuit and power circuit will have their own separate conduits
and raceways where applicable.
.10 Power wiring to motors shall be on trays. Cables on tray shall be

clamped. No cable straps are acceptable in this contract.
.11 Wiring to motors shall be tagged at bends and termination ends.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 TESTS
.1 Site Tests
Every installation shall be inspected and tested during erection and/or on

completion before being put into service. A report recording all the test
results shall be submitted to the Employer’s Representative.
.2 Visual Inspection
.1 Insulation of cables is not damaged.
.2 Check if the routing of cables are in safe zones or within

mechanical protection provided.
.3 Check for proper connection of conductors.
.4 Check that circuit, fuses, switches and terminals are labeled.
.5 Core identification of conductors.
.6 Presence of fire stopping material.
.7 Presence of separation between power cables and

communication cables.
.3 Continuity Test
.1 Continuity of protective conductors (including main and

supplementary bonding conductors).
.2 Continuity of ring final circuit conductors.

SECTION 4-2
PAGE 5
.4 Insulation Resistance Tests
Between phase/neutral and between phase/neutral against earth,

with the remaining phase/neutral earthed.
.5 Polarity and Phase Sequence Checks
3.2 TRAINING OF OPRATION AND MAINTENANCE STAFF
.1 Review O & M Documentation and Test Results.
3.3 HANDING-OVER AND EMPLOYER’S ACCEPTANCE
.1 Endorse defects list.
END OF SECTION 4-2

CONDUIT, ‘RACEWAY’ TRUNKING, CABLE TRAY AND CABLE LADDER
SECTION 4-3
PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
.1 Manufacture, test at works, deliver to site, install and commission of conduit,

'raceway' trunking, cable tray and cable ladder systems in accordance with the
Contract Document.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
.1 Rigid hot dip galvanised steel conduit.
.2 Rigid UPVC conduit.
.3 Flexible hot dip galvanised steel conduit.
.4 Waterproof flexible conduit.
.5 Hot dip galvanised steel 'raceway' trunking.
.6 Hot dip galvanised steel cable trays.
.7 Hot dip galvanised steel cable ladders.
.8 Conduit, 'raceway’ trunking, cable tray and cable ladder fittings and accessories.
.9 Outlets and junction boxes.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Tender Stage
.1 Technical data and product catalogues.
.1 Shop drawings/construction drawings.
.2 Samples of conduit, 'raceway' trunking, cable tray, cable ladder, fittings

and fixing accessories.
.3 Inspection and Acceptance Test
.1 Type test and routine test reports prior to acceptance tests.
.2 Acceptance test reports after tests.
.3 Packing, transportation and storage notes.
.4 Site Installation and Commissioning
.1 Installation methods.
.2 O&M manuals
.3 As-built Auto CAD drawings.

SECTION 4-3
PAGE 2
.1 Except as modified by the Contract Documents, comply with the latest applicable
provisions and latest recommendation of the following:-
.1 MS 275 Specification for Steel Conduits and Fittings with Metric

Threads of ISO Form for Electrical Installations.
.2 BS 31 Specification for Steel Conduit and Fittings for Electrical

Wiring.
.3 BS 476 Fire Tests on Building Materials and Structures. Pt. 4

Part 4 - Non-Combustibility Test for Materials.

Part 7 - Method for Classification of the Surface Spread of
Flame of Products.

Part 8 - Test Methods and Criteria for the Fire Resistance
of Elements of Building Construction.
.6 BS 729 Specification for Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings on Iron and

Steel Articles.
.7 BS 731 Flexible Steel Conduit & Adaptors for the Pt. 1 Protection
of Electric Cable.
.8 BS 3382 Specification for Electroplated Coatings on Pt. 1 Threaded

Components. Part 1 - Cadmium on Steel Components.
.9 BS 4568 Specification for Steel Conduit and Fittings with Metric

Threads of ISO Form for Electrical Installations.
.10 BS 4652 Specification for Metallic Zinc-rich Priming Paint (Organic

Media).
.11 BS 4678 Cable Trunking.
.12 BS 6099 Conduits for Electrical Installations.
.13 BS 6681 Specification for Malleable Cast Iron.
.14 BS 6946 Specification for Metal Channel Cable Support Systems

for Electrical Installations.
.15 BS 7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations.
.16 JIS G 3131 Hot Rolled Mild Steel Plates, Sheets and Strips.
.17 NEMA VE1 Cable Tray Systems.

SECTION 4-3
PAGE 3
2.0 PRODUCT
2.1 CONDUIT
.1 Conduit shall be concealed using rigid uPVC type where indicated in the tender
drawing. Surface run conduit may run on walls, ceilings, structure steel as may be
required. Surface mounted conduit will be run truly horizontal or truly vertical.
Where these requirements cannot be met conduit runs shall follow the buildings
lines.
.2 All surface run conduit shall be heavy gauge galvanized, class B, screwed steel
type complying to BS 31 or other relevant BS standards.
.3 All surface run conduit fittings and accessories shall be of the galvanized type or of
the equivalent quality proprietary fitting made of aluminium die casting.
Prefabricated conduit bends, elbows, draw boxes and etc. shall conform to the
relevant BS standards.
.4 The inner radius of any conduit bend shall be not less than 2.5 times the external
diameter of the conduit. Where conduit is to be bent, it must bent or set without
altering its section, using a suitable bending machine. No more than two 90 degree
bends will be installed in any conduit run without a draw in box.
.5 Draw in boxes shall be provided to give access to all conduits for the drawing in of
cables. The draw in boxes shall be approximately sized so as to allow neat
diversion of cables from one conduit to another without cramping. Cable joints are
not allowed in draw in boxes under any circumstances. Where conduit is to be
installed in point to point runs draw in boxes shall be installed in every 9m. no box
shall be installed so as to be inaccessible after completion of the structure or other
services.
.6 Conduit ends and terminations into conductive enclosures shall be fitted with brass
bushes to the relevant BS standards. Conduits terminating in non-conductive or
insulating enclosures may be fitted with an all insulated type plastic bush.
.7 Couplers shall have dimensions associated with the diameter ‘D’ of the conduit as
follows:-
i. Overall length ‘D’ + 12 mm nominal
ii. Diameter of flange ‘D’ + 12.7 mm nominal
iii. Thickness of flange 3.175 mm nominal
.8 Where it is not possible or practical to terminate a conduit at the supplied

enclosure or equipment a flexible conduit of an approved type and conforming to
the relevant regulations will link the fixed conduit and the enclosure or equipment.
Flexible conduit shall preferably be of metal hot-dip galvanized complying with BS
729 and manufactured to BS 731 part 1. The total maximum length of each flexible
conduit installation shall be limited to two meters.
.9 Flexible conduit adaptors shall be malleable cast iron, hot-dip galvanized

complying with BS 729 and shall be provided with external earthing lugs.
.10 The maximum number and size of the installed cable within a conduit will be such
that a space factor of 40% is not exceeded.
SECTION 4-3
PAGE 4
.11 All conduits shall be painted with etching primer and two coat of approved-type
colour paint.
2.2 STEEL TRUNKING
.1 Where it is found that several surface-run conduit cable runs are grouped together,
thereby utilizing extensive space on walls or steel structural works, the Contractor
may, with the Employer’s Representative approval, use steel trunking in lieu of
conduit for PVC cables runs.
2 The number of PVC cables to be installed in steel trunking shall be such that a
space factor of 45% is not exceeded. Under no circumstances shall circuit cables
from different distribution boards be run in the same trunking.
.3 The trunking shall be manufactured from hot-dipped galvanised, mild sheet steel
of 1.6mm for cross-section sizes of up to and including 300mm x 100mm for sizes
exceeding 300mm x 100mm, 2mm sheet steel shall be used.
.4 Steel trunking shall be supplied in standard length, with each length being provided
with a sleeve-type coupling and external earth bonding link of copper. All trunking
shall have a smooth interior with cover plates overlapping the sides of the trunking.
In general, the trunking shall be designed for exceptional strength and rigidly with
trunking length fitted with “butt-up” joints form the necessary runs. Suitable
adaptors shall be utilised for any change in cross section of trunking runs. All such
adaptors, bends, tee pieces and stop bends used in the trunking installation shall
be fabricated from the same materials as the trunking and fitted with sleeve-type
couplings at each trunking connection point.
.5 Earth link shall be provided between lengths of steel trunking to maintain electrical
continuity throughout the entire run. Earth links shall be copper tape with minimum
cross sectional area of 35 sq. mm and be fixed using screws, washers and lugs.
.6 Trunking may be suspended from the underside of floor slabs, on column or wall
supports or on floor mounted structure. All suspension supports and hangers shall
be galvanized, placed adequately for the trunking support on them. In any event,
the maximum support spacing shall not exceed that defined in Table 4D of the 16 th
edition of the IEE wiring regulations. No sagging of any trunking will be permitted.
All such suspension units, angle supports to or structures shall be treated with two
coats of an anti-corrosive paint and finished with two coats of approved-type paint
(colour to be notified later by the Employer’s Representative).
.7 Trunking lids shall be lipped and fixed at intervals not exceeding 1m by quick
release type cam fasteners.
.8 Where conduit is taped off trunking, suitable brass, smooth-type bushes shall be
fitted at all conduit terminations. The use of all insulated type, plastic, fibre or
bakelite bushes for this purpose shall not be permitted.
.9 Where vertical trunking runs pass through floors of the buildings, fibre-resisting
barriers with individual sleever mouldings (manufactured from “Mycalex” or other
non-trunking, inorganic insulating material of a mica and glass base approved by
the Jabatan Bomba Malaysia), shall be fitted in the trunking at individual floor
levels. All such fire barriers shall have a minimum fire rating of 3 hours.
.10 All trunking is to be finished with etching primer and two (2) coats of approved-type
colour enamel paint. For trunking concealed above ceiling space, a 50mm thick
colour band at 1m intervals is acceptable colour to be used for the various services
shall be confirmed later.
SECTION 4-3
PAGE 5
2.3 CABLE TRAYS
.1 Wherever cable trays are required for use in the contract works, the Contractor
shall supply and install perforated type galvanized trays complete with all
necessary bends, tee pieces and adaptors for changes in width of trays where
required. The trays shall be of heavy duty construction from at least 1.6 mm sheet
steel for trays to 300 mm in width and 2 mm sheet steel for trays in access of
300mm.
.2 All accessories including tee pieces, bends, intersections and other similar
accessories shall be purpose made by the tray manufacturer. Where on site
conditions dictate site fabrication, the standards of fabrication and finish will not be
less than that of manufacturers’ items and full details shall be shown on the
fabrication drawings.
.3 Cable trays may either be suspended from the underside of floor slabs or roof
structural work on column of wall supports, or installed on floor-mounted. All such
suspension units, angle supports to or structures shall be treated with two coats of
an anti-corrosive paint and finished with two coats of approved-type paint (colour to
be notified later by the Employer’s Representative).
.4 Cable-tray supports, hangers and structures shall be spaced adequately apart to

cater for the weights of the cables and tray supported on them. In no case shall
cable trays and cables be permitted to sag. The spacing shall not exceed 1.2m
and support shall be provided not more than 150mm from any bend, tee,
intersection or riser.
.5 In the event of a single layer of cable trays being insufficient to cater for the cables
to be laid thereon, the Contractor shall install two or more layers of cable trays on a
common set of hangers. The supports or structure shall be sufficient robust
construction to cater for the additional weights of the trays and cables.
.6 Fixing clips or cleats for cables on trays shall be installed by means of non-
corrosive metal screws (for bolts), washers and nuts.
.7 Cable trays shall be installed with the greater dimension in the horizontal plane
unless otherwise agreed with the Employer’s Representative.
.8 All cable tray systems shall be fully earth equipotential bonded throughout.
.9 Provision of cable tray telecommunication requirement shall be as indicated in the

tender drawing.
.10 The colour of paint applied shall comply to TMB’s requirement. For all other
services, colour coding shall be in the form of a 50mm wide band at 1m interval or
a minimum of one band per section. The colour to be used shall be confirmed
later.
SECTION 4-3
PAGE 6
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 TESTS
.1 Type Tests
.1 Type tests shall be carried out on conduits, fittings and components as

recommended in MS 275. This shall include: -
.1 Test for durability of markings
.2 Test of mechanical properties
.3 Test for resistance to corrosion
.4 Requirements for the efficiency of the conduit/fitting conducting path
.5 Test for malleable cast iron fittings
.2 Type tests shall be carried out on trunking as recommended in BS 4678.

This shall include:-
.1 Test for durability of markings
.2 Test for knockouts
.3 Test for resistance to corrosion
.4 Electrical continuity test
.3 Cable trays and ladders shall be type-tested to NEMA VE1 standard as

follows:-
.1 VE 1-3.01 Destruction load test
.2 VE 1-3.02 Deflection test
.3 VE 1-3.03 Electrical continuity of connections
.4 Provide complete type test reports
.2 Acceptance Tests at Manufacturer’s Works
.1 Conduits, ‘raceway’ trunkings, cable trays, cable ladders, their fittings and
accessories and fire resisting trunking shall be subjected to the following:-
.1 Visual inspection
.1 Correct types of conduits, trunkings, trays and ladders
.2 Correct markings
.3 Dimension checks
.4 Damage on conduits, trunkings, trays and ladders
.5 Damage on galvanising
SECTION 4-3
PAGE 7
.6 Material and accessories are proprietary type
.2 Inspection and testing of galvanising for compliance with BS 729
.1 Determination of coating weight
.2 Uniformity of coating
.3 Deflection tests
.4 Electrical continuity of connection tests

.2 Provide complete acceptance test reports
.3 Inspection and Testing at Site
.1 Upon delivery to site, check the condition as follows:-
.1 Damage on conduits, trunkings, cable trays, ladders and their

fittings.
.2 Damage on galvanising.
.3 Material and accessories are proprietary type.
.4 No fabrication at site.
.5 Store indoor.
.2 Repair/replacement of damaged products and renovation of damaged

galvanised coating areas.
.3 At completion of installation, visual inspection and verification of:-
.1 Correctness of location and mounting
.2 Labelling and markings
.3 Damage on conduits, trunkings, cable trays, ladders and fittings

.4 Damage on galvanising
.5 Earthing of metal conduit, trays and ladder system
.4 At completion of installation, carry out electrical continuity test to the

manufacturer's recommendation.
3.2 PACKING FOR TRANSPORT AND HANDLING
.1 Conduits, trunkings, trays, ladders, fittings and accessories shall be separately

packed and delivered in approximately labelled packing in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. All articles shall be securely packed to prevent
any movement and damage during transport. To avoid wet storage staining,
transportation of galvanised articles shall avoid damp and/or badly ventilated
conditions.
.2 Manufacturer shall provide information for unpacking and safe handling of articles.
.3 On arrival at site, the consignment shall be checked against the delivery notes.
3.3 STORAGE
SECTION 4-3
PAGE 8
.1 On delivery to site, the products shall be stored indoor, in a clean, dry and well
ventilated place. Galvanised articles shall not be stored on clinkers or ashes.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT, TRUNKING, TRAY AND LADDER
.1 General
.1 Rigid conduits, trunking, trays and ladders shall be run truly vertical,
horizontal or parallel with the features of the building and in accordance
with BS 7671. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the
routing with other specification Divisions.
.2 Galvanised coating damaged by excessively rough treatment during transit

and erection shall be renovated using at least two coats of good quality
zinc-rich paint complying to BS 4652.
.3 The maximum size of damaged area for which such repairs are
acceptable shall be in compliance with BS 729 Appendix D.
.2 Conduit and Installation
.1 Conduits shall be concealed where possible by laying in the concrete slabs

or screeds of floors or chases in walls which are to be plastered or
panelled, or in ceiling voids or in concrete or services ducts.
.2 Conduits buried in concrete shall be securely fixed to prevent

displacement and shall have 40mm depth of cover over its entire length.
Conduits buried in plaster shall be securely fixed and shall have 6mm
depth of cover over its entire length.
.3 Conduits shall not be laid across expansion joints and where these occur
in the run of a line of conduits, the conduits shall be brought below the
expansion joint and a length of flexible conduit installed, sufficient to allow
for a total movement of +/-10mm.
.4 Where conduits buried in concrete crosses the expansion joint in the

concrete it shall be wrapped with waterproof building paper or half lapped
PVC self adhesive tape for a distance of 300mm on each side of the
joints.
.5 Conduits shall be bent or cut on site to suit local conditions. Normal bends
may be used with conduit 38mm diameter and above. The cut section
shall be renovated using at least two coats of good quality zinc-rich paint
complying with BS 4652.
.6 Inspection type elbows, bends or tees shall only be used with the written
consent of the Employer's Representative.
.7 A draw-in box shall be provided in all conduit runs exceeding 15m in

length or containing more than two right angle bends or the equivalent.
SECTION 4-3
PAGE 9
.8 Conduits shall be supported at regular intervals not exceeding 1200mm on

horizontal runs and 1500mm on vertical runs.
.9 Conduit boxes shall be fixed to the structure of the building independently

of the conduits.
.10 The length of thread on the ends of the conduits shall suit the length of
internal thread in the end of the fitting accessory. Excess length of thread
shall not be permitted.
.11 Spanners or purpose made tools shall be used to tighten hexagonal

bushes. Pliers and toothed wrenches shall not be used.
.12 Conduits shall be so arranged that it is impossible for water to lodge at any
point. Where this is not practical drain holes 3mm diameter shall be drilled
at the lowest points in the conduit runs or boxes.
.13 Conduit runs on the surfaces of buildings or ducts shall be fixed by means
of saddles and painted orange in colour, unless otherwise specified.
.14 Three piece conduit unions should be used. At the discretion of the
Employer's Representative, running couplings with hexagonal locknuts
may be used, the exposed threads being given a coat of zinc paint.
.15 Conduit terminating at boxes, trunking or accessories not provided with

spout or tapped entries shall be made mechanically by means of a flanged
coupler and bush with male thread. Exposed conduit threads shall be
given a coat of zinc paint.
.16 All free ends of conduits shall be fitted with approved bushes.
.17 Conduits to all motors, with drawable or removable items of equipment,

and all items of equipment where vibration may reasonably be expected,
shall be of flexible type.
.18 The ends of flexible conduits shall be connected to the fixed conduit
system and the equipment by means of approved adaptors. A stranded
copper earth wire of section complying with BS 7671 shall be run internally
between motor and starter and connected in an approved manner.
.3 Trunking Installation
.1 Trunking shall be run neatly on the surface of the building and at least
150mm clear of plumbing and mechanical services.
.2 Manufacturer's standard fittings shall be used. Trunking joiners shall be

used to connect trunking to each other. They shall be fixed by flathead
screws without drilling of holes.
.3 The practice of cutting and bending the material of the trunking to form
attachments shall not be accepted.
.4 Connections between trunking and apparatus shall be by a screwed

coupler and bush or a standard flanged coupling or an adaptor neck,
fabricated or cast. Direct attachment of trunking to apparatus will only be
permitted if cable entries are provided with smooth bore bushes or
grommets and the return edge of the lid of the trunking is left intact.
SECTION 4-3
PAGE 10
.5 Conduit connectors shall be used to connect conduits to the trunking.

Holes shall not be punched or drilled into the trunking for conduit
connection.
.6 Trunking supported by hangers shall be provided with a proprietary-make

hanger system.
.4 Cable Tray and Cable Ladder Installation
.1 Cable trays and cable ladders shall not be cut at site. Instead, they shall
be supplied in different lengths from the factory for assembly at site.
.2 Splice connector plates shall be located according to manufacturer's

recommendation. Where necessary the trays or ladders shall be cut at
site to suit splice locations.
.3 The splice connector plates shall be located outside of tray side rails. The
adjacent tray or ladder sections shall be bolted using nuts and washers, on
the outer side of the tray. The torque nuts used shall be to manufacturer's
specified value.
.4 Expansion splices shall be positioned properly with the connector

fasteners securely locked to permit the tray or ladder to expand and
contract freely.
.5 Trays and ladders shall be securely anchored to supports. They shall be

secured such that the tray or ladder system will not move during cable
installation.
.6 Holes shall be punched or drilled in the side rails or troughs only as

needed for splicing of sections cut at site.
.7 Where cables are to be installed across dividers, divider strip protectors

shall be installed. Where cables are to pass over the tray edge, a sheath
edge with compassable material similar to the cable sheath shall be
installed.
.8 Holes for attachment of conduit to blind end-plates shall be punched at site.
.9 All trays damaged during installation or cable pulling shall be restored to

new condition or replaced.
.10 Cable trays and ladders shall be installed below ductwork, piping, conduit
or other obstructions. The minimum clearance from the top of the tray side
rails shall be 300mm.
.11 The side of the cable tray facing the wall shall have a clearance as per
manufacturer's recommendation. The other side of the cable tray shall
have a minimum clearance of 100 mm.
.12 Bends, elbow, hinged splices, etc. shall be proprietary and shall not be
fabricated at site.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF CABLE TRAY AND CABLE LADDER SUPPORTS
.1 Horizontal and vertical supports shall provide at least 30mm bearing length from
each rail and shall have provisions for hold-down clamps and fasteners.
SECTION 4-3
PAGE 11
.2 The side rail shall bear on the support. Where necessary, shims shall be used to
elevate the trays or ladders and provide bottom clearance to the supports. The
trays or ladders shall not bear on the support.
.3 Vertical straight lengths shall be supported by wall mounted supported brackets at

intervals as dictated by building structure but this shall not exceed 1 metre.
.4 Horizontal trays and ladders shall be supported by either wall mounted support
brackets or hanger rod system. The intervals between support shall be as
recommended by the manufacturer but this shall not exceed 1 metre for wall
mounted support brackets and 2 metres for hanger rod system.
.5 The hanger rods shall be positioned and installed according to the manufacturer's
recommendation. The selection of the rod size shall be determined based on the
total loading of the support system.
.6 Sloping trays and ladders shall be supported at intervals not exceeding those used
for the horizontal trays and ladders of the same design.
.7 Cable tray supports shall be installed at each cable-drop-out.
.8 Cables shall be supported by proprietary cable clamps on the cable tray. Cable
straps are not acceptable in this Contract.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF CABLE TRAY AND LADDER SPLICE CONNECTORS
.1 Splice connectors shall be located as recommended by the manufacturer.
.2 Splice connectors shall be attached by round head bolts with nuts and washers
located on the outside of the tray or ladder.
.3 Thermal expansion splices shall be installed wherever expansion joints occur.
.4 Where space constraint demands, reducer plates shall be required. The structural
straight and deflection of the tray shall be mentioned using a supplementary
permanent framing.
.5 Installation of fire resisting trunking shall be to manufacturer’s recommendation.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF CABLE EXITS FROM CABLE TRAY AND LADDER
.1 Conduits shall be attached to the side rail with conduit clamps and brackets. Holes
shall not be made in side rail for conduit attachment.
.2 The minimum bending radius of cables exit from trays or ladders shall be
maintained using drop-out plates, vertical riser elbow fittings, or other accessories
designed to control bending.
.3 Cable tray and ladders edges and flanges at locations of cable exit from trays shall
be suitably sheathed to prevent injury to cable insulation.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF CABLE TRAY AND LADDER DIVIDER STRIPS
.1 These divider strips shall be installed where different system wiring is installed in a
common tray or where shown in the design drawings.
.2 Divider strips shall be anchored to every ladder rung using fasteners which
attach to the tray without the need for drilling or punching at site.
SECTION 4-3
PAGE 12
.3 The fastener shall attach to the tray without the need for any drilling or punching of
hole at site. The fasteners shall also present minimum exposure to the cables by
having rounded exposed parts.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF FIRE BARRIERS AND FIRE PROOF ENCLOSURE
.1 Fire stop seals shall be provided where cable raceways, trays or ladders pass
through floors or walls.
.2 Fire stop installation shall be as specified in Section 16190: FIRESTOPS.
.3 The side panels of these trunking shall be removable for ease of installation and
maintenance.
.4 Installation of fire resisting trunking shall be to manufacturer's recommendation.
3.10 EARTHING
.1 All cable trays, ladders and interconnecting trunking and conduit shall be earthed
as per BS 7671.
.2 Flat braided conductor strips shall be used to electrically interconnect joined

sections of the cable trunking, cable tray and cable ladder system. The resistance
measured between adjacent sections shall not exceed 0.00033 Ohms.
3.11 TRAINING OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE STAFF
.1 Review O&M documentation and test results.
.2 Review spare parts list.
.2 Initiate certificate of readiness for handing-over.
END OF SECTION 4-3

BUSBAR TRUNKING SYSTEMS (BUSWAYS)
SECTION 4-4
PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
.1 Manufacture, test at works, deliver to site, install and commission low

voltage busbar trunking system (busways).
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
.1 Busbar trunking system.
.2 Plug-in tap-off units.
.3 Joints/expansion units.
.4 Elbows.
.5 Hangers and steel supports.
.6 Cable end tap boxes.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Tender Stage
.1 Technical data and product catalogues
.2 Full type test certificates of busways to ASTA, UL, KEMA and

other internationally recognised independent testing laboratories.
In case where busbar trunking system are manufactured under
license from the Principal Company, a valid letter shall be
produced by the Principal Company to guarantee that the products
manufactured by the licensee shall be equivalent in all respect to
the type tested standard products.
.1 To repeat the above tender stage submission.
.2 Catalogues and samples of busbar trunking system.
.3 Dimensioned drawings (plans, sections elevations and internal

views)
.4 Isometric layout and routing diagrams identifying phase

configuration along route and at termination.
.5 Component arrangements.
.6 Electrical characteristics: DC resistance, AC resistance, reactance

and impedance, voltage drop charts for various power factors.
SECTION 4-4
PAGE 2
.7 Construction drawings.
.8 Recommended torque and resistance values of joints.
.9 Nameplate information.
.10 Full load heat rejection in Btu per hour per metre length of busway
and tap-off units etc.
.11 Data on supports/hangers, metal thickness, surface finish,

provisions for lifting and foundations etc.
.12 Earth connections.
.1 Type test and routine test reports prior to acceptance tests
.2 Acceptance test reports after tests
.3 Packaging, transportation and storage notes
.1 Installation methods/Work method statements prior to installation

work.
.2 Pre-commissioning test procedures prior to pre-commissioning

testing.
.3 Pre-commissioning test records subsequent to testing
.1 Site test reports prior to commissioning test
.2 commissioning test reports after testing
.3 O&M manuals
.4 As-built AutoCAD drawings
.1 Except as modified by the Contract Documents, comply with the latest

applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following:-
.1 IEC 60439-1 Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear

Assemblies Part 1 - Requirements for Type-
Tested and Partially Type-Tested Assemblies
SECTION 4-4
PAGE 3

Assemblies Part 2 - Particular Requirements for
Busbar Trunking System (Busways)
.3 IEC 60529 Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures

(IP Code)
.4 BS EN ISO Hot Dip Galvanised Coatings Fabricated Iron

and 1461:1999 Steel Articles. Specifications
and Test Methods.
.5 BS EN 13601 Copper and Copper Allloys. Copper Road, Bar

and : 2002 Wire for General Electrical Purposes
.6 BS 7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations
.2 Manufacturer shall have at least 10 years experience in the manufacture

of similar equipment.
.3 Manufacturer shall have full parts back-up and normal service availability
for equipment provided.
2.0 PRODUCT
2.1 GENERAL
.1 The busbar trunking shall be designed and constructed for use with 415
Volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz system.
.2 The system shall be fitted with an integral earthing bar outside the
enclosure.
.3 The busbar trunking shall be of proprietary manufacture and shall be of

the metalclad, fully insulated, sandwiched design type.
.4 The busbar trunking shall conform to IEC 60439-2 / BS 5486.
2.2 SHORT CIRCUIT RATING AND TYPE TESTS
.1 The short circuit rating shall be the ultimate anticipated short circuit
current available at the source.
.2 The short circuit rating of the busway shall be determined according to

IEC 60439-1 and 60439-2. This rating must be based upon actual tests at
the rated short-circuit current for six (6) cycles. The short time withstand
current for 1 second shall be certified by ASTA, UL, TUV or similar other
internationally recognised testing authority.
.3 The full test requirement shall be performed.

SECTION 4-4
PAGE 4
2.3 BASIC CONSTRUCTION
.1 Housing
.1 The enclosure of the busbar trunking system shall be rigidly

constructed from electro galvanized sheet steel of not less than
1.6mm thick and coated with epoxy powder paint.
.2 The busbar trunking system shall be of the totally enclosed type

with degree of protection not less than IP42 or IEC 60529 for
indoor installation.
.3 The busbar trunking system shall designed and constructed for

mounting flat in the horizontal plane or edgewise in the vertical
plane.
.4 Fixings may be at any point in the run.
.5 Fixing points shall ensure that there are no unsupported spans in

excess of 2 metre. The Contractor shall be required to submit
technical calculation to justify the structural integrity of the support
requirement on busduct, as recommended by the manufacturer.
.6 The number of fixing points shall be in accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendations.
.7 Where the busbar trunking crosses a building expansion joint a

suitable expansion jointing system shall be provided so as to
ensure that there are no undue stresses placed upon the system.
.8 The busway housing shall be adequately earthed.
.2 Busbars
.1 There shall be three (3) of equal for phase and 100% of the
phase conductor size for neutral busbar and they shall comply
with BS EN 13601:2002, unless otherwise specified.
.2 The busbars shall be of full round edge rectangular section and

shall be of hard drawn high conductivity.
.3 Each busbar shall be sheathed over its length with insulation of

Class B, 130 Degrees Celsius rated insulating material. The
temperature rise at any point along the bus shall not exceed
550Degree Celsius above the ambient temperature of 40 degree
Celsius when operating at its 100% rated current.
.4 Tin-electroplating shall be achieved at all joints and contact

surfaces.
.5 Busbar section of feeder type and plug-in type shall be provided at

the necessary tap-offs.
SECTION 4-4
PAGE 5
.6 Insulated, anti-tracking supports for the busbar shall be provided

at regular intervals. These supports shall be suitable for the
trunking to be used in any position.
.7 The supports shall be capable of holding the vertical forces

imposed by the busbars when the busbar trunking system is used
in a vertical position.
.8 Joints in the busbar trunking system shall be of removable type

with high tensile strength electro-plated bolts that can be checked
for tightness without de-energizing the system.
.9 Expansion joints, where required, shall be of proprietary design

and may only be used with the approval of Employer’s
Representative.
.10 Integral earth bar (non-insulated) of half size phase busbars shall
be provided outside the busbar trunking enclosure.
.11 No copper tape shall be used as integral earth bar.
.3 Joint
.1 The busway joint shall be of the minimum one bolt type with
torque indicating mechanism.
.2 Joint bolts shall not be used for busbar jointing but to clamp
busbars at between lengths and tightened to the strength figure as
recommend by the manufacturer by means of a torque wrench.
.3 It shall be possible to make up a joint from one side in the event

the busway is installed against a wall or ceiling.
.4 The joint shall be designed as to allow removal of any length

without disturbing other lengths.
.5 Each joint shall secure a maximum contact area of clamping at

between the busway length.
.6 The joint shall be of double-headed design so as to indicate

proper torque has been applied.
.7 The joint shall be covered up by metal cover plates of same type

of material and finish as the housing so that the degree of
protection against ingress of dust will not be less than the housing.
.4 Accessories
.1 Any changes of direction shall be made using purpose made

accessories manufactured by the system manufacturer.
SECTION 4-4
PAGE 6
.2 Where termination occurs in a busway run an end cover purpose

made by the manufacturer shall be used.
.3 Incoming units shall be provided for connecting the supply

conductors directly to the busbars of the busway system.
.4 Flexible braided copper conductor manufactured by the system

manufacturer shall be used for connection to power transformer to
prevent loosening of bolts-and-nuts and screws due to vibration
caused by the transformer during operation.
.5 Tap-off Openings
.1 There shall be tap-off openings spaced 500 mm apart on one side

of the trunking for insertion of tap-off units. In 3 metre straight
length, a minimum of three tap-off openings shall be provided
There shall be at least one spare tap-off opening in addition to the
used tap-off openings for each floor. It shall be possible to
accommodate tap-off units on all openings at any one time. The
tap-off openings shall be so designed to prevent improper
installation of tap-off units. Each opening shall be provided with
locked shutters or covers to prevent entry to the busbars when the
opening is not occupied by a tap-off unit. The degree of protection
when the shutters are opened shall be at least IP20
.2 In vertical risers, tap-off units shall be consistently located at the

same height above the floor at every floor level to achieve a
uniform layout arrangement.
.6 Tap-off units
.1 Tap-off units shall be standard proprietary design made from

electro galvanised sheet steel of at least 1.6mm thick. They shall
be factory-fabricated and assembled. Depending on application,
they shall be suitable for housing moulded-case circuit breakers.
Moulded-case circuit breakers shall have low let-through energy in
clearing a short circuit. Current-limiting magnetic trip shall be
provided. The degree of protection shall be IP42 with the cover
closed and at least IP20 when the cover is open.
.2 All tap-off units shall be designed and constructed so that their

insertion into live busbars shall not expose current carrying parts
during insertion. The design shall be such that they can only be
inserted in the correct polarity. For safety, mechanical interlocks
shall be provided such that :-
.1 The unit cannot be inserted or withdrawn when the MCCB

is in the ‘ON’ position.
.2 Cover cannot open when in the ‘ON’ position.
.3 Cannot switch ‘ON’, when the cover is opened.

SECTION 4-4
PAGE 7
.3 The operating mechanism shall be designed for quick-break and

such that :-
.1 Earth contact shall make before the live contacts are

made
.2 Live contacts shall break before the earth contact is broken
.4 Means of padlocking shall be provided for :-
.1 The front cover.
.2 Operating handle in the ‘OFF’ position.
.5 Tap-off units shall allow for cable entry at all sides. Earth
connection shall be provided such that effective earth continuity is
ensured from the main busbar trunking to the armored of power
cables. Proper glands suitable for the cables to be terminated
shall be provided.
.7 Installation
.1 The busbar trunking system shall be installed so that the

maximum unsupported span is less than 2.0 meter.
.2 All fixing supports, brackets and suspension stirrups shall be

propose made by the manufacturer of the trunking. The
Contractor shall be required to submit technical calculation to
justify the structural integrity of the support requirement on
busduct, as recommended by the manufacturer.
.3 The busbar trunking shall not be used to support other equipment

or services.
.4 No cables shall be installed in the busbar trunking.
.5 The method of jointing the trunking and of fitting accessories shall

use only purpose made parts and they shall be used strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
.6 Where the busbar trunking passes through any fire barrier, wall
floors or ceilings, fire resistant barriers shall be fitted in the
trunking and the hole surrounding the trunking shall be made good
with fire resisting material to its full thickness.
.7 Where used for vertical runs, spring loaded supports and guide
brackets shall be fitted.
.8 All incoming and outgoing conductors shall be supported to avoid

mechanical loads being imposed on the busbar trunking system.
SECTION 4-4
PAGE 8
.9 The busbar trunking shall also be laterally braced to avoid any

sway caused by horizontal forces, howsoever applied.
.10 Busbar trunking support shall not be used by other cable trunking,
tray and ladder as a mean of support.
.8 Termination Accessories
.1 All cables earthing or leaving terminal boxes shall be provided with

separate terminations so that any cable out of a number of such
cables can be removed or replaced without disturbing the
remainder. They should be identified using ferrules.
.2 All glands shall be fitted with an earth bond terminal attachment.
.3 All cable lugs of the compression type shall be provided as per

manufacturer’s recommendation.
.4 Labels shall be provided to identify all items of equipment, circuits

and cables. Labels on the exterior of equipment shall be made of
a corrosion-resistant material. All busbars shall be provided with
permanent phase markings. No tapes are allowed.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 For horizontal runs, coordinate with other specification. Divisions for

location and installation of hangers and supports. Provide any AC power
supply required.
.2 Position and fix supports securely according to manufacturer’s

recommendations. All busbar trunkings shall be installed level and plumb.
.3 When jointing, ensure that the joint surfaces are clean before tightening
bolts with adequate torque. Provide permanent phase identification on
exterior of the enclosure matching the busbar phase identification.
.4 Complete and check on tap-off units and power cabling prior to pre-
commissioning.
.5 Replace all covers and carry out pre-commissioning checks.
.6 All installation procedures shall follow manufacturer’s recommendation.
.7 Records shall be kept of installation works and submitted to the

Employer’s Representative.
SECTION 4-4
PAGE 9
3.2 PACKING, TRANSPORT, HANDLING, DELIVERY AND STORAGE AT SITE
.1 The various components of the busbar trunking shall be packed and

delivered separately labeled in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations for easy identification at site. They shall be securely
packed to prevent any movement and damage during transport and
against tropical climatic conditions encountered during shipment and
storage.
.2 Manufacturer shall provide information for unpacking and lifting safely.
.3 On arrival at site, the consignment shall be checked against the delivery

notes.
.4 On delivery to site, they shall be stored indoor in a clean, dry and

ventilated place to prevent moisture condensation and consequent
damage and mal-operation.
3.3 TESTS
.1 Type Tests
.1 Type tests shall be carried out in accordance with IEC 439.

Certificates issued by approved independent testing laboratories
shall be submitted to the Employer's Representative.
.2 Routine Tests
.1 Before despatch from the works, the manufacturer shall carry out
routine tests in accordance with IEC 439 and the results shall be
recorded in a test report.
.3 Acceptance Tests at Manufacturer's Works
.1 The busways shall be visually inspected for technical execution

and conformity with the latest issue of the approved drawings and
with the order. Spot checks shall be made to verify:-
.1 Dimensions
.2 The degree of protection of the enclosure
.3 The effectiveness and reliability of shutters
.4 The effectiveness and reliability of operating mechanisms,

locks and interlock systems
.5 The insulation of the busbar system
.6 Creepage distances and clearances
.7 Proper mounting of components

SECTION 4-4
PAGE 10
.8 Internal connections
.9 The suitability of clamping, earthing and terminating

arrangements
.10 Correct labelling
.11 Completeness of the data on the nameplate
.12 The availability of the earthing points for connection
.2 Dielectric test shall be carried out with 2.0kV rms. for 1 minute.
.3 Testing of the mechanical and electrical operation of a number of

functional units on a random basis.
.4 Site Tests
.1 At the completion of installation, each busbar trunking system

shall be field tested. A report recording each item of the testing
shall be certified and submitted to the Employer's Representative.
.1 Verification of torque for all nuts and bolts on busways to

.2 Observation of routing.
.3 Safety shutters.
.4 Functional units, operating mechanisms, locks and

interlock systems.
.5 Mounting of components.
.6 Internal connections.
.7 Clamping, earthing and terminating arrangement.
.8 Labelling, nameplate and phase markings.
.9 Earthing system.
.3 Power frequency withstand voltage test.
.4 Special Test
Site determination of total busbar trunking resistance, reactances,

impedance and power losses in accordance with IEC 60439-2.
SECTION 4-4
PAGE 11
.5 Mechanical Operation Test
.1 Operation of each disconnecting means.
.2 Operation of all interlocks.
.1 Provide training schedule and agenda and list of instructors from original
equipment manufacturer (OEM) and the trades contractor.
.2 Provide classroom training.
.3 Provide field training with demonstration on operation and maintenance.
.4 Review O&M Documentation and Test Results.
END OF SECTION 4-4

PVC SHEATHED CABLES
(NON-FIRE RESISTANT AND FIRE RESISTANT)
SECTION 4-5
PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
.1 Manufacture, test at Works, deliver to site, install, test and commission the
following for low voltage cables in accordance with the Contract Documents.-
.1 600/1000V fire-resistance mineral-insulated and low smoke halogen free

(LSH) cables.
.2 600/1000V XLPE/AWA/PVC cables
.3 600/1000V XLPE/SWA/PVC cables.
.4 600/1000V PVC/AWA/PVC cables.
.5 600/1000V PVC/SWA/PVC cables.
.6 600/1000V PVC/PVC cables.
.7 600/1000V PVC cables.
.8 600/1000V XLPE/PVC cables.
.9 450/750V PVC cables
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
.1 Single-core 600/1000V fire resistant mineral-insulated and low smoke halogen

free (LSH) cables.
.2 Single-core 600/1000V XLPE/AWA/PVC cables.
.3 Multi-core 600/1000V XLPE/SWA/PVC cables.
.4 Single-core 600/1000V PVC/AWA/PVC cables.
.5 Multi-core 600/1000V PVC/SWA/PVC cables.
.6 Single-core 600/1000V PVC/PVC cables.
.7 Multi-core 600/1000V PVC/PVC cables.
.8 Single-core 600/1000V PVC Cables
.9 Multi-core 600/1000V PVC cables
.10 Single-core 600/1000V XLPV/PVC cables
.11 Multi-core 600/1000V XLPE/PVC cables
.12 Single core 450/750V PVC cables
.13 Connectors and Terminations

PVC SHEATHED CABLES
SECTION 4-5
PAGE 2
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Tender stage
.1 Manufacturer's catalog, and specifications for cable and terminations.
.2 Letter of approval from Jabatan Bomba dan Penyelamat Malaysia for fire
resistant cables.
.3 Where appropriate, for imported cables, letter of approval from

Suruhanjaya Tenaga for importation of cable.
.4 Type test certificates on fire resistance and halogen free content from
internationally recognised independent testing authority.
.2 Construction drawings of cables and terminations.
.3 Cable rating tables, temperature, group derating factors, DC and AC

resistance, reactance, weight, dimensions, minimum bending radius and
etc.
.1 Type test and routine test reports prior to acceptance test.
.2 Acceptance test reports after test.
.3 Packaging, transportation and storage notes.
.1 Installation methods/work method statements prior to installation Works.
.2 Commissioning test reports after testing
.3 O&M manuals

PVC SHEATHED CABLES
SECTION 4-5
PAGE 3
.1 Standards to Comply
Except as modified by the Contract Documents, comply with the latest applicable
provisions and latest recommendations of the following:
.1 IEC 60228 Conductors of Insulated Cables
.2 IEC 60287 Calculation of the Continuous Current Rating
.3 IEC 60331 Tests of Electric Cables Under Fire Conditions
.4 IEC 60332 Tests of Electric Cables Under Fire Conditions
.5 IEC 60446 Identification of Conductors by Colours or Numerals
.6 IEC 60502 Power Cable with Extruded Insulation and their

Accessories for Rated Voltages from 1kV up to 30kV.
.7 IEC 60754 Test on Gases Evolved During Combustion of

Electric Cables
.8 IEC 60811 Common Test Methods for Insulating and Sheathing

Materials of Electrical Cables.
.10 IEC 60885 Electrical Test Methods for Electric Cables.
.11 IEC 61034 Specification for PVC insulated cables (non-

armoured) for electric power and lighting.
.12 BS 6004 Specification for PVC insulated cables (non-

armoured) for electric power and lighting
.13 BS 6346 Requirements for Electrical Installations.
.14 BS 6004 Specification for PVC insulated cables (non-

.15 BS 6346 Electrical Cable, PVC Insulated, Armoured Cables

for Voltages of 600/1000V and 1900/3300V
.16 BS 6387 Specification for Performance Requirements for

Cables Required to Maintain Circuit Integrity Under
Fire Conditions.
.17 BS 7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations
.18 BS 7846 Electrical Cables 600/1000V Armoured Fire

Resistant Cables having Thermosetting Insulation
and Low Emission of Smoke and Corrosive Gases
when Affected by Fire
.19 BS EN 10244 Steel Wire and Wire Products. Non-ferrous Metallic–

2 : 2001 Coatings on Steel Wire. Zinc or Zinc Alloy
Coatings
PVC SHEATHED CABLES
SECTION 4-5
PAGE 4
.20 BS EN 10257 Zinc or Zinc Alloy Coated Non-Alloy Steel Wire for
Arranging either Power Cables or
Telecommunication Cables. Land Cables.
.21 MS 136 Specification for PVC-insulated cables (non-

.22 MS 274 PVC Insulated Cables for Electricity Supply
.2 Manufacturing Experience

of 600/1000V cables of similar construction.
2.0 PRODUCT
.1 600/1000V Non fire resistant cables
.1 All cables for the internal wiring distribution of the building, including the external
underground cable distribution submains, shall be supplied and installed by the
Contractor.
.2 External cable shall be of the multi-core XLPE/SWA/PVC and/or PVC/SWA/PVC

as detailed in the tender drawings. All electric cables supplied by the Contractor
for the Contract works shall be provided with high-conductivity, multiple stranded
annealed copper conductors
.3 The insulation shall be XLPE compound complying with IEC 60502 or PVC
compound complying with MS 274 with the insulation thickness complying with
the above Standards.
.4 Core identification for power cable shall be made by means of a coloured

insulation. The 3-core and 4-core cables shall be coloured red-yellow-blue and
red-yellow-blue-black, respectively. For control cables, the core identification shall
comply with MS 274.
.5 For multi-core cable, an inner covering of suitable material is to be extruded over

the laid-up cores with the interstices substantially filled up by the either PVC, PE
or XLPE fillers so that the complete assembly is formed into a circular shape. The
direction of the cores shall be right handed. A binder tape shall be applied over
the circular assembly.
.6 For control cables having more than seven (7) cores, the direction of lay shall
alternate for each successive layer.
.7 For multi-core cable, sheath or bedding shall be applied over the laid up cores. It
shall be compatible with the operating temperature of the cable and the thickness
shall comply with IEC 60502.
.8 Metallic Armour (where specified) shall consist of hot or cold rolled commercial
quality, galvanized steel tested in wires compliance with BS EN 10244-2:2001.
For single core cable, non-magnetic material e.g. aluminium shall be used. The
armour shall be able to withstand the normal electromechanical stresses
expected in cable installation and during services.
PVC SHEATHED CABLES
SECTION 4-5
PAGE 5
.9 The cable shall be provided with an extruded, continuous black PVC compound
outer sheath treated with repellant and shall be compatible with the operating
temperature of the cable. The thickness of the outer sheath shall comply with IEC
60502.
.10 The outer sheath of large cables shall be impressed or embossed with the rated
cable voltage, cable size, year of manufacture, name of manufacturer.
.11 For 1.5mm2 , 2.5mm2 , 4mm2 and 6mm2 PVC insulated cable used for final sub-
circuit (lighting, 13A switched socket outlets and others loads from distribution
board), compliance to MS136 & BS6004.
.12 For 25mm 2 , 35mm2 2core or 4core XLPE/PVC insulated cable used for sub-
main, compliance to MS274 & BS 6346. For 50mm2 and above 1core XLPE/PVC
insulated cable used for sub-main, compliance to MS274 & BS6346.
.13 Submain cable entering or leaving any electrical board and tap-off unit shall be
terminated properly by means of mechanical glands of a type, which shall provide
adequate mechanical support to the cable.
2.2 600/1000V Fire resistant mineral-insulated and low smoke halogen free cable
.1 All single and multi-core double insulated fire resistant cables shall comply to
standard BS6387, 1994 Category CWZ with extension of 600/1000V test, IEC
60331 and IEC 60332 part 1, IEC60332 part 3 Category A,B and C, IEC61034
and free from halogen acid gases when tested in accordance with IEC60754-2.
.2 The cables shall be rated at 600/1000V. The thickness shall comply with
IEC60502. A gas mica fire resistance tape shall apply over the conductor to meet
the fire resistance test requirement. The sheath shall be a robust extruded
mineral insulated low smoke halogen free type complies with IEC60754-2.
.3 All fire resistant cables shall be installed strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendation. Cables shall be laid in straight and neat
manner. Clipping of the cables to the trays and cable ladders shall be done in
accordance to the manufacturer’s recommendation and with metal galvanized
type clips/straps/clamps. When single cored cables are used, the cables shall be
laid in three-phase group. Whenever bending of the cable is required the work
shall be done in strict accordance to the cable manufacturer’s instruction. Cable
Bending radius shall be restricted to a minimum of 6 times the cable diameter for
single core cable and multi-core cable during installation.
.4 The cable conductors shall consists of stranded plain annealed copper in circular
construction. For multi-core, Core shall be identified by colored insulation such as
Red-Yellow-Blue-Black, 7 to 37 cores which shall be identified by printed number
on a white core. The sheath color shall be in orange color for identification.
.5 The certification of fire resistance cable shall include different range of cables
sizes from 1mm sq to 630mm sq for single core and 1mm sq to 16mm sq for
multi-core in accordance to BS6387 CWZ, IEC60331 and IEC 60754-2.
.6 Where specified, armoured cable shall consist of a single layer of galvanized steel
wires complying with BS7846.
.7 All fire resistant cables shall comply with Bomba and Suruhanjaya Tenaga
requirements in all respects. All relevant test Certificates from recognized third
party independent testing authorities/bodies.
PVC SHEATHED CABLES
SECTION 4-5
PAGE 6
.8 Submain cable entering or leaving any electrical board and tap-off unit shall be
terminated properly by means of mechanical glands of a type, which shall provide
adequate mechanical support to the cable.
2.3 PVC/SWA/PVC
.1 Power and control cables specified as PVC insulated and sheathed, galvanized
steel wire armoured cable with shall be manufactured and tested to BS 6346.
.2 The cores of PVC/SWA/PVC cables shall be laid up to form a circular cable and,
their fillers are necessary for this purpose, they shall be of PVC. Textile or other
hygroscopic fillers are prohibited.
.3 The insulation shall comply to PVC compound Type T1 1.
.4 There shall be no adhesion between bedding or sheath and insulation. A

polyethylene therephthalate (PTP) binder tape over the laid up cores may be
included at the manufacturer’s discretion.
.5 The armour bedding shall consist of an extruded layer PVC compound. The
radial thickness shall be in accordance with BS 6346.
.6 Armour shall consist of galvanized steel wires applied generally in accordance

with the requirements of BS 6346. Galvanising shall meet the requirements of BS
EN 10257-1 : 1998.
.7 The outer covering over the armour wires for all multi-core control cables shall
consist of a black extruded PVC sheath, which shall comply to PVC compound
Type TM 1. The thickness shall be in accordance with BS 6346.
.8 Control cables shall be made up of the following standard numbers of cores : 4, 7,

12, 27 & 37. All cores shall be coloured white and shall be identified by black
numbers arranged in sequence. The numbers shall be lightly imprinted on the
core length. They shall be permanent in nature and not easily removed without
severe mechanical scrapping.
.9 All PVC/SWA/PVC cables shall be terminated with mechanical glands of a type,

which shall provide adequate mechanical support by positive locking on the
armour and shall at the same time give a high level of earth continuity. The
glands shall be provided with earth tails for connection to earth conductors and
PVC shrouds.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 CABLE SEALING AND DRUMMING
.1 Immediately after the Works Tests, seal both ends of each cable length against
the ingress of moisture, dirt and insects and protect the end projecting from the
drum against mechanical damage during handling and transit. For large size
cables and long lengths where drumming is necessary, the ends of the cable shall
be marked 'A' and 'Z' as appropriate. Each drum shall bear a distinguishing
number either printed on one flange or printed on a name plate and attached to
the flange. Particulars of the cable i.e. voltage, circuit label, length, cable type,
conductor size, conductor material, number of cores, gross and nett weights etc.
shall be clearly shown on one flange of the drum. The direction of rolling shall be
conspicuously indicated by an arrow. Small size cables shall be coiled.
PVC SHEATHED CABLES
SECTION 4-5
PAGE 7
.2 The preferred lengths should be such that no joint shall be made on each cable
circuit.
3.2 CABLE INSTALLATION
.1 Install cable complying with BS 7671.
.2 Install cable on cable trays in appropriate spacing and allow for bending radius
larger than the minimum recommended by manufacturer. Where single-core
cables are used, in three-phase supplies, the three phase cables shall be laid in
trefoil.
.3 No joints are allowed.
.4 Do not expose cut cable ends but seal them until cable termination is made.
.5 After cable is pulled install cable on the cable tray immediately before pulling the
next cable.
.6 Cable Tensions : Do not exceed manufacturer’s recommended cable tensions

during cable installation especially when cable is run vertically.
.7 Install cable as recommended by manufacturer of cable.
.8 Earth cable armour and sheaths near all terminals according to manufacturer’s
recommendations.
.9 Use metal typed cable cleats / fasteners at 1m intervals.
.10 Fire-seal around all cables at all penetrations of fire-rated walls and floors to
maintain fire rating.
.11 Appropriate colour sleeving shall be provided for all LV cables entering and exiting
the electrical risers before cable termination.
3.3 TERMINATIONS AND JOINTING
.1 Make all terminations in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.4 TESTS
.1 Type Tests
.1 Perform at works all relevant type tests recommended in the IEC. In lieu
of actually carrying out type tests, type test reports certified by acceptable
testing authorities may be submitted for approval of the Employer's
Representative.
.2 Routine Tests
.1 Carry out at works all relevant routine tests in the IEC and provide routine
test report for all cables supplied.
PVC SHEATHED CABLES
SECTION 4-5
PAGE 8
.1 Cut one 15 metre long cable sample of the largest cross section from the
completed cables and subject it to the following tests:-
.1 Dimension checks.
.2 Insulation resistance tests to IEC 60502.
.3 Conductor resistance test to IEC 60228.
.4 High Voltage test to IEC 60885-1.
.5 Visual inspection and measurement of insulation thickness and

extruded covering to IEC 60502.
.6 Where relevant, flame retardant test to IEC 60332.
.7 Where relevant, flame resistance test to IEC 60331.
.2 A complete report of the above tests shall be provided.
.3 The manufacturer test shall be verified and witnessed by the Employer

Representative’s and his representatives.
.4 Site Tests
.1 The following tests shall be performed on each complete circuit of cable:-
.1 Insulation resistance test to IEC 60502.
.2 A complete report of the above tests shall be provided.
END OF SECTION 4-5

SWITCHES AND SWITCHED SOCKET OUTLETS
SECTION 4-6
PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
.1 Manufacture, test at Works, deliver to site, install and commission, switches and
switched socket outlets in accordance with the Contract Document.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
.1 Switches and weatherproof switches.
.2 Switched socket outlets
.1 13 Amp surface flush mounted switched socket outlets
.2 13 Amp metalclad switched socket outlets
.3 15 Amp switched socket outlets
.4 Weatherproof switched socket outlets
.5 Grid switches system
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Tender Stage
.1 Technical data and product catalogues for:
.1 Switches
.2 Switched socket outlets
.3 Commando plug / Combination plug / socket
.4 Isolator
.5 Fireman switch
.1 Catalogues and samples of switches, switched socket outlets, commando

plug, isolator and fireman switch
.1 Type test and routine test reports prior to acceptance test.
.2 Acceptance test report after testing.
.1 Installation methods / work method statements prior to installation work.

SECTION 4-6
PAGE 2
.3 O&M manuals
.1 Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply

with the latest applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following:-
.1 IEC 60309-2 Plugs, Socket-Outlets and Couplers for Industrial

Purposes.
.2 IEC 60529 Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP

Code)
.3 BS 60669-1 Switches for Household and Similar Fixed Electrical

Installations
.4 BS 60947-3 Low Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear –Part

3:Switches, Disconnectors and Fuse-Combination
Units.
.5 BS 546 Two-pole and Earthing-pin Plugs, Socket-outlets and

Socket-outlet Adaptors.
.6 BS 1363-2 13A Plugs and Adaptors. Specification for 13A BS

1363-4 Switched and Unswitched Socket-outlets
.7 BS 3676 Switches for Household and Similar fixed Electrical

Installations
.8 BS 4343 Specification for Industrial Plugs, Socket-Outlets and

Coupler for AC and DC Supplies.
.9 BS 4662 Boxes for Flush Mounting of Electrical Accessories.

Requirements and Test Method and Dimensions.
.10 BS 5733 Specification for General Requirements for Electrical

Accessories.
.2 Manufacturer’s Experience

of switches and switched socket outlets of similar construction.
2.0 PRODUCT
2.1 General
.1 The Construction Drawings shall indicate the approximately position of lighting,

switches, switched socket outlets and other fittings. The actual positions of all
fittings and the wiring layout and cable route shall be agreed finally on site with the
SECTION 4-6
PAGE 3
2.2 Sub-circuit switches
.1 Sub-circuit switches unless otherwise shown on the drawings shall be of single

pole, quick-make and quick-break, silent switch action type with solid silver allot
contacts and totally enclosed switch action for flush or surface mounting as
required and shall be suitable for indoor or outdoor service according to location.
The switches shall be housed in standardized-purpose manufactured aluminium
stove enamel finish boxes and complete with conduit knockouts.
.2 Switches shall be rated at 5, 10, 15 amp. As determined by circuit load which for
inductive lighting circuits shall be assessed at twice the steady state connected
load current, one way or two way as indicated in the Tender Drawings and fixed
generally at a height of 1500mm from floor level and where located in rooms, the
switch shall where possible be located on the inside of the room on the handle
side of the door. Measurement shall be to bottom of Switch.
.3 Switch cover plates for the office areas, lobbies and public areas shall be of the
flush type, plate colour to be selected by ID/architect.
.4 Switches for service areas shall be of the metal-clad type approved by the
Employer’s representative mounted in flushed conduit boxes as specified.
.5 Weatherproof type of switches shall be used for outdoor application and shall
have minimum IP54 protection.
.6 An earthing terminal connected to the earth continuity terminal shall be provided

and connected to the protective conductor at every lighting switch position.
.7 A single pole switches shall be connected to break the phase wire of the supply,
the neutral wire shall not be through switch boxes.
.8 Where group of switches, from the same source of supply are to be installed at
the same location. The Contractor may propose grid switch system subject to the
approval of Employer’s Representative.
.9 All switches supplied shall comply to MS616, BS3676 and relevant BS standards.
2.3 Socket outlets
.1 13A switched socket outlets (S/S/O) shall conform to BS 1363 and MS589.
.2 13A S/S/o shall be 3 rectangular pin switch shuttered outlets, one or two gang for
indoor service except as otherwise shown on the drawings and either surface or
flush mounted according to location.
.3 S/S/O shall be the quick make, slow break type with silent, totally enclosed switch
action and solid silver alloy contacts. Switched socket outlet for office, lobbies and
public areas shall be housed in steel boxes finished aluminium stoved enamel, to
BS 3676 and BS 1363 with conduit knock-outs. Switches sockets outlets for the
plant room and other general non-public areas, where specified shall be of the
metal-clad type.
.4 Socket outlets located in exposed situations shall be non-shuttered single pole 3

round pin to BS 546, galvanised iron weatherproof type with ¾ inch E.T. screwed
conduit entry, rated at 5 amp. or 15 amp. Switched as the socket orifice when not
in use.
SECTION 4-6
PAGE 4
.5 Generally, socket outlets shall be positioned 300mm above finished floor level
except otherwise shown on the drawing where they shall be positioned 1500 mm
above ground level or 150mm above counters or benches whichever is suitable,
or as directed by the Employer’s Representative. Measurement shall be to bottom
of Switch Socket Outlet.
.6 Switched-socket outlets connected to normal power supply shall be white

faceplate colour. Those that are connected to essential power supply shall be
white faceplate with red coloured rocker. Those that are connected to emergency
power supply shall be white faceplate with red coloured rocker and complete with
pilot lamp.
.7 Decorative typed and colour of faceplate for the office areas, lobbies and public
areas shall be selected by ID/architect.
.8 S/S/O and switches, where mounted in the same area, shall have consistent
profile and thickness.
.9 The above weatherproof switch socket outlet and plug shall be of IP56
rating.
2.4 Fireman Switches
.1 All fireman switches shall have cast die-aluminium IP65, weather proof
enclosures and are design to comply to IEC 60529 rating of IP65 Ingress
Protection.
.2 Switches shall be type tested to IEC 60947-3 and have utilization category of
AC23A with duty rating 240V/415V AC, 50Hz.
.3 Switches shall be of quick make and break type.
2.5 Isolator or Disconnecting Switches
.1 Isolators or disconnecting switches shall comply with IEC 60947-3. They shall be
of the on-load, rotary type and interlocked with the housing and provided with
means of operation from the front so that all enshrouded live parts can be made
dead with the switch off. All fixed contacts shall be shrouded. Isolators shall
comprise of a quick-make and break, positive action mechanism. Isolators shall
not be door-mounted.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Tests
.1 Type Tests
.1 Perform relevant type tests recommended in the IEC. In lieu of actually

carrying out the type tests, type test reports certified by acceptable testing
authorities may be submitted for approval of the Employer’s
Representative.
.2 Routine Tests
.1 Before the products leave the works, the manufacturer shall carry out the
relevant routine tests on the total assembly and on parts thereof when
delivered with time intervals and the results shall be recorded in a test
report.
SECTION 4-6
PAGE 5
.1 Acceptance tests shall be carried out on the completely assembled units.

.4 Site Tests
.1 At the completion of installation, all switches and switched socket outlets

shall be tested. A report recording each item of the testing shall be
submitted to the Employer’s Representatives.
.1 Check that mounting heights are consistent and in

accordance with the specification.
.2 Check for any defects and poor installation.
.3 Polarity checks
.2 Tests
.1 Operation of safety shutters
.2 Operation of ON/OFF switch
.3 Connection and termination of Live, Neutral and Earth

cable
3.2 Training of Operation and Maintenance Staff
3.3 Handing-Over and Employer’s Acceptance
END OF SECTION 4-6

PROTECTION, METERING AND CONTROL
SECTION 4-7
PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
.1 Manufacture, test at Works, deliver to site, install and commission, relays,

protection devices, metering, control, indicating devices and alarm schemes in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
.1 Relays
.2 Protection devices
.3 Metering devices
.4 Control circuits and devices
.5 Indicating lights
.6 Alarm schemes
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Tender Stage
.1 Manufacturer's data for all equipment/components.
.2 Full point by point control diagrams.
.1 Relay characteristics and MCCB current-limiting let-through energy

characteristics
.2 Protection and control block diagrams
.3 Control/logic and interlocking diagrams
.4 Current transformer and voltage transformer design calculations
.5 Protection and control schematic/wiring diagram
.6 Cable schedules
.7 Component technical details
.3 Inspection and Acceptance Testing at Manufacturer's Works
.1 Installation methods / Work method statements prior to installation work

SECTION 4-7
PAGE 2
.2 Pre-commissioning test procedures prior to pre-commissioning testing
.4 Protection grading report and relay settings
.3 O&M Manuals
.1 Except as modified by governing codes and the Contract Documents, comply with
the latest applicable provisions and latest recommendations of the following:-
.1 IEC 60044-1 Instrument Transformer – Part 1: Current

Transformer.
.2 IEC 60051 Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring

instruments and their accessories.
.3 IEC 60073 Basic and Safety Principles for Man-Machine

interface, Marking and Identification-Coding
Principles for Indicators and Actuators.
.4 IEC 60255 Electrical relays.
.5 IEC 60269 Low-voltage fuses.
.6 IEC 60909 Short-circuit Currents in Three-Phase A.C. Systems
.7 IEC 60947-5-1 Low Voltage Switchgear and Control-Part 5-1:

Control Circuit Devices and Switching Elements –
Electromechanical Control Circuit Devices.
.8 IEC 61008 Residual Current Operated Circuit-Breakers Without

Integral Over Current Protection for Household and
Similar Uses (RCCBs)
.9 IEC 61010-1 Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for

Measurement. Control and Laboratory Use.
.10 IEC 61326 Electrical Equipment for Measurement

IEC 61326-1 Control and Laboratory Use-EMC Requirements.
.2 Manufacturer shall have at least 10 years experience in the manufacture of

similar equipment.
.3 Manufacturer/supplier shall have full parts back-up and service availability for the
equipment provided.
.4 Certification of compliance with IEC requirements shall be done by ASTA, KEMA

or a recognized third party independent testing laboratory.
SECTION 4-7
PAGE 3
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM PROTECTION
.1 Protection equipment shall be designed and applied to provide proper

discrimination between faulty and healthy circuits. They are to remain inoperative
during transient phenomena which may arise during switching or other
disturbance to the system. The design of the protection system shall not be
limited to individual equipment alone but shall be so coordinated such that good
performance can be achieved throughout the system starting from the TNB
incoming feeders to the individual final sub-circuits. The protection system
performance shall reflect good zone selectivity, relay stability, speed with proper
discrimination and reasonable sensitivity without any loss of reliability and
maintainability.
.2 The Contractor shall carry out all short-circuit calculations, check the adequacy of
all equipment short-circuit ratings, provide the best protective device and
coordinate all protective devices in the system. Where computer software is used
for carrying out protection coordination exercise, the Contractor shall provide full
details of the software and shall be responsible for all results generated from the
software.
.3 Protection for the various circuits shall be but not limited to the following:-
Circuit Type Protection Requirement
.1 TNB incoming 11 kV Overcurrent, earth fault
.2 Building 11 kV cables Overcurrent and earth fault
.3 11/0.433kV transformers Overcurrent, earth fault and winding

temperature
.4 Incoming to LV main Overcurrent and earth fault

switchboards
.5 Outgoing from LV main 800A and above OC / EF

switchboard to sub- 400A and below 800A EF
switchboards or distribution
100A and below 400A ELR
board
60A and below RCCB
.6 Incoming to sub- 800A and above OC / EF

switchboard or distribution 400A and below 800A EF
board
100A and below 400A ELR
60A and below RCCB
2.2 RELAYS
.1 Relays shall be of types complying with IEC 255 and shall have approved
characteristics and be flush-mounted in dust and moisture-proof cases with glass
fronts. Attention is particularly drawn to the tropical and humid climate and the
relay designs shall be entirely suitable for duty under these conditions. Bezels of
relays shall be of approved construction and shall be arranged so that
adjustments, testing and replacement can be effected with the minimum of time
and labour.
SECTION 4-7
PAGE 4
.2 Relays of the hand reset type shall be capable of being reset without opening the
case. Relays with provision for manual operation from outside the case, other
than for resetting, will not be accepted.
.3 Relays shall be capable of withstanding the output current of the associated

current transformers corresponding to a primary current equal to the specified
short-circuit withstand current and withstand time of the assembly.
.4 Relay contacts shall be suitable for making and breaking the maximum currents
which they may be required to control in normal service but where contacts of the
protective relays are unable to deal directly with the tripping currents, auxiliary
contactors, relays or auxiliary switches shall be provided. Separate contacts shall
be provided for alarm and tripping functions. Relay contacts shall make firmly
without bounce and the whole of the relay mechanisms shall be as far as possible
unaffected by vibration or external magnetic fields.
.5 Relays, where appropriate, shall be provided with flag or light emitting diode
indicators, and phase coloured where applicable. Flag or light emitting diode
indicators shall be of the hand reset pattern. Where two or more phase elements
are included in one case, indicators shall be provided for each element.
.6 Relays which rely for their operation an external DC supply shall utilise for this
purpose the trip supply of the associated circuit breaker. This supply shall be
monitored and an alarm provided in the event of failure unless otherwise
specified.
.7 Relays, whether mounted on panels or not, shall be provided with clearly inscribed
labels describing their application and rating in addition to the general purpose
labels.
.8 Test facilities shall be provided for each current and voltage transformer
secondary circuit so as to give access for testing of protection relays and
associated circuits. The facilities shall comprise test terminals for front of panel
mounting. Alternatively the same may be accomplished by the use of test sockets
and plugs.
.9 Each current transformer circuit shall be earthed through a removable link at one
point only in the relay panel.
.10 Links shall be provided for isolation of protection trip circuits.
.11 Relays shall be of the draw-out type with automatic shorting of all current
transformer circuits when the relay is withdrawn or when the test links are moved
from their normal operating position.
.12 When specified, electrically reset tripping relays shall be provided where
necessitated by the system of control, such as for those circuits subject to remote
supervisory control.
.13 The application, performance and testing of protective devices shall be in

accordance with the relevant IEC Recommendations.
Static relays are preferred.
.14 Time delay relay shall not be of the dashpot type.
.1 Static Type Relays
.1 All static protection relays shall be designed to withstand the

impulse withstand and high-frequency interference requirements.
SECTION 4-7
PAGE 5
.2 Static protection which require an independent low voltage DC

supply shall preferably use regulated DC/DC converter power
packs for this purpose. Separate power packs are preferred for
each individual discriminative relay unit.
.2 If the power pack is separately housed from the relay units which it is
supplying, care must be taken that the cabling between the power pack
and the relay units, and between relay units is adequately screened and
physically separate from all 'power type' circuits associated with the CT,
VT and DC tripping circuits. All interconnecting screened cables shall
preferably be terminated by plugs and sockets.
.3 The power supply shall be capable of providing a supply to the protection

relay equipment such that a complete break in the primary DC supply
connections to the power supply unit for a period of not less than 10 ms
does not cause any maloperation of the protection relay. Measurement
errors are, however, acceptable provided they do not exceed the stated
assigned error of the equipment.
.4 It shall not be possible to gain direct access by means of external

connection to any low voltage DC power supply without first removing an
appropriate protective cover suitably engraved with a warning that high
voltage tests shall not be applied. There shall be a degree of mechanical
segregation between the 'power type' circuits associated with the CT, VT
and DC tripping connections and the low voltage circuits.
.5 All input and output terminals of the power packs which are connected to
'power type' circuits shall be subjected to the same over-voltage, impulse
and interference tests as specified for static protection.
.6 The low voltage supply to each discriminative relay unit shall be

continuously monitored and an alarm shall be given whenever the voltage
is not within the limits for reliable protection operation.
.7 In order to minimise the high voltage interference to acceptable levels, the

station multi-core cables shall be screened and earthed according to the
latest standards.
.8 Each relay or relay scheme shall be provided with an adequate number of

indications to facilitate fault analysis including identification of the faulted
phase and faulted zone. Mechanically operated output indications are
preferred but other methods of presentation are acceptable provided
that:-
.1 Long term storage of the indication is not dependent upon an

auxiliary supply.
.2 Means are provided to ensure that the indication are complete,

e.g. relays which are provided with lamp indicators must have
lamp testing facilities.
.3 Each indicator, whether of the electrical or mechanical operated

type, shall be capable of being reset without opening the relay
case.
.4 Each indicator shall be so designed that it cannot move before

the relay has completed its operation.
SECTION 4-7
PAGE 6
.5 Unless otherwise approved, indication shall only be given by the

protection which causes the fault to the cleared.
.6 All indications shall be clearly visible without opening of relay
cases or relay panel doors.
.9 Rectifiers used in association with protective relays shall preferably be of

the silicon type and appropriately rated for the application.
.10 Wherever practical, the design of the relay scheme shall be based on the
'fail-safe' principle. Care shall be taken to ensure that loss of DC supply
or an open circuit does not cause incorrect opening or closing of circuit
breaker.
2.3 PROTECTION DEVICES
.1 Inverse Definite Minimum Time Overcurrent and Earthfault Protection
.1 Inverse definite minimum time (I.D.M.T) over current relays (where

specified) shall be of the solid state or numerical type and have
adjustable operating settings from 40% to 400% of the normal full load
secondary current, with an adjustable time setting. These over current
relays shall provide selectable alternative time/current characteristics and
high set definite time operation.
.2 I.D.M.T. each fault relays (where specified) shall be of the solid state or
numerical type and have adjustable operating setting from 8% to 80% of
the normal full relays load secondary current, with an adjustable time
setting, these earth fault relays shall provide selectable alternative time
current characteristics and high set definite time operation.
.3 In cases where the individual over current and/or earth fault elements are
effectively combined into one relay, this relay shall still provide indication
to discriminate the reason the relay has operated (i.e.,I.D.M.T.) over
current or earth fault, high set over current or earth fault) and which phase
has faulted.
.4 Directional overcurrent and earth fault relays shall have directional

discrimination down to 1 percent of the normal voltage.
.5 Instantaneous overcurrent elements where specified shall have a

continuous current setting range of 400 to 1600 percent. Similarly,
instantaneous earth fault elements shall have a continuous current setting
range of 50 to 200 percent. The instantaneous element can be set on
infinity if not required.
.6 Directional overcurrent and earth fault relays shall have directional

discrimination down to 1 percent of the normal voltage.
.7 The Contractor shall provide full details of the relay characteristics and
ensure that they operate satisfactorily under all fault conditions.
.2 Transformer Winding Protection
.1 All necessary indications, tripping relays and alarm relays associated with
the winding temperature protection shall be provided and set into
operation under this Contract.
SECTION 4-7
PAGE 7
.3 Pilot Wire Relay
.1 Relays for use with pilot wires is to be of an approved type, employing

preferably not more than three pairs in a multipair pilot cable with
1/0.91mm telephone conductors.
.2 The protection shall operate for phase faults and earth faults within the
protected zone and remain stable for through faults equal to the
maximum fault current ratings of the associated switchgear.
.3 Phase fault and earth fault sensitivities should not be more than 120
percent and 40 percent respectively of the nominal rated current of the
circuit.
.3 Generator Over voltage Protection
.1 A generator overvoltage relay shall be supplied to detect over voltages at

the generator terminals.
.2 The over voltage relay shall have an adjustable setting range up to 1.4
per unit rated voltage and shall have an adjustable time delay.
.4 Generator Reverse Power Protection
.1 Generator reverse power protection shall be adequately sensitive to

detect a motoring condition on complete loss of input to the turbine.
.2 A time-delayed trip output shall be provided such that there shall be no

risk of incorrect operating caused for example by rotor swings
accompanying a system electrical fault.
.5 Generator Undervoltage Relays
.1 An undervoltage solid state relay shall be included to respond to the true

rms value of the generator voltage. This relay shall have an adjustable
pickup range of 75% too 100% of the nominal and an adjustable dropout
of 80% to 95% of pickup. Dropout shall have zero differential for time
delay reset about the dropout setting.
.6 Generator Over Voltage Protection
.1 A generator overvoltage relay shall be supplied to detect over voltages at

the generator terminals.
.2 The over voltage relay shall have an adjustable setting range up to 1.4
per unit rated voltage and shall have an adjustable time delay.
.7 Generator Under/Over Frequency Protection
.1 Generator under/over frequency protection shall consist of a minimum of

four frequency settings. The frequencies and time delays for the alarms
and/or trips shall be to the approval of the Employer's Representative.
.2 Full details of the relay and proposed settings shall be provided.
.8 Generator Negative Phase Sequence Protection

SECTION 4-7
PAGE 8
.1 The generator negative phase sequence protection shall comprise a two-

stage device.
.2 Stage 1 (alarm) shall have an adjustable setting to match the generator

continuous negative phase sequence capability and shall include an
adjustable definite time delay or a fixed time delay of not less than 3
seconds.
.3 Stage 2 (trip) shall have an adjustable thermal characteristic capable of

being set to match the generator short time negative phase sequence
capability.
.9 Generator Loss-of-Excitation Protection
.1 Loss of excitation protection shall be provided in addition to any loss-of-

excitation devices included in the excitation system or automation voltage
regulator.
.2 The protection shall monitor the generator terminal impedance vector and
shall have a negative reactance offset mho (circular) characteristic with
adjustable offset and adjustable diameter.
.3 An adjustable time delay shall be provided.
.10 Tripping Relays
.1 Electrically reset tripping relays with hand reset flag indicators shall be
used and these are to be arranged for pushbutton re-setting where
appropriate.
.2 The operating time of all tripping relays shall be less than 10 milliseconds.
.3 All auxiliary relays necessary to ensure the correct sequence of trip relay
resetting shall be included.
.11 Frequency / Voltage Time Delay
.1 An adjustable time delay on drop out of both the Generator Voltage

Protective Relay and the Generator Frequency Protective Relay shall be
provided to override loading transients. Range of adjustability shall be 0.1
to 2.0 seconds. Repetitive accuracy shall be within  10%.
.12 Trip Flag Indication Relays
.1 Flag indication relays shall be hand-reset type. Trip flag indication relays
shall be current operated and shall operate in series with the appropriate
tripping relay.
.2. Alarm flag indication relays shall be shunt-operated.
.13 Protection Incorporated In Air Circuit Breakers
.1 Where circuit-breakers are fitted with electronic trip units, adjustments on

these units shall be made using non-removable, discrete step, reliable
switching plugs for precise settings.
.2 A sealable, transparent cover shall be provided over the adjustments to

prevent tampering.
SECTION 4-7
PAGE 9
.14 Protection Incorporated In Moulded-Case Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit

Protection
.1 Overcurrent releases shall be of the thermal and magnetic type with

approximate inverse time-current characteristic. MCCB's shall have
thermal and current limiting magnetic trips to give low let-through energy.
.2 MCP shall have magnetic trip adjustable from 7 to 10 times its rated
current together with adjustable thermal overload trips meeting the
heating characteristics of motors. Where motor protection requirements
available in MCP's are inadequate, additional motor protection relays shall
be provided.
.15 Fuses
.1 High breaking capacity (HBC) type fuse links with time characteristics in
accordance with IEC 60269 and having full range breaking capacities of
at least 5OkA shall be used. The maximum rating shall be 630A.
.2 Fuses should be of the low loss type.
.16 Motor Protection Relays
.1 Motor protection relays shall preferably be of the integrated multi-function

static type incorporating all necessary protection functions. Motor
protection functions shall include but not limited to the following:-
.1 Thermal overload
.2 Phase unbalance
.3 Phase reversal
.4 Single phasing
.5 Excessive starting time
.6 Stalling
.7 High set overcurrent and earthfault
.8 Rotor protection
.2 Thermal overload protection shall be provided in all phases. The relay

characteristics shall closely match the heating characteristics of the
motors they are protecting. The relays shall be of the temperature and
frequency compensated type where appropriate and shall be equipped
with manually reset facilities on the front of the compartment. (Resettable
without opening the assembly). An inadvertent reset action shall not trip a
circuit. A time-delay shall be incorporated to prevent the motor from being
immediately started after a trip.
.3 If bimetallic thermal relays are used, direct heating elements shall be

provided up to a nominal current of 40A. For nominal currents above
100A standard nominal 5A relays shall be used in combination with linear
current transformers. Between nominal currents of 40A and 100A either
SECTION 4-7
PAGE 10
direct heating elements or 5A elements connected via current

transformers may be used.
.4 Motor protection relays of the static type shall have selectable thermal
operating characteristics.
.5 The operating time of the unbalance protection shall be dependent on the

degree of unbalance.
.6 The stall protection shall operate in conjunction with a speed switch on

the protected motor.
.7 The single phasing protection shall have a fixed definite time delay.
.8 For motors with running up times in excess of 5 seconds saturable

current transformers in combination with a standard nominal 5A relay
shall be provided. Alternatively electronic protection relays with suitable
protection curve shall be supplied.
.9 Where wound rotor are provided in conjunction with resistance starting

methods, rotor protection may be provided for large motors to operate
instantaneously at a set value above the starting current of the motor.
.10 For motors with operating conditions beyond those covered by overload
relays, special protection systems may be considered, e.g. installation of
thermistor temperature sensors in the motor windings with its relay
installed in the switchgear compartment, bearing lubricating oil alarm and
trips etc.
.17 Motor Overload Relays
.1 All motor feeders shall be provided with a three element, positive acting,
ambient temperature corrected, time adjustable, hand reset-type thermal
overload relay suitable for overcurrent protection, either direct acting or
CT operated, with 70% to 120% setting range, with current range, clearly
engraved.
.18 Motor Earth Fault Protection
.1 Where indicated in the design drawings, motors shall be fitted with core
balance type earth fault protection relays. Relays shall be manually
resettable after opening of the assembly compartment cover. The relays
shall only operate on an earth fault current of less than 3% of the rated
nominal motor current with a maximum of 6A. The relays shall be
equipped with a clear trip indication of the relay.
.19 Undervoltage Relay
.1 Undervoltage relays for motors shall be of the instantaneous type and

operate on reduced supply voltage.
.20 Residual Current Circuit Breakers
.1 Residual Current Circuit Breakers or Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

(RCCB/ELCB) shall be of the instantaneous tripping type with sensitivity
as indicated in the design drawings.
.2 Residual current devices shall be of the core balance type complying with
IEC 61008-1.
SECTION 4-7
PAGE 11
.3 Residual current circuit breakers incorporating amplifiers or relays

requiring power supply shall operate on 240V 50Hz.
.4 Performance Criteria
.1 Coordination of breaking Capacity
All RCCB shall be protected against short-circuit by means of

circuit breakers.
The manufacturer shall guarantee that the association of these

two devices is properly coordinated such that the rated
conditional short circuit current (lnc) is equal to the prospective
short-circuit current level as shown in the drawings.
Details of the coordination shall be submitted to the Employer’s

Representative for approval. The details shall include the
manufacturer’s coordination tables showing MCB+RCCB and
their rated conditional short-circuit current values.
.2 Voltage Independent
The RCCB shall be current operated type and independent of

voltage. They shall not trip on the loss of supply voltage.
.5 Construction
.1 Protection against nuisance tripping
All general purpose RCCB shall be of Type A characteristics as

stipulated in IEC 61008-1.
The construction shall be of surge-proof design with reinforced

immunity to current surge to eliminate unnecessary nuisance
tripping. The RCCB shall be able to withstand surge currents up
to 3000A (8/20s current surge test) without tripping. Details of
the tests shall be submitted to the Engineer for vetting upon
request.
.2 Operating mechanism
The operating mechanism shall be of the quick-make quick break

type, with the speed of operation independent of the operator.
The contacts shall also be mechanically trip free from the

operating handle so as to prevent the contacts from being held
closed against an electrical fault.
A test button shall be incorporated to enable periodic checks on

the correct operation of the device to be carried out.
As an option, it shall be possible to fit on-site auxiliaries like

shunt-trip coil, ON-OFF indicator switch, trip indicator, motor
operator, etc to the RCCB when required.
.3 Terminals
SECTION 4-7
PAGE 12
The RCCB shall have cable terminals with safety guards to

protect against misconnection.
2.4 METERING DEVICES
.1 Digital Power Meters
.1 The power metering for the incomers shall be capable to monitoring all
the important electrical parameters including 3 phase current, voltage,
power factor, kWhr, KVARhr, harmonics and maximum demand.
.2 Kilowatt-hour and kiloVAR-hour meters shall be provided with maximum

demand indications arranged for half hour resetting.
.3 It shall be capable of logging and communicating with remote station and

shall be integrated with the Building Control System. It shall be of
microprocessor type.
.2 Ammeter, Voltmeter and Power Factor Meters
.1 All instruments shall be of the flush mounting type and shall have an
enclosure with a degree of protection of at least IP 52 and comply with
IEC 60051.
.2 All meters should be of the square pattern type 96 x 96mm bezel case,
and mounted at a suitable height for easy reading from the front. Scales
shall be in actual values and arranged in 90. Where appropriate, meters
shall have facilities for external zero adjustments.
.3 Meters shall be installed in the associated functional units. Recording

instruments, if required, may be mounted in any other accessible location
or common panel provided that the equipment is properly labelled.
.4 Ammeter and voltmeter shall be of suitable range complete with selector

switches to allow reading of phase currents and voltages R-B, B-Y and R-
Y.
.5 Ammeters and voltmeters shall have accuracy class 1.5. Kilowatt hour
and maximum demand metres shall have accuracy class 2.5. Power
factor meter shall have a scale reading of 0.5 capacitive 1-0.5 inductive
with a class accuracy of 2.5.
.6 Ammeters for motor duty (if required) shall have a compressed overload
scale and shall be suitable to withstand the motor starting currents.
.7 Outgoing feeders to sub-switchboards with current ratings in excess of

300A shall be provided with an ammeter.
.8 Motor starter units with a motor feeder cable of 4mm 2 cross section and
more, (usually from 4kW and above) shall be equipped with a current
transformer for a remote ammeter. Motors connected with a feeder cable
of 2.5mm2 will use a direct reading remote ammeter.
2.5 CONTROL CIRCUITS AND DEVICES

SECTION 4-7
PAGE 13
.1 Circuit breakers shall be provided with electrical controls at the circuit breakers,
suitably mounted in the mechanism box or marshalling kiosk for use under
maintenance or emergency conditions. A multi-pole lockable changeover selector
switch shall be provided at the circuit breaker and labelled ‘LOCAL’ and
‘REMOTE’.
.2 Individual healthy trip lamps shall be provided and these shall be coloured white
and mounted adjacent to the associated circuit breaker control switches. Healthy
trip indicators shall be connected so as to give on demand only, supervision of the
trip circuit with the circuit breaker either open or closed, in order to minimise drain
on the station battery. A series resistance shall be provided so that a short circuit
of the lamp or relay shall not result in trip coil operation.
.3 Protection and control schemes should, in general, be based on the use of

stranded 2.5 sq mm cable cores. This Contract shall include the preparation of
schedule of cables and cable core allocations.
.1 Control Relays
.1 Control relay shall be of the heavy duty type, fully tropicalised

complying with IEC 60947-5-1 and shall have a high degree of
reliability with double interrupting contacts. They shall be suitable
for mounting in any position without derating.
.2 Control relays shall have contacts with minimum rating of 15A at

440V. Contacts shall easily be changed from normally open (N/O)
to normally close (N/C) and vice versa and be easily accessible.
Contact tips shall be of hard silver.
.3 Relays shall be supplied with the number of poles required by the

circuitry indicated in the Contract Documents plus one spare pole
for future use. The maximum number of poles shall be six.
.4 Where relays are used in the 11kV and 415V switchboard trip
circuits, they shall have single 30V DC and 240V AC coils,
respectively. All coils shall be continuously rated.
.5 The magnetic system shall consist of a fixed core and plunge-

type armature which actuate the contact bar direct. When the coil
is de-energised, the armature and contact bar shall return to their
original position by a spring.
.6 Control relays shall be of the plug-in type with the plug-in bases
having facilities for rail mounting. The terminals of plug-in bases
shall be designed to accept two wires with cross-section of 2.5
sq. mm.
.7 Control relays shall be provided with protective dust cover.
.8 Each control relay shall be provided complete with identification

label with self adhesive paper designation strips and transparent
covers.
.2 Timers
.1 The timers for the motor circuits, shall be of the 'ON' delay 'OFF'
delay type, Electronic, Synchronous or Pneumatic timers as
called for by the application with 2 N/O and 2 N/C contacts,
SECTION 4-7
PAGE 14
capable of withstanding the thermal effect of switching and have

very close accuracies. They shall have variable setting and
suitable for mounting on normal contactor or for rail mounting
within switch panel.
.3 Selector Switches
.1 Selector switches shall comply with IEC 60947-5-1 and be of

positive-action rotary-cam switches incorporating double
contacts. They shall be of modular construction and suitable for
extension of twelve cells. It shall be possible to arrange the
switches for four, six or eight positions and operations shall be in
either direction.
.2 Selector switch contacts shall be double-break and of hard silver

alloy. They shall have a minimum continuous current rating of 10
amps and be of a high breaking capacity.
.3 Connections shall be by large terminals with clamp screws of

5mm minimum size.
.4 Operating knobs shall be of the type which positively indicates the

position of the switch. The switch position hall be clearly marked
on an engraved legend plate which shall be made from
black/white/black traffolyte and the minimum character size shall
be 5mm.
2.7 INDICATOR LIGHTS
.1 Annunciator
.1 Annunciator 'window' and indications shall be incorporated as shown in

the design drawings and shall be of the 25 mm tile mosaic preferably of
light green or blue green with back engraved inscriptions. The
annunciator inscriptions shall be to the Employer's Representative's
approval.
.2 One set of 'Accept', 'Reset' and 'Test' buttons shall be provided for the
whole mimic.
.3 The Contractor shall submit a Schedule of Alarms together with layout

drawings of the annunciator windows for Employer's Representative’s
approval.
.4 Lamp indications shall be provided and these shall utilise the same button
for test as those provided for the annunciator.
.2 Indicating Lamps
.1 Indicating lamps shall comply with IEC 60073.
.2 Lamp fittings shall allow adequate ventilation and allow for easy removal
for replacement of the lamps without requiring the use of extractors.
SECTION 4-7
PAGE 15
.3 The rated lamp voltage shall be 10 volts in excess of the auxiliary supply
voltage, whether AC or DC. Alternatively, low voltage lamps with series
resistors will be acceptable.
.4 The lamp lens shall be in standard colours, red, green, blue, white and
amber to the Employer's Representative's approval. The colours shall be
in the lenses and not applied coatings. The different coloured lenses shall
be interchangeable.
.5 Lamp test facilities shall be provided so that all lamps on the panel can be
tested simultaneously by operation of a common key. Where alarm facias
are specified, all alarm and monitoring indications (apart from circuit
breaker isolator position indications) shall be incorporated in the facia.
.6 Circuit breaker control switches shall be of the manually operated

discrepancy type spring loaded such that it is necessary to push and twist
the switch past its indicating position for operation. A lamp shall be
incorporated in the switch base so that it will illuminate "steady" when the
circuit breaker position is in discrepancy with the control switch indication.
.7 When the circuit breaker is tripped on a fault condition the lamp will
illuminate to show discrepancy.
.8 All discrepancy indicators shall be complete with a light which shall

illuminate "steady" when at discrepancy. On hand dressing the indicator
to the correct position the light shall go out.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
.1 Protection and control schemes should in general, be based on the use of

stranded 2.5mm2 core cables.
.2 All control and relay equipment shall be flush mounted on panels. Equipment and
terminals, terminal blocks, and panel wiring shall be so arranged and effected that
they require a minimum of disturbance to associated and adjacent equipment for
access.
.3 Where relay movements and other sensitive equipment are mounted on hinged
front panels, these shall be designed to minimise shock and wiring shall be so
arranged as to impose no strain on the terminations. No equipment whatsoever
shall be mounted on the rear access doors.
.4 The arrangement and mounting of all indicating devices, control switches, relays,
and other apparatus shall be to the approval of the Employer's Representative.
.5 The Contractor shall submit for the Employer's Representative's approval the total
system protection coordination and grading including the setting values of the
protective devices. This shall be done 1 month prior to the commissioning date.
.1 All protection, metering and control devices shall be fitted to their respective
switchboards and delivered to site as complete units. All sensitive and movable
parts shall be packed in suitable packaging material to prevent movement and
damage during shipment.
SECTION 4-7
PAGE 16
.2 They shall be adequately protected against the tropical climatic conditions

encountered during shipment.
.3 For instructions on storage at site refer to sub-clause on Storage in the relevant

switchgears / switchboard section.
3.2 TESTS
.1 Type Tests
.1 Perform all type tests recommended in the IEC. In lieu of actually carrying
out the type tests, type test reports certified by acceptable testing authorities
may be submitted for approval of the Employer's Representative.
.2 Routine Tests
relevant routine tests in accordance with the IEC. Static relay electronic
components shall be heat soaked and burnt-in. Results of the tests shall
be submitted to the Employer's Representative.
.1 Acceptance tests shall be carried out on the completely assembled units.

.4 Site Tests
.1 Refer to sub-clause on Site Tests for the relevant switchgear/switchboard

section.
equipment manufacturer (OEM) and the trader contractor.
.5 Review Spare Parts List.
END OF SECTION 4-7

DISTRIBUTION PANELS, AUXILIARY BOARD AND MARSHALLING CABINETS
SECTION 4-8
PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
.1 Manufacture, test at Works, deliver to site, install and commission low voltage AC
distribution panels and marshalling cabinets.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
.1 Low voltage AC distribution panels
.2 Auxiliary board
.3 Marshalling cabinets
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Tender Sage
.1 Technical data and product catalogues
.2 All type test certificates of individual component from an internationally

recognized independent testing laboratory.
.1 Dimensioned shop drawings
.2 Single line diagrams for distribution panels
.3 Catalogue and samples
.1 Installation methods / Work method statements prior to installation work
.3 O&M manuals
.4 As-built AutoCAD drawins

SECTION 4-8
PAGE 2
provisions and latest recommendations of the following:-

Assemblies Part 1 - Requirements for Type-
Tested and Partially Type-Tested Assemblies.
.2 IEC 60446 Identification of Conductors by Colours or

Numerals.
.3 IEC 60898-1 Electrical Accessories-Circuit-breakers for

Overcurrent Protection for Household and
Similar Installations-Park 1: Circuit-Breaker for
A.C Operation
.4 BS EN 13601:2002 Copper for copper Alloys. Copper Rod, Bar

and Wire for General Electrical Purposes.
.5 BS 3900 Pt. E7 Methods of Test for Paints. Part E7 - Resistance

to Impact (Falling Ball Test).
.6 ASTM D3359-02 Standard Tests Methods for Tape Test Methods

for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test ASTM
International.
.7 BS 3900 Pt. F2 Methods of Test for Paints. Part F2 -

Determination of Resistance to Humidity (Cylic
Condensation)
.8 BS 7079 Preparation of Steel Substrates Before

Application of Paints and Related Products.

similar equipment.
2.0 PRODUCT
2.1 General
.1 The distribution panels, auxiliary board and marshalling cabinets shall be non-
ventilated, naturally cooled, metal-enclosed type, flush fronted and suitable for
front access and shall be built to comply with IEC60439-1. All louvers shall be
covered with wire mesh.
.2 The distribution panels and auxiliary board shall be mounted and house moulded-
case circuit breakers, miniature circuit breakers, residual current devices and
busbars as indicated in the Contract Documents.
.3 The marshalling cabinet shall be suitable for wall or floor mounting as appropriate.
.4 All necessary fixing material, mounting bolts, etc. shall be provided for the type of
mounting mentioned.
.5 All operating devices shall be mounted for installation, cable termination and
maintenance operation at the front of the panel.
SECTION 4-8
PAGE 3
.6 All distribution panel located outside riser and public area shall have key lock
handle.
2.2 External Feeder Pillar
.1 The construction of feeder pillar shall comply to DBKL’s requirements.
.2 The feeder pillar shall be Form 1 construction and manufactured from sheet steel
thickness of 2mm thick minimum, anti-rust coated steel plate. The structure shall
be reinforced with angles or channel irons. The feeder pillar roof shall be a
‘house” pattern an not flat.
.3 The feeder pillar shall rest on an angle iron frame where suitable holes have been
prepared to locate foundation bolts and to secure the feeder pillar onto a concrete
footing.
.4 An earthing terminal in the form of a bolt of minimum dimension of 6mm in

diameter and 20mm long shall be welded onto the base frame for connection of
the earthing strip, where applicable.
.5 Doors for the feeder pillar shall be lockable with either wedge type locks protected
by screw plug or some other form of secret lock approved by the Employer’s
Representative. The doors shall be hinged internally to prevent unauthorized
access. Door hasp shall also be provided for additional padlock security.
.6 The feeder pillar shall be self-ventilated and weatherproof and complying IP65.
Anti-corrosive treatment shall be applied to the feeder pillar and shall be finished
with two coats of approved paint. A non-perishable resilient gasket shall be
provided all round the edge of the feeder pillar door.
.7 Additional 20% spares MCCB / MCB shall be provided. Socket outlet and lighting
shall be provided within the feeder pillar for night time maintenance.
.8 Contactor and time switch provided in the feeder pillar shall be approved type.
The activating coil of each contactor shall be wired up by means of a set of minor
fuses so that it can be energized.
.9 A circuit identification chart sealed within a clear plastic laminate shall be attached
to the inside of the feeder pillar.
2.3 Enclosure and Degree of Protection
.1 The enclosure structure shall be fabricated from rolled steel angle sections and
shall be self supporting when assembled, uniform in height and depth from front
to back. Sheet steel used shall not be less than 2mm thick, anti-rust coated steel
plate.
.2 The distribution panels, auxiliary board and marshalling cabinets shall be rigidly
constructed to be stand alone units without any danger of sagging, deformation or
warping.
.3 The front covers of the distribution panels, auxiliary board and marchalling
cabinets shall be of hinged-door type. The front doors shall be provided with
lockable push button typed. The doors shall be arranged to seal onto the board
frame by means of a non-perishable duct-proof material. The sealing material
shall be synthtic rubber and not foam. Doors shall be effectively earthed to the
fixed enclosure by braided straps. Cover bolts or nuts shall be retained in place
when undone.
SECTION 4-8
PAGE 4
.4 For all internal DB, the degree of protection for the enclosures as per IEC 60529
shall at least be IP 41. When the doors are opened, the degree of protection to all
live parts shall at least be IP 20.
.5 Distribution panels and auxiliary board shall have Form 1 construction in

compliance with IEC 60439-1.
.6 The incoming and outgoing cable entry on the distribution panels and auxiliary
board shall be protected with rubber material to prevent cables damage.
2.4 Selection of Components
.1 All components shall be standardized as far as practical and shall comply with
relevant IEC publications.
.2 Busbars
.1 Busbars for the distibution panel and auxiliary board shall be of plain
hard-drawn, high conductivity, electrolytic copper bars in accordance with
BS EN 13601:2002 and of adequate rectangular cross-section to carry
continuously the specified current without overheating and shall be rigidly
mounted on insulators so as to withstand any mechanical force to which
they may be subjected under maximum fault condition.
.2 Busbars shall be coloured red, yellow and blue and black at appropriate
points to distinguish the phases and neutral. No tapes shall be used.
.3 Moulded-case circuit breakers
.1 For moulded-case circuit breakers, refer to section LOW VOLTAGE AC

SWITCHBOARDS.
.2 Typed test certificates shall be produced for the MCCB selected from
international recognized testing laboratory.
.4 Miniature circuit breakers
.1 Miniature circuit breakers shall comply with IEC 60898-1. They shall be
incorporated with overcurrent protection. Their selection for use shall be
matched as their operating characteristics.
.2 Typed test certificates shall be produced for the MCB selected from
international recognized testing laboratory.
.3 Performance Criteria
.1 Breaking Capacity
The rated short-circuit capacity, Icn, shall be higher or at least

equal to the maximum prospective short-circuit current at the
points of installation as stated in the single-line drawings.
The rated service short-circuit capacity, Ics, of 6kA and 10kA

breakers shall be 100% Icn and 75% Icn respectively.
.2 Co-ordination
All circuit breakers in the distribution boards shall be from the

same manufacturer and total discrimination with the upstream
SECTION 4-8
PAGE 5
breakers under over-current conditions shall be guaranteed.

Details of the operating characteristics and the coordination with
other protective devices shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval. The details shall include the manufacturer’s full current
discrimination tables showing the over-current discrimination
levels.
Back-up protection is permitted when a current limiting circuit

breaker is installed in the upstream. Details of this coordination
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The details shall
include the manufacturer’s back-up protection tables showing the
upstream/downstream devices and the coordinated level of
protection.
.3 Installation
The MCB shall be fully rated for uninterrupted continuous service

based on an ambient temperature of 30 degree C/
The MCB shall be of 35mm DIN symmetrical rail mounted type

and available in one, two, three and four poles version.
The MCB shall be suitable for mounting in any positions with no

de-rating.
.4 Construction
.1 Trip Characteristics
The trip characteristics of the MCB shall be Type B, C or D as

indicated in the drawings.
.2 Operating Mechanism
The operating mechanism shall be of the quick-make quick-break

type, with the speed of operation independent of the operator. In
addition, the breaker mechanism shall also be mechanically trip
free from the operating handle so as to prevent the contacts from
being held closed against short circuit and other abnormal
conditions.
The operating mechanism shall be designed to operate all poles

of a multi-pole breaker simultaneous during opening, closing and
trip conditions. The individual operating mechanism of each pole
of a multi-pole MCB shall be directly linked within the MCb and
not by the operating handles alone.
All MCB shall be tested for isolating function as stipulated in IEC

60898. The isolation function shall guarantee that the breakers
when in the open position, should have an isolation distance in
accordance with the requirements necessary to satisfy the need
for users’ safety.
Means of Positive Contact Indication to mimic the exact position

of the contacts shall be provided. The indication of the open and
closed position of the main contacts shall preferably be provided
by the position of the actuator. Color-coded bands and lettering
on the actuator shall be incorporated to aid identification.
SECTION 4-8
PAGE 6
The operating handle shall be of the toggle type with facility for
installation of padlock device.
All MCB shall have optional field installable accessories like
shunt-trip coil, under-voltage release, ON/OFF indications, alarm
switch, etc. The installation shall be flexible such that to allow for
fitting of accessories to either the left of right side of the MCB.
All MCB must be suitable for remote controlled on/off operations

via an electrical motor operator.
.3 Terminals
The MCB shall have double function terminals to allow correct

termination of busbar and cable. The top terminal shall be
suitable for PIN busbars, the bottom terminals shall be suitable
for both PIN & FORK busbars.
The cable terminals shall be equipped with safety guards to

protect against misconnection. The safety guards shall function
in a manner such that there is only one possibility of cable
insertion into the MCB terminals, this will eliminate all possibilities
of loose cable terminations because of wrong insertions.
.5 Residual current devices
.1 Residual current devices shall be provided as indicated in the design

drawings and construction drawings.
.2 Refer to Section: PROTECTION, METERING AND CONTROL for details.
.3 Typed test certificates shall be produced for the RCCB/ELCB selected

from an international recognized independent testing laboratory.
.6 Terminals for external conductors
.1 Terminals shall be suitable for copper conductors and of proprietary

design.
.2 As a standard, assemblies shall have facilities for the entry of cables from
the top and bottom. Cable entries, cable clamping, earthing facilities and
supporting devices shall be provided suitable for the type, size and
number of cables.
.3 Terminal blocks in the marshalling cabinets shall have individual

disconnecting links. All terminals connected to current transformers shall
have shorting links instead.
.7 Secondary cable and core identification ferrules
.1 Both ends of each conductor shall be provided with identification ferrules.

The ferrules shall be of insulating material which shall be
unaffected by oil or damp. Characters shall be suitably marked in
black. The ferrules shall be of the continuous ring type, not of the slip-on
type. Marking shall be in accordance with the related manufacturer’s
drawings.
.2 The minimum allowable cross-sectional area of control wires shall be

1.0mm2 wires with a cross section of larger or equal to 1.5mm2 shall
always be stranded.
SECTION 4-8
PAGE 7
.3 Current transformer secondary circuits with 5A rating shall be 2.5mm2

minimum.
.4 Colour coding of wiring shall be in accordance with IEC 60446. Earth

wires shall be green / yellow striped. Wiring between two terminals shall
be continuous, joints or interconnections are not allowed.
.5 Each wire shall be connected to each terminal connection.
.6 As a minimum requirement, use shall be made of rail-mounted terminals

(TS 32 rail assembly) of high-grade Melamine. Partitions shall be fitted
between terminals for different voltages.
.7 Wiring ends of stranded conductors which have to be connected into bus

type contacts of terminals, shall be provided with compression-type pre-
insulated wire pins, etc., are used, they shall be of the compression type.
.8 To accommodate and support the secondary wiring, covered plastic

channels, insulated tubes or plastic strips shall be used.
.9 Wiring shall never be mounted direct to metal. The filling factor for
channels shall be exceed 70%. Where supporting of a wire is not
feasible, the wire or part of it shall be as short as possible.
.8 Finishing and Painting
.1 All metal structures and sheet shall be adequately protected against

corrosion. Preparation of surfaces for painting shall be made complying
with BS 7079. All mill scale, loose rust and welding slag, shall be removed
by hand tools and the metal surfaces shall be cleaned free from dirt, oil,
grease, wax and other contaminants.
.2 The sheet steel shall be zinc phosphate treated to a minimum thickness

of 3.0g/m2 prior to the application of paint.
.3 The manufacturer’s standard is acceptable, if at least equivalent to using

the electrostatic spray process and oven-baked with:-
.1 One coat of stoving primer (zinc epoxy primer) of minimum

thickness 30 microns.
.2 One coat of melamine resin paint of minimum thickness 30

microns.
.3 One final top coat of melamine paint of minimum thickness 15

microns.
.4 Alternatively, the metal surfaces shall be coated with a layer of weather

resistant paint (epoxy polyacrylic for primer and top coat) via cathodic
electro deposition process. The dry film thickness shall be at least 35
microns.
.5 All panels shall have a consistent and matching paint finish. The final top
coat colour shall be light grey or manufacturer’s standard colour subject
to Employer representative’s approval.
.6 The assembly shall be treated in all respect to provide a lasting durability

under the specified services conditions.
SECTION 4-8
PAGE 8
.7 Repair painting shall be done when there is development of any

detrimental film irregularity such as lifting, loose, cracked, brittle or non-
adherent paint or discoloration after completion of painting.
.8 The equipment supplier shall submit detail of his painting system and
procedures for review and approval by the Employer’s Representative.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Distribution Panels

.3 Complete incoming and outgoing power circuits and wiring shall be

installed.
.4 The completed installation shall contain no extraneous openings.
.2 Marshalling Cabinets
.1 When installing earth bars, ensure that the joint surfaces are clean before
tightening bolts of the correct size.
.2 Complete and check power and control wiring prior to pre-commissioning.
.3 Replace all cover and carry our pre-commissioning checks.

.1 Distribution panels and marshalling cabinets shall be packed and delivered

appropriately labeled for easy identification at site. They shall be securely packed
to prevent any movement and damage during transport and against tropical
climatic conditions encountered during shipment.
.2 Manufacturer shall provide information for unpacking and lifting safely, including
details of any special lifting and positioning devices, if necessary.
.4 On delivery at site, the consignment shall be checked against the delivery notes.
3.3 TESTS
.1 Type Tests
.1 Perform relevant type tests recommended in the IEC. In lieu of acturally

carrying out the type tests, type test reports certified by acceptable testing
SECTION 4-8
PAGE 9
authorities may be submitted for approval of the Employer’s

Representative.
.2 Routine Tests
delivered with time intervals and the results shall be recorded in a test
report.
.1 The following checks and tests shall at least be carried out.
.2 Distribution panels shall be visually inspected for technical execution and

conformity with the latest issue of the approved drawings and with the
order. Spot checks shall be made to verity:
.1 Dimensions
.2 Degree of protection of the enclosure
.3 Panel layout and number of outgoing circuits
.4 Proper mounting of components
.5 Arrangement and correct wiring of main circuits

arrangements
.7 The availability of the earth bar in the panel
.8 The interchangeability of electrically identical components
.3 Insulating resistance test between phases / neutral and between each

phase / neutral against earth, with the remaining phase / neutral
connected to earth. The insulation resistance tests shall be carried out
with all manually operated and latched type, switching devices in the
closed position and all main fuses installed. The insulation resistance
measured shall be at least 5 mega – Ohms. The voltage applied shall be
at least 1.1 times Un DC.

functional units on random basis, including their control and protective
devices.
.5 Painting and finishing tests
.1 Measurement of paint thickness.
.2 Humidity (cyclic condensation) test to BS3900 Pt. F2. Painted

panel shall withstand 1000 hours under test with no blistering of
film and corrosion of base metal.
SECTION 4-8
PAGE 10
.3 Adhesion test to ASTM D3359-02. Test tape shall not expose

more than one 3mm2 of bare metal or underlaying coating.
.4 Impact resistance test to BS 3900 Pt. E7. Paint shall not chop
off.
.5 The manufacturer test shall be verified and witnessed by the

Employer Representative’s and his representatives.
.4 Site Tests
.1 At the completion of installation, each panel shall be field tested by a

representative of the manufacturer. A report recording each item of the
tests shall be certified by the manufacturer and submitted to the
.1 Visual inspection
.1 Metal work and paint work.
.2 Mounting of components
.3 Internal wiring and cabling system
.4 Clamping, earthing and terminating arrangement
.5 Earthing system
.2 Insulation resistance measurement
.3 Power frequency withstand voltage test
.4 Mechanical operation test of each disconnecting means under

load.
3.4 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
Equip the Electrical Room (ER) with the following miscellaneous items :-
.1 All the requisite labels.
.2 Latest approved As-built drawings in A4 size lamination
.3 Approved fire detection and fire fighting apparatus.
.4 Earthing bar installationo along the perimeter of the room connected to the main-
earth bed system.
equipment manufacturer (OEM) and the trader contractor.
.4 Review O&M Documentation an Test Results

SECTION 4-8
PAGE 11
.1 Endorse defect list.
.2 Provide all keys.
END OF SECTION 4-8

LOW VOLTAGE AC SWITCHBOARDS, MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES
SECTION 4-10
PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
.1 Manufacture, test at Works, deliver to site, install and commission low voltage AC
switchboards, motor control centres and automatic transfer switches.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
.1 Low voltage AC switchboards.
.2 Motor control centres.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Tender Stage
.1 Technical data and product catalogues.
.2 Full Type test certificates of switchboards to ASTA, UL, KEMA and

internationally recognised independent testing laboratory.
.3 Type test certificates for Moulded Case Circuit Breaker, Air Circuit
Breaker from internationally recognized independent testing laboratories
such as ASTA, UL, KEMA.
.2 Dimensioned drawings (plans, sections and elevations).
.3 Single line diagrams.
.4 Front panel component arrangements.
.5 Schematic/wiring diagrams.
.6 Control diagrams.
.7 Shop drawings/construction drawings.
.8 Catalogue and technical data of all components.
.9 Nameplate information.
.10 Full load heat rejection in Btu per hour of each switchboard and motor
control centre.
.11 Data on structural supports, metal thickness, surfaces finish and

provisions for lifting and foundations etc.
.3 Inspection and Acceptance Testing
.1 Type test and routine test reports prior to acceptance tests.
.2 Acceptance test reports after tests.

SECTION 4-10
PAGE 2
.1 Installation methods/Work method statements prior to installation work.
.2 Pre-commissioning test procedures prior to pre-commissioning testing
.3 Pre commissioning test records subsequent to testing.
.3 O&M Manuals
.4 As built AutoCAD drawings
provisions and latest recommendations of the following:-
.1 IECQ IEC Quality Assessment System for Electronic

Components.
.2 IEC 60044-1 Instrument Transformer Part 1: Current

Transformer
.3 IEC 60269-1 Low Voltage Fuses Part 1: General

Requirements
.4 IEC 60947-3 Low Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear Part 3:

Switches, Disconnectors and Fuse Combination
Units
.5 IEC 60439-1 Low Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear

Assemblies Part 1 – Type Tested Partially Type
Tested Assemblies.
.6 IEC 60445 Identification of Equipment Terminals and of

Terminations of Certain Designated Conductors,
including General Rules of an Alphanumeric
System.
.7 IEC 60446 Identification of Conductors by Colours or

Numerals.
.8 IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by Enclosures (IP

Code).
.9 IEC 61000-4-2 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) – Part 2 :

Testing and measurement Techniques Testing
and Measurement Techniques Electrostatic
Discharge Immunity Test
SECTION 4-10
PAGE 3
.10 IEC 61000-4-3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) – Part 3 :

Radiated, radio-Frequency, Electromagnetic
Field Immunity Test
.11 IEC 61000-4-4 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) – Part 4:
Electrical Fast Transient / Burst Immunity Test
.12 IEC 60909 Short Circuit Currents in Three-Phase A.C.

Systems
.13 IEC 60939 Passive Filter Units for Electromagnetic

Interference Suppression
.14 IEC 60947 Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear
.15 IEC 60947-1 Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear Part 1 -

General Rules
.16 IEC 60947-2 Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear Part 2 -

Circuit Breakers
.17 IEC 60947-4 Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear Part 4

– Contactors and Motor-Starters.
.18 IEC 947-6-1 Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear Part 6 -

Multiple Function Equipment - Section One
Automatic Transfer Switching Equipment
.19 BS 1376 Specification for Colours of Light Signals
.20 BS EN 13601:2002 Copper and Copper Alloys Copper Rod, Bar and
Wire for General Electrical Purposes
.21 BS 3900 Pt E7 Methods of Test for Paints. Part E7 -

Resistance to Pt. E7 Impact (Falling Ball Test)
.22 ASTM D3359-02 Standard Tests Methods for Tape Test Methods
for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test ASTM
International.
.23 BS 3900 Pt F2 Method of Test for Paints. Part F2 -

Determination of Resistance to Humidity (Cyclic
Condensation)
.24 BS 7079 Preparation of Steel Substrates before

Application of Paints and Related Products
.25 IEC 61641 Guide For Testing Under Conditions of Arcing

Due to Internal Fault

similar equipment.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 SAFETY AND RELIABILITY
.1 Switchgear and controlgear shall be designed to minimise any risk of short circuit
and to ensure personnel and operational safety during all operating conditions,
SECTION 4-10
PAGE 4
inspections and maintenance. They shall also be so designed to allow safe

connection of main, control and auxiliary cables, and the equipping and
commissioning of spare panels whilst the switchgear is live and in operation. It
shall have a lifetime of at least 20 years.
.2 The assemblies shall be suitable for continuous operation at full load for at least
40,000 hours without maintenance which would require the busbar and droppers
to be de-energized.
.3 Even under extreme conditions of major short circuits or mal-operations there

shall be no danger to persons in the vicinity of the assembly.
2.2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
.1 General
.1 The LV switchboards and motor control centres shall be naturally cooled,

self-contained, metal-enclosed type, floor mounted, flush-fronted and
suitable for front and rear access and housing air circuit breakers,
moulded-case circuit breakers, ON/OFF switches, busbars, meters,
protective relays, manually-operated disconnecting switches, selector
switches, indicating lamps, current transformers, cable terminating boxes,
anti-condensation heaters, padlocks, interlocks and other necessary
items of equipment. They shall be built to comply with IEC 60439-1.
.2 All structural works shall be adequately protected against corrosion. The

basic materials shall be properly pre-treated before the final coats of
resistant finishing paint are applied.
.3 All materials, used in the construction and for primary insulation shall be
non-hygroscopic and have fire retardant properties and halogen free as
practical. Insulating materials shall have a high resistance to tracking.
.4 The switchgear shall be suitable for mounting on a concrete floor or

plinth. All necessary foundation or fixing bolts, channel bases and rails
shall be provided.
.5 All operating devices shall be mounted for operation at the front of the
switchboard.
.6 Alphanumeric notation, generally in accordance with IEC 445, shall be

used for identification and marking of phases, conductors and terminals.
.7 The switchgear and motor control centres shall fit within the area
designated on the Contract Documents with the clearances as indicated.
.2 Enclosure and Degree of Protection
.1 The enclosure structure shall be fabricated from rolled steel angle

sections and shall be self supporting when assembled, uniform in height
and depth from front to back. Rigid construction shall be designed to
withstand without any sag, deformation or warping under the loads likely
to be experienced during normal operation, maintenance or maximum
short-circuit conditions, and shall comply with all requirements of IEC
439-1 for normal mechanical loads. Sheet steel used shall be not less
than 2mm thick, anti-rust coated steel plate. Welded cross-struts shall not
be used.
.2 The front and rear covers of the switchboard shall be of hinged door type.
The front doors shall be provided with door latches; the rear doors shall
be provided with key locks. The doors shall be arranged to seal onto the
SECTION 4-10
PAGE 5
board frame by means of a non-perishable dust proof material. The

sealing material shall be synthetic rubber and not foam. Doors shall be
effectively earthed to the fixed enclosure by braided straps. Cover bolts or
nuts shall be retained in place when undone.
.3 The degree of protection for any assembly as per IEC 60529 shall be IP
41. The floor shall not be considered as part of the enclosure.
.4 Partitions or barriers for internal separation of assemblies shall be

designed to obtain Form 2B separation of compartments.
.5 It is acceptable that outgoing terminals of functional units are installed in

combined compartments provided that all terminations have a degree of
protection of at least IP 30.
.6 The switchgear enclosure shall be rodent and insect-proof. It shall be

capable of operating in tropical and humid conditions and provision shall
be made for electrical panel heaters to prevent condensation particularly
when the equipment is out of service.
.3 Anti-Condensation Heaters
.1 Power supply to electrical anti-condensation heater inside the assembly

shall be supplied from a separate source connected between system
phase and neutral. The heating system of each assembly section shall be
separately protected and switched for isolation purposes by means of a
miniature circuit breaker in combination with a residual current device of
30mA sensitivity. When the heating system is live, this shall be indicated
by means of a prominently situated red light. The heating system shall be
designed in such a way that the heat is adequately distributed over all
functional units.
.4 Temperature Rise
.1 The temperature rise limits as given in IEC 60439-1(all parts) shall not be
exceeded when the assembly is fully loaded.
.5 Protection Against Electric Shock
.1 All switchgear components requiring maintenance shall be easily

accessible from the front and rear.
.2 Exposed parts within the assemblies, which have to be accessible during

normal operation, maintenance or equipping of spare compartments,
shall either not be alive in the open position or shall be protected to a
degree of protection of at least IP 42. The terminals of the incoming and
sectionalizer switching devices can be alive when the device is in the off
position. These terminals shall always be protected to a degree of at least
IP 42.
.3 HRC fuses and associated fuse carriers shall only be accessible when
they are fully isolated or when they offer a degree of protection to live
parts of at least IP 20 when the fuses are inserted, withdrawn or during
withdrawal.
.4 Terminals of equipment installed on a compartment door and which can

be alive when the door is opened, shall be shrouded to a degree of
protection of at least IP32.
.5 Compartment doors or covers shall be interlocked to prevent opening

when the isolating switch that includes ACBs and MCCBs is in the `ON`
SECTION 4-10
PAGE 6
position. The isolating device shall only be operable when the door is fully
closed and when the withdrawable unit is in the fully inserted position.
.6 When a withdrawable unit has been removed from the assembly, the live
parts inside the fixed compartment shall be protected against touch, with
a degree of protection of at least IP 20. When shutters are fitted to
comply with above requirement, they shall be mechanically operated by
the movement of the withdrawable unit and not dependent on gravity.
Each set shutters shall be capable of being individually operated and
padlockable in the closed position. Shutters covering busbars or droppers
shall be marked ‘BUSBAR’ and shutters covering the incoming supply,
‘INCOMING SUPPLY’.
.7 If a test position is provided (partly withdrawn unit), the degree of

protection shall be at least IP 42.
.8 Interlock systems shall be of a mechanical lever type and shall not rely on
the operation of springs or gravity.
.9 All practicable measures shall be taken to prevent danger to personnel

working on a disconnected functional unit with adjacent units still in
operation. Parts likely to be removed for maintenance shall have
retainable fastening means.
.6 Short-Circuit Withstand Strength
.1 Switchgear and all its component, shall be capable of withstanding the

thermal and dynamic stresses, resulting from the prospective short-circuit
current as shown on the design drawings, without the possibility of injury
to personnel.
.2 The whole busbar system, including the busbar conductors connecting

the main busbars to each outgoing unit, shall be arranged to withstand a
short circuit at any point.
.3 The switchgear shall be designed to withstand any external fault. In the

event of any internal arcing fault on a functional unit, the damage should
be confined to that unit, so that the busbars and all other functional units
remain fit for further service. However, the busbar conductors connecting
the busbars to the outgoing unit might be damaged by the internal arcing
fault.
.4 The time value of the rated short-time withstand current shall be 1

second. The value of the rated peak withstand current shall in no case be
less than 2.2 times the rated rms value of the rated short-time withstand
current with a power factor not higher than 0.2.
.5 For components of the switchgear protected by fuses or similar protective

devices, short-time and peak withstand current values shall be selected,
taking into account the limiting effects of the associated fuse or device on
the magnitude of the current and on its duration.
.7 Coordination of Short-Circuit Protective Devices
.1 In motor starter units, the coordination between starter and protective

device shall comply with type '2' as specified in Sub-clause 7.2.5 of IEC
947-4.
SECTION 4-10
PAGE 7
.2 This generally implies that a starter is sufficiently protected by the short-

circuit protection that no damage will occur to the starter in case of a
through-fault current.
.3 The short circuit protection device inside each functional unit shall be
connected directly to the incoming supply from the busbars.
.8 Selection of Components
.1 All components shall be standardized as far as practical and shall comply

with the relevant IEC publications.
.2 The connections of the auxiliary circuits of withdrawable units shall be of

the plug-and-socket type, automatically operated by the unit.
.3 Incoming and sectionalizing units shall be mounted in separate panels

and shall be provided with independent manually operated air break
switches or with circuit breakers. The utilization category as in Clause 4.3
of IEC 60947 shall be at least AC-22. Motor switches shall have
utilization category of AC-23.
.4 Switching devices shall switch all phases or poles (i.e. 4-pole type for 3
phase + neutral systems). For balanced systems, the neutral pole current
rating shall not be less than as specified for the neutral busbar.
.5 The switching devices shall have padlock facilities in the 'OFF' position.
Components and devices such as ACBs and MCCBs complete with
mechanical & electrical interlock selected for services as automatic
transfer switches shall comply to IEC 947-6-1.
2.3 BUSBARS
.1 The busbars shall be of plain hard-drawn, high conductivity, electrolytic copper

bars in accordance with BS 1432 and of adequate rectangular cross-section to
carry continuously the specified current without overheating and shall be rigidly
mounted on non-hygroscopic insulators so as to withstand any mechanical force
to which they may be subjected under maximum fault condition.
.2 Busbars shall be coloured red, yellow and blue and black at appropriate points to
distinguish the phases and neutral. No tapes shall be used. The main busbars
shall be arranged in a horizontal plane and in the order, red, yellow, blue and
neutral phases from back to front. On each panel connections shall be red,
yellow, blue and neutral phases from left to right viewed from the front of the
panel.
.3 The phase and neutral busbars should be located in the top compartments of the
switchboard.
.4 The busbar system shall be readily accessible for inspection, construction and
maintenance duties without the requirement of additional equipment. In case of a
busbar short circuit, it shall be possible to clean or to replace the busbars and the
support system without stripping the assembly.
.5 In the busbar compartment, the phase busbars may not be fully insulated.
However, each phase busbar shall be able to withstand at least an applied AC
test voltage of 2.5kV for a period of 60 seconds.
.6 The droppers shall have full segregation by insulated materials. The insulation of
the busbar jointing and branching points shall be of equal quality to that of the
main bars and shall be removable and easily replaceable for inspection.
SECTION 4-10
PAGE 8
.7 The neutral bar may be uninsulated in the busbar compartment but shall be
insulated at all other compartments with the same insulation level as the phase
busbars.
.8 The earth bar shall be located in the top or bottom compartment and in all cable
riser compartments of the switchboard and shall be easily accessible. Sufficient
connection points with adequate terminating facilities shall be provided for
terminating the cable earth leads. The earth bar shall be sized complying with IEC
60439-1.
2.4 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
.1 Circuit breakers shall be of the air-break type suitable for indoor use and
withdrawable complete with all necessary instruments, transformers, closing and
tripping devices and protective instruments. They shall be easily accessible and
operable from the front and provided with padlocking facilities. Both phase and
neutral switching shall be required. Circuit breakers shall comply with IEC 947-2
regarding their test performance and number of operating cycles, and shall have a
rated short-circuit making and breaking capacity specified in the drawings and
complying with IEC 947-2 Table II. They shall be trip-free.
.2 Locking facilities shall be provided on the circuit breaker and control switch so
that, in any position, the circuit breaker can be prevented from being directly and
manually operated. Mechanical and electrical lockouts shall be provided to
prevent closing of the breaker after an overcurrent trip.
.3 All operating mechanisms shall have mechanical 'ON' and 'OFF' indicators.
'CLOSED', 'OPEN' and 'TRIPPED' indication lamps shall be provided. Hand
charged or motor charged spring mechanisms shall have mechanical indicators to
show 'SPRING CHARGED' and 'SPRING DISCHARGED'.
.4 All ACB's supplying loads from the main switchboards shall have motor charged
operating mechanisms which shall be arranged so that release of the spring to
close the circuit breaker can only be done by deliberate action. It shall not be
possible for shocks to release the charged spring. Remote controlled switching
shall also be provided for motor charged operating mechanism ACB's.
.5 Closing and trip control switches shall turn clockwise for closing and anti-
clockwise for tripping and labelled 'OPEN-NEUTRAL-CLOSE' with spring return to
neutral.
.6 The shunt trip coil shall be operated by 240V AC supply unless otherwise stated in
the design drawings.
.7 All circuit breakers shall be provided with interlocks to ensure that: -
.1 They cannot be connected or withdrawn whilst it is closed.
.2 They cannot be closed until they are fully plugged in or completely

isolated.
.3 The spring charged mechanisms cannot be discharged until they are fully
charged.
.8 Mechanical & electrical interlocks shall be provided in cases where multiple

incoming supplies are not to be parallelled. Tripping of a closed circuit breaker
shall not occur if an attempt is made to remove the trapped key or when it is in the
withdrawn positions.
SECTION 4-10
PAGE 9
.9 Facilities for operational tests of the circuit breaker shall be provided when in the
isolated or withdrawn position.
.10 Provide auxiliary contacts for remote monitoring of all incoming and sectionalising
breakers as well as all distribution breaker, on switchboards supplied from the
emergency power system.
.11 ACB's used for distribution on switchboards supplied from the emergency power
system shall have provision for remote operation (OPEN and CLOSE) for load
management.
.12 All protective relays and instruments shall be provided as shown in the design
drawings.
.13 Where specified in the design drawings, the circuit breakers shall have integral
solid-state trip units with built-in overcurrent and earthfault protection having time-
current characteristics. A combination of the following time-current curve-shaping
adjustments shall be provided:-
.1 Ampere setting.
.2 Long time delay.
.3 Short time pickup.
.4 Short time delay.
.5 Earth fault pickup.
.6 Earth fault delay.
.14 The solid-state trip-unit shall have a digital information system that provides circuit
current values and mode of trip indication (i.e. overload, short circuit, and earth
fault) with fault current levels displayed following an automatic trip operation.
.15 All solid state trip units shall be provided with test jacks for in-service functional
testing using a small hand-held test kit.
.16 Refer to Section 4-5: PROTECTION, METERING AND CONTROL for protection
afforded by the electronic trip units.
2.5 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
.1 Ratings and Utilization Category
.1 The automatic transfer switches shall be provided as shown on the

design drawings and shall comply with IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-6-1.
All three phase, four wire transfer switches shall employ switched-neutral.
Switches used with earth fault equipment shall be the four-pole switched-
neutral type with all four poles on a common shaft. The neutral pole shall
have the same withstand and operational ratings as the other poles and
shall be arranged to break last and make first to minimize neutral
switching transient.Overlapping neutral contacts are not acceptable.
Switches serving 3 phase loads, which do not have a neutral condition
shall be 3 pole type. The transfer switches shall be capable of switching
the classes of load specified and shall be rated for continuous duty when
installed in a non-ventilated enclosure. The automatic transfer switches
shall be capable of making, breaking and withstanding short-circuit
currents. It shall hence comply with Class CB according to IEC 60947-6-
1. The time value of the rated short-time withstand current shall be 1
second. The value of the rated peak withstand current shall in no case be
SECTION 4-10
PAGE 10
less than 2.2 times the rated rms value of the rated short-time withstand
current with a power factor not higher than 0.2. The utilization category
shall be AC-33B according to IEC 60947-6-1.
.2 Construction and Requirements
.1 The transfer switch shall be double-throw, actuated by a control module

and connected to the transfer mechanisms by a simple over-center type
linkage with a total transfer time not to exceed 10 cycles. The transfer
switch shall be capable of transferring successfully in either direction with
80 percent of rated voltage applied to the switch terminals.
.2 Inspection of all contacts (movable and fixed) shall be made from the
front without disconnecting the power cables or the linkages of the
operating mechanism. A manual slow opening and closing of the contacts
shall be provided for maintenance and inspection of the contacts
throughout the entire contact travel. Proper interlocks shall be provided
to prevent inadvertent transfer operation while in the maintenance/test
position.
.3 The normal and emergency contacts shall be positively interlocked

mechanically and electrically to prevent simultaneous closing. Main
contacts shall be mechanically locked in position in both the normal and
emergency positions without the use of hooks, latches, magnets, or
springs and shall be silver-tungsten alloy protected by arcing contacts,
with arc grids on each pole. Interlocked moulded case circuit breakers or
contactors are not acceptable.
.4 The removal of access doors/covers shall not defeat the interlocking

mechanism.
.3 Operating Mechanism
.1 Transfer switches shall be electrically operated and mechanically held. A

single-solenoid mechanism shall be provided such that it shall only be
energized during switching operations to minimize power consumption
and heat generated. The switch shall be locked and unaffected by voltage
variations or momentary outages unless directed by the control system.
.4 Control System
.1 The control system shall direct the operation of the transfer switch via
wire connections to the operating mechanism. The connections of
auxiliary circuits shall be of the plug-and-socket type, which shall permit
the disconnection of the control module for maintenance.
.2 The control unit shall be completely enclosed in a metal enclosed

compartment with a separate protective external cover and mounted
separately from the transfer switch and its operating mechanism. Where
the control unit is electronic or micro-processor-based, the control system
shall have high electromagnetic and radio frequency interference
immunity and shall not be affected by portable radio transmitters etc,
operated in the vicinity of the equipment. All electronic devices shall be
protected against transient voltage surge. Electrical isolation of outgoing
and incoming signals shall be provided as appropriate. In this respect,
IEC 61000-4-2, IEC61000-4-3, IEC 61000-4-4, and IEC 60939 shall be
complied as appropriate.
.5 Relays and Controls Requirements

SECTION 4-10
PAGE 11
.1 Relays provided in the control circuitry shall comply with the relevant IEC
and as far as possible be standardized. Relays shall be capable of
withstanding without damage 110% of the rated operating voltage.
.1 Close differential voltage sensing on all phases of normal system.
.1 Drop out field adjustable in 1% increments from 75 to

98%. Factory set at 80%.
.2 Pick up field adjustable in 1% increments from 85 to

.2 Voltage sensing on at least one phase of emergency system.

.3 Frequency sensing of emergency system.

.4 Time delay of momentary normal source outages.
.1 Field adjustable from 0.5 to 6 seconds. Factory set at 1

second.
.5 Time delay on transfer back to normal.
.1 Field adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes. Factory set at 10

minutes.
.2 Immediate bypass and transfer to normal source if

emergency service fails.
.3 Shall cause a set of normally open contacts to close 10-

15 seconds prior to transfer back to normal for switches
serving lift loads. This shall be adjustable from 0-60
seconds and shall be set as required by the lift vendor.
.6 Time delay of transfer to emergency.
.1 Field adjustable from 0 to 1 minutes. Factory set at 0

minutes.
.2 Where multiple transfer switches are employed set time

delay at 5 seconds apart between each switch (i.e. 4
switches total transfer of last switch shall be 20 seconds).
Switch priority assignments shall be determined.
.7 Engine Start Contacts.
.1 Two sets, one set to close the other set to open upon
failure of normal source.
.2 Signal to start respective generator after time out of

transfer to emergency relay as specified above.
.8 Test switch.
SECTION 4-10
PAGE 12
.1 Momentary type mounted through enclosure.
.2 Simulates failure of normal source.
.3 System to remain in test position until delay on transfer

back to normal has timed out.
.4 A test reset switch shall be included and shall bypass the

delay on transfer back to normal. It shall not bypass the
pre-signal specified above.
.5 During test conditions (operation of test switch) a set of

normally open contacts shall be caused to close 10-15
seconds prior to transfer to emergency. The signal shall
be adjustable from 0-60 seconds and shall be set as
required by the vendor.
.6 Spare Contacts
.1 Four (4) spare auxiliary contacts, two (2) closed with switch in emergency
position, and two (2) closed with switch in normal position.
.7 Switch Indicating Lights
.1 Red when switch is in emergency position.
.2. Green when switch is in normal position.
.3 Lights shall be paralleled at remote annunciator panels.
2.6 MOULDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND MOTOR CIRCUIT PROTECTORS
.1 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers and Motor Circuit Protectors shall comply with
IEC 60947-2.
.2 MCCB and MCP should be of moulded insulating material of good mechanical

strength and non-tracking properties. The tripping mechanisms shall be
calibrated in compliance with IEC standards at the factory and the breaker shall
be sealed to prevent tampering.
.3 The MCCB and MCP shall be so designed that when on tripped condition, the
circuit breaker cannot be switched on unless it has been reset by switching it to
the OFF position first. The operating condition (i.e. ON, OFF or TRIP) of the
circuit breaker shall be clearly indicated. The construction and operation of the
MCCB and MCP shall be such that if a fault occurs, all the poles of the breaker
shall operate simultaneously to isolate and clear the fault efficiently and safely
without any possible risk to the operator or to the installation.
.4 Each MCCB and MCP shall incorporate a 'trip free' mechanism to ensure the
breaker cannot be held closed under fault conditions. The operating mechanism
of the circuit breaker shall be hermetically sealed at the factory and all metallic
parts associated with the operating mechanism shall be treated against rust and
corrosion.
.5 Bolt-in type solid neutral links shall be provided and fitted in the same
compartment together with the phase poles.
.6 Means shall be provided to padlock the MCCBs and MCPs in the 'OFF' position.
Mechanical 'ON'/'OFF' indicator operating in conjunction with the rotary type
operating handle of the circuit breaker must be provided.
SECTION 4-10
PAGE 13
.7 MCCB's supplying loads from switchboards connected to the emergency power

system shall be provided with facilities for remote operation (OPEN and CLOSE)
and auxiliary contacts for remote indication.
.8 Refer to Section 4-5: PROTECTION, METERING AND CONTROL for protection
incorporated in MCCB and MCP.
2.7 ISOLATORS OR DISCONNECTING SWITCHES
.1 Isolators or disconnecting switches shall comply with IEC 60947-3. They shall be
of the on-load, rotary type, able to padlock and interlocked with the housing and
provided with means of operation from the front so that all enshrouded live parts
can be made dead with the switch off. All fixed contacts shall be shrouded.
Isolators shall comprise of a quick-make and break, positive action mechanism.
Isolators shall not be door mounted.
2.8 CONTACTORS
.1 Contactors shall be the holding coil type with an operating voltage derived from
phase and neutral.
.2 The contactors shall be suitable for making and breaking at 0.35 power factor the
stall current of the associated motors which shall be assumed equals 8 times full
load current of the motors.
.3 Contactors shall have facilities for rail mounting.
.4 Contacts shall be renewable butt type, solid copper, hard silver faced, fully
shrouded main and auxiliary contacts and the designs shall be such as to ensure
effective freedom from contact bounce and sticking of the fixed and moving
portion of the magnet assembly.
.5 Auxiliary contacts necessary for remote monitoring and control by BCS, Fire
Alarm System and Standby Generator System shall be provided as indicated on
the Contract Documents.
.6 Contactor coils shall be fully tropicalised and wound for continuous operation at
240V with Class E insulation. The coils shall be arranged such that they can be
removed without having to remove the contactor.
.7 Magnets shall be fabricated from silicon alloy riveted electrical steel sheet with
shaded poles. Magnet/armature assembly shall be fully floating and self aligning.
.8 Arc chutes and magnetic blow out coils shall be fitted where appropriate and to
manufacturer's requirement.
.9 With reference to IEC 947-4, motor starters and contactors shall conform to the
requirements of both uninterrupted duty and intermittent duty class 0.1 (12
operating cycles per hour), at rated operational current and shall have a
mechanical endurance level of 300,000 no-load operating cycles.
.10 The utilization category AC-3 (starting of squirrel-cage motors, switching off
motors during running) shall be applied. For motors in inching or reversing
rotating service, utilization category AC-4 shall be used.
.11 For special loads such as transformers, capacitors, lighting, etc. a suitable current
rating and utilization category shall be selected by the manufacturer and in
compliance to IEC 60947-4-1.
SECTION 4-10
PAGE 14
.12 Position indication of contactors shall be fitted on the front of the compartment by
clear red light for 'ON' and clear green light for 'OFF'. The indication lights shall
be of the long life, low power consumption type, e.g. multi segment LED or neon.
.13 In addition to the required number of auxiliary contacts needed for the control and
indication circuits, each contactor and motor starter shall be provided with at least
one make and one break contact element, double gap, potential free, and wired
up to the auxiliary terminal block of the compartment.
2.9 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
.1 Instrument current transformers and their connections shall be in accordance with

IEC 60044-1 with a saturation factor such that the instruments are not
endangered at maximum fault current.
.2 When analog current transducers are required, they shall have an output signal of
4-2OmA.
.3 Accuracy class shall be in accordance with the design drawings. The short-circuit
rating shall be at least 1 second if applied for short-circuit protection. The wiring
of the secondary circuits shall have a cross section of at least 2.5mm 2.
Secondary terminal shorting-links shall be provided for every current transformer.
.4 Secondary circuits of all current transformers shall be earthed.
.5 Facilities shall be provided in the incoming protection Cts so that primary injection
tests on the Cts can be made after the main cable have been connected to the
switch panel without the necessity of dismantling the switch panel, such facilities
shall include the terminal block complete with test socket and test plug.
2.10 MOTOR PROTECTION
.1 The following motor protection devices where necessary, shall be provided as

appropriate.-
.1 Motor, starting protection relay (excessive start time or stalling).
.2 Motor thermal overload relay.
.3 Motor three-phase and earth fault protection relay.
.4 Unbalance or single-phasing relay.
.5 Undervoltage relay.
Integrated multi-function static relays may be used.
.2 Refer to Section 4-5: PROTECTION, METERING AND CONTROL for details.
2.11 MEASURING, INDICATING AND CONTROL DEVICES
.1 Where stated in the design drawings, the following measuring, indicating and
control devices shall be provided:
.1 Digital Power Meter
.2 Kilowatt-hour meter.
.3 Kilovar-hour meter.
SECTION 4-10
PAGE 15
.4 Ammeter.
.5 Voltmeter.
.6 Power factor meter.
.7 Indicating lamp.
.8 Timer.
.9 Control relay.
.10 Selector switch.
2.12 RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES
.1 Provide the type of residual current devices indicated in the Contract Documents.
2.13 TERMINALS FOR EXTERNAL CONDUCTORS
.1 Terminals shall be suitable for copper conductors.
.2 For main power circuit cabling, terminals allowing the conductors to be connected
without the use of cable lugs of any type are strongly preferred.
.3 In view of the substantial cable derating that is normally applied, adequate

terminals shall be provided for the main cabling.
.4 For bus wiring and outgoing control circuits, individual terminals shall be provided
for each external conductor. These terminals shall be of the non-loosening,
wedge type construction, obviating the use of cable lugs.
.5 They shall be constructed in such a way that direct contact between screw, bolt or
nut and conductor is avoided. For the termination of internal control wiring, push-
on connections with insulation support of the compression type may be used.
.6 Terminals shall be identified in accordance with the related wiring diagram. The
layout shall be consistent and logical.
.7 As a standard, assemblies shall have facilities for the entry of cables and busbar
trunkings from the top. Busbar trunking and cable entries, clamping, supporting
and earthing facilities shall be provided suitable for the type, size and number as
specified. Coordinate phase configuration of all busbar trunking connection to
switchboards.
.8 For wire-armoured cable without special earthing wires in or under the armouring,
metal gland plates and compression type cable glands shall be provided for earth
continuity.
.9 Cable glands for lead sheathed or armoured single-core cables shall allow for the
insulation of the lead sheathing or armouring from the gland plate. Moreover, the
gland plates and the individual cable soldering cones or glands or single-core
cables shall be of non-magnetic material.
SECTION 4-10
PAGE 16
2.14 SECONDARY WIRING, CORE IDENTIFICATION FERRULES AND TERMINALS
.1 Both ends of each conductor shall be provided with identification ferrules. The
ferrules shall be of insulating material which shall be unaffected by oil or moisture.
Characters shall be suitably marked in black. The ferrules shall be of the
continuous ring type, not of the slip-on type. Markings shall be in accordance with
the related manufacturer's drawings.
.2 For secondary wiring, PVC insulated interconnection wires shall be used. The size
and type of the wires to be selected shall be based on mechanical strength,
voltage levels and, especially for current circuits, on the prospective current
levels.
.3 The minimum allowable cross-sectional area of the wires shall be 1.0 mm 2. Wires
with a cross section bigger 1.5 mm 2 shall always be stranded.
.4 Current transformer secondary circuits with 5A rating shall be 2.5mm2 minimum.
.5 Colour coding of secondary wiring shall be in accordance with IEC 60446. Earth
wires shall be green/yellow striped. Wiring between two terminals shall be
continuous. Joints or interconnections are not allowed.
.6 For the manufacturer's internal panel wiring, other than bus wires, no more than 2
wires shall be connected under one terminal connection. Bus wires shall have
only one wire connected to each terminal.
.7 As a minimum requirement, use shall be made of rail-mounted terminals (TS 32

rail assembly) of high-grade Melamine. Partitions shall be fitted between
terminals for different voltages.
.8 Wiring ends of stranded conductors which have to be connected into bus-type

contacts of terminals, shall be provided with compression-type pre-insulated wire
pins with insulation support. In general, when lugs, wire pins, etc., are used, they
shall be of the compression type.
.9 For the termination of secondary wiring on components, compression-type pre-

insulated push-on connectors with insulation support may also be used.
.10 To accommodate and support the secondary wiring, covered plastic channels,
insulated tubes or plastic strips shall be used.
.11 Secondary wiring shall never be mounted direct to metal. The filling factor for
channels shall not exceed 70%. Where supporting of a wire is not feasible, the
wire or part of it shall be as short as possible.
.12 Termination compartments for auxiliary and control cables shall have adequate
dimensions, with ample accommodation for the required number of terminals.
Two or more conductor terminations on one terminal are not acceptable.
.13 Metal cable glands suitable for the cables specified shall be included in the supply
of the assembly.
.14 There shall be adequate marshalling space between the cable glands and the
terminal blocks.
.15 All current transformer terminals shall be provided with shorting links. Other
terminals shall be provided with disconnecting links.
.16 Test terminals and plugs shall be provided at the front of the protective relay and
instrument panel.
SECTION 4-10
PAGE 17
2.15 REMOTE MONITORING OF STATUS AND ALARMS
.1 For the purpose of remote monitoring and alarms additional auxiliary contacts
shall be provided for each circuit of the following:-
.1 LV Main Switchboard (per Circuit Breaker Panel)
.1 Circuit breaker ON/OFF/withdrawn status.
.2 Protection trip alarm (group).
.2 Automatic Transfer Switch
.1 Normal Supply.
.2 Emergency Supply.
2.16 EARTHING
.1 Earthing shall be in accordance with IEC 298, colour coding of protective

conductors in accordance with IEC 446.
.2 Equipment Earth Bar
.1 The equipment earth bar along the full length of the enclosure shall
consist of hard-drawn high conductivity copper. Where the substation
consists of 11kV switchgear, transformer and LV switchboard, the earth
bar shall be continuous along the full length of the substation. It shall be
connected to the main system earth bar at both ends using appropriate
size earthing bolts with nuts and spring washers. The cross-section of the
bar shall be sufficient to carry the rated short-time withstand current of the
switchgear for the allowable temperature rise and the time specified.
.3 Internal Branch Earth Connections
.1 Branch earth connections made from the equipment earth bar to the
components shall consist of adequately sized copper strips or
green/yellow striped PVC sheathed stranded copper conductor.
Termination lugs shall be of the compression type.
.4 Earthing of Metal Parts
.1 All metal parts including door, relays, instruments, etc., mounted on the
switchgear shall be earthed through branch connections to the equipment
earth bar.
.2 Frames of the draw-out circuit breakers shall be connected to the earth

bar through a substantial plug type contact.
2.17 NAMEPLATES, CIRCUIT LABELS AND PHASE MARKING
.1 General
.1 Nameplates and their fixing materials shall be proven durable under the
service conditions specified for the switchboard, motor control centre and
automatic transfer switch. They shall be moisture and rodent proof and
provided with indelible inscriptions in the language specified.
SECTION 4-10
PAGE 18
.2 Labels
.1 Circuit labels shall be provided at the front and rear portion of the
switchgear, automatic transfer switch etc. in a prominent position.
.2 Each panel shall be provided with labels including, but not limited to, the
following:-
.1 Indicator light functions.
.2 Push button functions.
.3 Fuses.
.4 Instruments.
.5 Protective relays.
.6 Warnings
.3 Phase Marking
.1 All busbar and power cable terminals shall be provided with

permanent phase markings. No tapes are permitted.
.4 Material
.1 The nameplates and labels shall as a minimum be made of a

corrosion-resistant material such as Resopal or Traffolyte.
.5 Fixing
.1 Nameplates shall be fixed to the switchboard motor control centre

and automatic transfer switch and its components by means of
proven durable self-threading screws or rivets in a prominent
position. Circuit label shall not be fitted on detachable doors or
covers.
.2 Holes for fixing shall not influence in any way the protection
degree of the enclosure.
.6 Colour
.1 Indicating labels shall be white.
.2 Instruction plates shall be yellow.
.3 Warning or caution plates shall be red.
.4 Inscriptions shall be black with the exception of the warning or

caution plates, which inscriptions shall be white.
2.18 FINISHING AND PAINTING
.1 All metal structures and sheet steel shall be adequately protected against
corrosion. Preparation of surfaces for painting shall be made complying with BS
7079. All mill scale, loose rust and welding slag, shall be removed by hand tools
and the metal surfaces shall be cleaned free from dirt, oil, grease, wax and other
contaminants.
SECTION 4-10
PAGE 19
.2 The sheet steel shall be zinc phosphate treated to a minimum thickness of 3.0
g/m2 prior to the application of paint.
.3 The manufacturer's standard is acceptable, if at least equivalent to using the

electrostatic spray process and oven-baked with:-
.1 One coat of stoving primer (zinc epoxy primer) of minimum thickness 30

microns,
.2 One coat of melamine resin paint of minimum thickness 30 microns,
.3 One final top coat of melamine paint of minimum thickness 15 microns.
Alternatively, the metal surfaces shall be coated with a layer of weather resistant
paint (epoxy polyacrylic for primer and top coat) via cathodic electro deposition
process. The dry film thickness shall be at least 35 microns.
.4 All panels shall have a consistent and matching paint finish. The final top
coat colour shall be light grey (Munsell Code N-7) or manufacturer's
standard colour subject to Employer Representative's approval.
.5 The assembly shall be treated in all respects to provide a lasting durability

under the specified service conditions.
.6 Repairs painting shall be done when there is development of any

detrimental film irregularity, such as lifting, loose, cracked, brittle or non-
adherent paint or discoloration after completion of painting.
.7 The equipment supplier shall submit detail of his painting system and
procedures for review and approval by the Employer's Representative.
2.19 LIGHTING INSIDE REAR PANEL
.1 1 x 18W fluorescent lighting complete with limit switch shall be provided inside
each compartment of LV Switchboards at the rear side (back access) for
maintenance purpose.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 LV SWITCHBOARD, MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE AND AUTOMATIC TRANSFER

SWITCHES INSTALLATION
.1 Prior to installation ensure that the room is free from construction debris and that
all cable ladders, HV cables, LV cables and control cables have been properly
installed in the switchboard room and ready for eventual connection to the
switchboards motor control centre and automatic transfer switches.
.2 Install the switchboard, motor control centre and automatic transfer switches in
accordance with this specification, the manufacturer’s instruction and within the
designated switchroom as shown in the design drawings.
.3 Coordinate with other specification Divisions to ensure the floor is sufficiently

level. Provide any AC power supply required.
.4 Install foundation channels such that they are flush with the floor.
.5 Positions bolt securely each panel of switchboard and motor control centre on the
foundation channel according to manufacturer’s recommendation. All
SECTION 4-10
PAGE 20
switchboards and motor control centres shall be installed level and plumb. Fronts
shall be lined up and must present a neat and orderly appearance.
.6 When installing main busbar and earth bars ensure that the joint surfaces are
clean before tightening bolts of the correct size. Provide permanent phase
identification on exterior of the enclosure matching the busbar phase
identification.
.7 For automatic transfer switches connect from auxiliary contact (closed before
switch returns to normal power) on transfer switch serving lift to each lift machine
room, which is served via the transfer switch. Terminate as and where required by
the lift vendor.
.8 For automatic transfer switches connect from auxiliary contact (closed before
switch moves to emergency position) on transfer switch serving lift to each lift
machine room, which is served via the transfer switch. Terminate as and where
required by the lift vendor.
.9 For automatic transfer switches connect from engine start contact on transfer
switch to emergency generator control panel.
.10 Insert withdrawable circuit breakers and check and adjust alignment. Check
alignment of auxiliary contacts.
.11 Complete and check inter-panel wiring and power and control wiring prior to pre-
commissioning.
.12 Upon completion of installation terminate all respective, control cables, bus ducts
into the switchboard respective terminals.
.13 replace all covers and prepare for pre-commissioning checks.
.14 Perform all inspections and tests as described in pre-commissioning tests.
.15 Certify that all the required tests have been performed and that the switchboards
and motor control centres are performing in accordance with the contract
requirements.
.16 Seal all the rear and top panel of the switchboard motor control centres and
automatic transfer switches using the prescribed seals.
.18 Provide relay coordination curves.
.19 Records shall be kept of installation works and submitted to the Employer’s
Representative.
.20 When terminating cable ensure that the joint surfaces are clean before tightening
bolts of the correct size with cable lugs.
.21 Padlock all the circuit breakers in the off-position and keep keys in the lockable
key cabinet.
.22 Carry out touch-up work on the paintwork of the switchboard, motor control centre
and automatic transfer switches and clean all surfaces.
.23 Secure the room by padlocking all the access doors.
3.2 CABLE INSTALLATION AND TERMINATION

SECTION 4-10
PAGE 21
.1 All power cable installation works shall be carried out after studying and
coordinating the recommendations of the cable manufacturer and the
switchboard, motor control centre and automatic transfer switch manufacturer.
.2 Busbar cable termination and units shall be installed on switchboard, at the
manufacturer’s works with busbar connection to the termination and unit.
.1 Switchboards, motor control centres, and auto transfer switches shall be packed
and delivered labelled in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Each packing shall be provided with the respective label as shown in the contract
drawings for easy identification at site. All interconnecting busbars, earth bars and
insulation material; / components etc. shall be packed separately. They shall be
securely packed to prevent any movement and damage during transport and
against tropical climatic conditions encountered during shipment.
.2 Lifting eyes shall be provided to facilitate lifting. Manufacturer shall provide

information for unpacking and lifting safely, including details of any special lifting
and positioning devices, which are necessary.
.3 Each switchboard, motor control centre and auto transfer switch shall be supplied
complete with:-
.1 Foundation channels
.2 Foundation bolts
.3 Interconnecting busbars and insulation materials, etc.
.4 Accessories
.5 On delivery to site, the switchboards motor control centre and automatic transfer
switches shall be stored indoor in a clean, dry an ventilated place. For prolonged
storage, panel anti-condensation heaters may have to be switched on to prevent
moisture condensation and consequent damage and mal-operation.
3.4 TESTS
.1 Full Type Tests
.1 Full type test shall be carried out in accordance with IEC 60439-1, IEC
60947-1 and IEC 60947-6-1. Certificates issued by approved independent
testing laboratories shall be submitted to the Employer’s Representative.
Type tests include the following:-
a) Verification of temperature-rise limits

b) Verification of the dielectric properties
c) Verification of the short-circuit withstand strength
d) Verification of the effectiveness of the prospective circuit
e) Verification of the clearances and creepage distances
f) Verification of the mechanical operation
g) Verification of the degree of protection
SECTION 4-10
PAGE 22
.2 Routine Tests
relevant routine tests in accordance with IEC 60439-1 on the total
assembly and IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-6-1 parts thereof when
delivered with time intervals, and the results shall be recorded in a test
report.
.3 Special Test
.1 Carry out the following special tests recommended in IEC 1641 Guide For
Testing Under Conditions of Arcing Due to Internal Fault, and the results
shall be recorded in a test report.
.1 Acceptance tests shall be carried out on the complete assembled

switchgear motor control centres and automatic transfer switches.
Transportable units can be wired together instead of completing busbar
joints.
.2 The following checks and tests shall at least be carried out.
.3 Switchgear motor control centres and automatic transfer switches shall

be visually inspected for technical execution and conformity with the latest
issue of the approved drawings and with the order. Spot checks shall be
made to verify:-
.1 Dimensions.
.2 The degree of protection of the enclosure.
.3 The degree of protection within the compartments.
.4 The effectiveness and reliability of safety shutters, partitions and

shrouds.
.5 The effectiveness and reliability of operating mechanisms, locks

and interlock systems.
.6 The insulation of the busbar system.
.7 The creepage distances and clearances.
.8 The proper mounting of components
.9 The internal wiring and cabling system
.10 The correct wiring of main and auxiliary circuits

arrangements
.12 The correct labelling of functional units
.13 The completeness of the data on the nameplate
.14 The availability of the earthing system throughout the switchgear
.15 The interchangeability of electrically identical components

SECTION 4-10
PAGE 23
.16 The non-interchangeability of mechanically identical but

electrically different components
.4 Dielectric test shall be carried out in accordance with IEC 60439-1. The
test voltage shall be at least:-
.1 For main circuits 2000V (AC) for 1 minute.
.2 For control and auxiliary circuits 2 x Un + 1000 V (AC) with a

minimum of 1500V for 1 second.

functional units on random basis, including their control and protective
devices.
.6 CT polarity, magnetization, ratio and burden measurements.
.7 Secondary injection tests.
.8 Primary injection tests.
.9 Painting and finishing tests.
.1 Measurement of paint thickness.
.2 Humidity (cyclic condensation) test to BS 3900 Pt. F2. Painted

panel shall withstand 1000 hours under test with no blistering of
film and corrosion of base metal.
.3 Adhesion test to AST D3359-05. Test tape shall not expose
more than one 3mm2 of bare metal or under laying coating.
.4 Impact resistance test to BS 3900 Pt. E7. Paint shall not chip-
off.
.10 The manufacturer test shall be verified abd witnessed by the Employer
5. Site Tests
.1 At the completion of installation, each switchboard, motor control centre

and automatic transfer switch shall be field tested by a representative of
the manufacturer. A report recording each item of the tests shall be
certified by the manufacturer and submitted to the Employer's
Representative.
.1 Correctness of location and mounting.
.2 Labelling, nameplates and phase markings.
.3 Verification of torque for all nuts and bolts on buswork.
.4 Observation of cable bracing, both incoming and

outgoing, certifying that it is in accordance with the
.5 Safety shutters, partitions and shrouds.

SECTION 4-10
PAGE 24
.6 Functional units, operating mechanisms, locks and

interlock systems.
.7 Mounting of components.
.8 Internal wiring and cabling system.
.9 Clamping, earthing and terminating arrangement.
.10 Earthing system.
.2 Dielectric test shall be carried out in accordance with IEC 60439-

1. The test voltages shall be at least:-
.1 For main circuits 2500V (AC) for 1 minute.
.2 For control and auxiliary circuits 2 x Un + 1000V (AC)

with a minimum of 1500V for 1 second.
.3 Power frequency withstand voltage test
.4 CT polarity, magnetization, ratio and burden measurement
.5 Secondary injection test
.6 Primary injection test
.7 Functional (Sequence) Test
.1 Operation of all relays and control devices.
.2 Operation of all indicating and metering devices.
.3 Operation of all alarm devices.
.8 Mechanical Operation Test
.1 Operation of each disconnecting means under load.
.2 Operation of each auto transfer switch.
.3 Operation of all interlocks.
.9 Calibration and setting of protection devices
3.5 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
Equip the substation room with the following miscellaneous items:-
.1 Danger sign, No Admittance signs etc.
.2 Artificial respiration (CPR) chart.
.3 Frame up latest approved As-Built schematic wiring diagram (A0 or A1 size) of

the switchboards.
.4 A 5mm thickbess and 1000 mm width rubber mat in front and at the back of the
entire length of the switchboard, motor control and automatic transfer switch.
SECTION 4-10
PAGE 25
.5 All the requisite labels.
.6 Approved fire detection and fire fighting apparatus.
.7 Earthing bar installation along the perimeter of the room connected to the main-
earth bed system.
equipment manufacturer (OEM) and the supply contractor.
3.7 HANDING-OVER AND EMPLOYER'S ACCEPTANCE
.2 Provide all keys.
END OF SECTION 4-10

EARTHING REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 4-12
PAGE 1
SECTION 4-12 – EARTHING REQUIREMENTS
1.0 General Requirements
All non-current carrying metal shall be effectively earthed through complete earthing systems
comprising earthing bars, copper rods, copper tapes and cables.
This section of the specification covers the supply installation and commissioning of such
equipment and in compliance with the requirements of BS 7430 and IEC 60364-5-54.
1.1 Equipment Earthing
Contractor shall allow and price for all the quantities of materials for earthing systems as shown
in the drawings. Should there be changes due to site conditions, the quantities of materials shall
be changed with necessary price adjustments (addition or deduction) in accordance with the rate.
Prices shall include all necessary measuring, making off, cutting, erecting, testing and supply of
all installation accessories.
Earth connections for all sections of the installation shall be ensured electrically continuous
throughout and shall adhere to the latest IEE Regulations of Electrical Installations to Buildings.
Copper tapes shall be run in symmetrical and square lines fixed to walls by gunmetal screw fixing
saddles at intervals not more than four (4) feet apart. To avoid unnecessary jointing, copper
tapes shall be supplied in long unbroken lengths.
Joints or mating surfaces shall be tinned before clamping soldered and rivetted and all
connections to electrical apparatus shall be made by a bolted connection in a visible and
accessible position.
Joints exposed to weather shall be protected by two coats of anti-corrosive paint followed by
taping with self adhesive polyvinyl chloride tape.
To enable easy testing and checking of the electrode systems, links shall be provided, for case of
isolation when required. Future connection ways to the main earth bar shall be provided.
1.2 Earthing System
The main earthing system for electrical equipment shall be direct earthing type. The main
earthing conductor shall be taken from the earthing terminal bar to the set of earthing electrodes.
Between these points, the main earthing conductor shall be run in as direct a manner as
possible, without lopping-in to any accessory or equipment.
Metallic piping of any water supply system, any portion of which is underground, installed within
the building shall be bonded with copper conductor of 10mm 2 to the main earthing conductor.
All other earthing conductors shall be connected directly or indirectly to the main earthing
conductor at any one or a combination of the following points.
a) An earthing bar provided specifically for the connection of earthing conductors and which
is directly connected to the main earthing conductor.
b) Any point on the main earthing conductor between the earth connection at the electrical
plant room and the earth electrode.
c) An earth bar, link or terminal at a distribution board provided specifically for the
connection of earthing conductors and where an earthing conductor is intended to
SECTION 4-12
PAGE 2
provide facilities for earthing at a distribution board, it shall not originate at another
distribution board.
d) Any point on an earthing conductor providing facilities for earthing at a distribution board.
1.3 Supplementary Earthing Protection
Current-operated earth-leakage circuit breakers or earth monitoring devices where specified,

shall be regarded as supplementary to the main earthing system. Such devices shall be installed
to the safety regulation and requirements of the supply Authority.
1.4 Copper Earthing Conductor
The minimum size of copper earthing conductor required for the protection of any portion of an
installation shall be determined in relation to the rating assigned to the circuit protection of the
largest active conductor protected by the earthing conductor in according to the following :-
___________________________________________________________________
Rating assigned to the circuit Minimum Size of
protection of active circuit conductor earthing conductor
(Amp)
___________________________________________________________________
Exceeding Not Exceeding mm2
___________________________________________________________________
- 75 2.5
75 100 4.0
100 150 6.0
150 200 10.0
200 250 16.0
250 300 25.0
300 350 35.0
350 400 50.0
400 475 70.0
475 550 95.0
550 - 120.0
___________________________________________________________________
1.5 General Earthing
All non-current metal of equipment in this works shall be permanently bonded effectively to the
earthing arrangement comprising of cables, copper tapes, copper rods in accordance to
specification and current electricity regulations.
The metal enclosures, sheathing and armouring of cables, metal conduits and all parts of a
metallic conduit system enclosing conductors and metal boxes and accessories forming part of a
wiring system, shall be earthed.
The earthing contact of every plug socket provided with an earthing contact shall be earthed.
An earthing conductor, connected to a terminal or suitably insulated and enclosed, shall be

provided at every switch and lighting point.
1.6 Earth Electrodes

SECTION 4-12
PAGE 3
Earth earthing point shall consist of 16mm diameter extensible hard drawn copper electrodes to
required depth where necessary. Earth continuity conductors 1” x 1/8” copper tapes and
stranded cables of adequate size shall be buried not less than 1’ 6” below ground level.
The contractor shall be expected to make resistivity tests to determine the number of electrodes
required. No claims for additional earth electrodes shall be permitted. The resistance of the
combined earth electrodes shall be less than 0.1 ohm.
1.7 Installation of Earthing
a) Position, Fixing and Protection of Earthing Conductors
All earthing conductors shall be so located, fixed or protected that they are not likely to
be displaced, damaged or cut; fixing shall be by means of clamps, clips, saddles,
stapples, etc. which shall not in any way damage the conductor. Fixing devices shall not
pass between the strands of the earthing conductor.
b) Buried Earthing Conductor
Where an earthing conductor is buried, it shall be protected mechanically in the same

manner as insulated cables installed under similar conditions. An earthing conductor
passing through a wall or partition shall not be considered as a buried earthing
conductor. Copper earthing conductors buried direct in the ground shall be of a covered
type or insulated.
c) Joints in Earthing Conductors
Joints shall not be permitted except with written approval by the S.O.
Joints in earthing conductors where permitted shall be made by soldering, clamping or

crimping, in accordance with approved means, provided that any joint in a main earthing
conductor not larger than 16mm shall be a soldered joint.
Soldered joints shall be so made that the earthing conductors are retained in position by
approved means, independently of the solder.
For clamp joints, the conductors shall be clamped securely between metal surfaces, so
shaped or arranged as to prevent spreading of any conductor strands. Unless firmly held
in an approved solderless tag or other terminating device, conductors not larger than
4mm shall be twisted together before clamping.
Tunnel-type cable connectors having clamping-screws which are in direct contact with
the conductor shall be such that the conductor is clamped by not less than two screws.
Tunnel type connectors which are so arranged that the conductor is clamped by means
of suitable ferrules or plates may utilize one clamping screw only. Where earthing
conductors are jointed at fixed terminals in equipment such as junction boxes, links and
plug sockets, clamping of the joint by one clamping screw shall be permissible.
For crimped joints, the conductor shall be firmly crimped in an approved ferrule. The
crimp shall be made by the use of a tool approved for the purpose.
1.8 Earth Name Plate
An earth name plate shall be provided to the supply authorities requirements at the main earthing
bar neat the main switchboard giving date and value of earth resistance obtained.
SECTION 4-12
PAGE 4
1.9 Locations of Earth Electrodes and Conductor Runs
It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to check site conditions and advise the S.O. and
install earth electrodes and conductor runs prior to casting of floor slabs.
1.10 Inspection Chamber
All earth electrodes shall be provided with a steel/concrete inspection chamber installed flush
with the surface. The material suitability of the steel inspection chamber shall be dependent on
the location of the electrodes. Care shall be taken to avoid locating electrodes in the middle of
driveways where the Inspection chamber may be frequently damaged by heavy vehicles.
END OF SECTION 4-12

FIBRE OPTIC CABLE
SECTION 4-15
PAGE 1
1.0 Introduction
The installation of 62.5/125 micron multimode and 8.3/125 micron single mode fibre optic
cable to support data communication services shall be considered.
The following specifications for the selection and installation of fibre optic cable and
associated hardware are intended to ensure a reliable and consistent fibre optic media
infrastructure for the telephone services.
2.2 Single mode Fibre

Installed cable shall be 8.3/125micron core/cladding, single mode, and graded index glass
fibre. All materials in the cable are to be dielectric.
2.2.1 Performance
Installed fibre must meet or exceed the following performance specifications.
Fibre cable types Wavelength (nm) Max. Attn. (dB/Km)
Single mode, Indoor 1,310 1.0
1,550 1.0
Single mode, Outdoor 1,310 0.35
1,550 0.2
2.2.2 Cable Construction

Riser or plenum rated cable shall be used for all interior installations. Installed cable shall
meet or exceed the following specifications:
2.2.2.1 Riser or Plenum (Indoor Cable)

Riser cable shall be used for all interior installations and shall meet the following
specifications:
a. Tight buffered 900 um, mechanical strippable Teflon.
b. EIA/TIA -598 color coding for fiber optic cable.
c. Aramid yarn strength member, capable of supporting a short-term tensile load of 400
lb. without stretching.
d. Capable of bend radii as small as 20 x outside cable diameter (under installation load)
and 10 x outside cable diameter (long term load).
e. Capable of a minimum crush resistance of 850 lb./in.

FIBRE OPTIC CABLE
SECTION 4-15
PAGE 2
2.2.2.2 Outdoor Cable

Outdoor cable shall be used for all applications where cable is to be run in underground
conduits. Outdoor cable may not be used for interior applications and shall meet the
following specifications:
a. Gel filled buffer tube, 250 um, acrylate.
b. EIA/TIA -598 color coding for fibre optic cable.
c. Flooded core
d. Capable of bend radii as small as 20 x outside cable diameter (under installation load)
and 10 x outside cable diameter (long term load).
e. Capable of a minimum crush resistance of 850 lb./in.
2.2.3 Recommended Suppliers

Cable from specific manufacturers will be considered. All cable installed must be approved
brand by Telekom Malaysia Berhad prior to installation.
3.0 Installation Standards
3.1 Underground Inter-Building Cable

All fibre cable is to be protected with inner duct. After installation, inner ducts are to be
permanently labelled as containing fibre optic cable.
All cable and inner duct are to be fully supported throughout its entire run.
At no time shall more than 400 pounds of tension be placed on any fibre cable while it is
being pulled through tray or conduit. It is preferred that all fibre cable be pulled with hand
power only. If power winches or mechanical advantage devices are used to pull cable, a
tensionometer must be used to insure that maximum tension is not exceeded. Alternatively,
a "mechanical fuse" rated at 350 pounds may be included in the linkage. Torsion shall be
avoided by the use of a swivel at the cable end. While under tension, a minimum bend
radius of 20 times the outside cable diameter will be maintained through the use of pulleys
and sheaves where required. After pulling, no bend may have a radius, at rest, of less than
10 times the outside cable diameter.
3.1.1 Labelling
Each cable and inner duct is to be permanently labelled at each end with a unique cable
number. In addition, labels shall be affixed to the cable/inner duct at every transition of a
vault, hand hole, riser closet, or major pull box.
Each fibre optic strand shall be labelled with a unique identifier at the ST coupler in the FIC.
Connectors shall be labelled on the identifying sheets on the front of the FIC.
Each fibre shall be labelled where it enters the back of the coupler panels. The identifier
shall be in the format Cable # - tube- strand. For tight buffered cables the "tube identifier"
shall be "xx".
FIBRE OPTIC CABLE
SECTION 4-15
PAGE 3
3.1.2 Conduit Assignments

The Consultant has designeda conduit management system. Scopes of Work for cable
installation, supplied by the Consultant for each project, will specify which conduits are to be
used for cable installation.
4.0 Termination Standards

The terminal ends of all fibers cable strands shall be field connectorized. The connectors
shall be mounted on bulkheads and installed in enclosures called Fibre Integration Centers
(FIC). It is a common practice to terminate both ends of all fibres within a fibre cable with ST,
epoxy and polish style connectors. Termination of older cables may be of several types
including mechanical or fusion spliced pigtails. The choice of termination method must be
cleared with Telekom Malaysia Berhad prior to termination.
4.1 Fiber Organizers

Fiber cables are to be terminated in one of two types of enclosures. The Consultant may
specify either wall-mounted or rack-mountable stand-alone units for installation. Rack
mounted units made by ADC, Avaya, or an equivalent, will be acceptable. The final choice of
fiber organizer shall be cleared with the Consultant prior to installation.
Each enclosure shall be labelled with a machine made label with permanent black ink on a
white background. Labels shall be in the format "FIC_NN", with the numbers, "NN". In
addition, each FIC shall be labelled on the face plate with the identifiers of the cables it
contains.
Each fibre optic strand shall be labelled with a unique identifier at the ST coupler in the FIC.
Connectors shall be labelled on the identifying sheets on the front of the FIC. Each fibre shall
be labelled where it enters the back of the coupler panels. The identifier shall be in the
format Cable #-tube- fibre strand #. For tight buffered cables the “tube identifier” shall be
“xx”.
4.2 Connectors and Splices

Fibre ends are to be terminated in ST-type connectors with composite ferrules. They must
be of the "epoxy and polish". Exceptions may occur when an older UCB installation is being
expanded. Some older locations are terminated with connectors such as biconic.
If it is necessary to splice pigtails onto an existing, partially terminated fibre cable, the splice
type utilized must conform to whatever is already in use at that location.
4.3 Miscellaneous
At each end of the cable, sufficient slack (15 - 30') shall be left to facilitate reasonable future
relocation of the FIC. Slack shall be mounted on walls or upper ladder racks according to
IST’s direction.
FIBRE OPTIC CABLE
SECTION 4-15
PAGE 4
5.0 Testing
5.1 Before Installation

It is suggested that each individual fibre in a cable be tested with an OTDR for length and
transmission anomalies while on the reel before installation.
5.2 After Installation and termination
5.2.1. All single mode and multi mode fibre strands shall be tested end-to-end for bi-
directional attenuation, 850 nm/1300 nm for multimode and 1310 nm/1550 nm for single
mode fibres. Tests should be conducted in compliance with EIA/TIA-526-14 or OFSTP 14,
Method B, according to the manufacturer’s instructions for the test set being utilized.
5.2.2. Tests must ensure that the measured link loss for each strand does not exceed the
“worst case” allowable loss defined as the sum of the connector loss (based on the number
of mated connector pairs at the EIA/TIA-568 B maximum allowable loss of 0.75 dB per
mated pair) and the optical loss (based on the performance standard above, 2.1.1 and 2.2.1).
5.2.3. After the cable is in place it shall be tested in the following manner:
a. After termination, each fibre shall be tested with an ODTR for length, transmission
anomalies, and end-to-end attenuation. Results are to be recorded and supplied to
CNS in the form of hard-copy printouts or photographs of screen traces.
b. After termination and bulkhead mounting, each terminated fibre is to be tested for
end-to-end loss with a power meter/light source. As above, results are to be recorded
and supplied to CNS.
c. The maximum allowable attenuation for any splice or termination is 0.3 dB.
5.2.4. The contractor shall review all end faces of field terminated connectors with a fibre
inspection scope following the final polish. Connector end faces with hackles, scratches,
cracks chips and or surface pitting shall be rejected and repolished or replaced if repolishing
will not remove the end face surface defects. The recommended minimum viewing
magnifications for connector ends are 100X for multimode fibre and 200X for single mode
fibre.
SATELLITE MASTER TELEVISION SYSTEM
SECTION 4-17
PAGE 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Manufacturer, test at works, deliver to site, install, test and commission HD Satellite
Master Antenna Television (SMATV) System in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
.1 Antenna / Satellite
.2 Headed amplifier / Booster amplifier
.3 Power supply unit
.4 Trunk and drop in distribution coaxial cable
.5 Multi-splitter / Multi-Tap / 9x4 Multi-switch / 9x8 Multi-switch
.6 SAT/TV/FM outlet units
.7 Lightning surge suppressors
.8 Other necessary items for a complete installation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Tender Stage
Technical data, specification and product catalogues.
.2 Design Stage
- Design calculations
- Method of analysis
- Details cabling plans showing calculated signal level at each SAT/TV/FM wall
outlet and signal drop along each segment of the cabling, equipment
attenuation levels should also be incorporated etc.
- Inspection and acceptance testing at Manufacturer’s works
- Type test and routine test reports prior to acceptance tests
- Acceptance test reports after tests
- Packaging, transportation and storage notes
- Site installation and commissioning
- Installation and testing manual
- Site and commissioning test procedures
- Site and commissioning test records
- O&M manuals
The SMATV system installation shall confirm to requirements of qualified designs and as
supported by engineering reports. It shall comply with the CE (Continental Europe)
standard of broadcasting.
Install the SMATV system as required by these Contract Documents and make sure it is
accepted for the use of the client.
Manufacturer shall have at least 10 years experiences in the manufacturer of similar

equipment.
Manufacturer shall have full parts back up and normal service availability for this
equipment.
SECTION 4-17
PAGE 2
2.0 PRODUCT
2.1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENT
.1 GENERAL
The SMATV System shall enable reception of television signal transmitted by the
following:-
- RTM 1 and RTM 2
- TV3
- NTV 7
- 8TV
- TV9
- Satellite TV (HD Astro)
The system shall be continuously rated and shall not degrade through time.
It shall be designed for transmission of signals in the VHF and UHF band.
All the television signal in the system shall have approximately equal signal
strength despite the fact that the site reception of one channel may be weaker as
compared to the other channels.
The signal at each receiver shall be free from “snow”, “ghost” effect and others
interference. The signal level limits at any wall outlet throughout the system for TV
shall be at minimum 63 dBμV and maximum 77 dBμV. For radio the signal level
limits shall be at minimum 57dBμV and maximum 69dBμV. The signal to noise
ratio must be greater than 47dB.
All components used in the system shall be electrically and physically matched to
prevent discontinuity in the system. Input and output impedance of all components
used must be 75ohms.
The required channel signals shall pass out the system into the television
receivers, but interference cannot pass from the receiver back into system.
Adequate, safety precaution must be taken to ensure that if any set connected to
the system goes defective, it is not possible for dangerous voltages to get on to
the system.
This safety measures must be built-in and effective in case of either accidental
failures or deliberate tampering.
Any booster required to match with the signal strength within the specified limit
throughout the system should be installed.
.2 ANTENNA / SATELLITE
The contactor should carry out necessary site survey to determine signal strength
available on each channel and to check for possible interference and ghosting.
This will enable the selection of the required wide band antenna for installation.
The contractor shall propose a location of the roof of lift machine room, where the
signal level is sufficiently strong for reception of above transmission.
SECTION 4-17
PAGE 3
The antenna should be securely mounted at favourable position to enable

reception of maximum signal strength. The antenna should be situated in a
direction to produce a clear picture free of multiple images and interference.
Disturbances due to reflection of transmitted signals should also be taken into
consideration when positioning the antenna.
The centre of gravity of the antenna shall be well designed to minimum wind load
effects and to give the installation greater strength to withstand storms. The cross-
arm and elements shall be of high strength aluminium alloy.
The roof-mounted outdoor antennas shall have high gain, directivity, flatness of
response, high front-to-back ratios, matched output over the entire band and
constructed of material not susceptible to rusting or other form of corrosion due to
local weather condition. In this respect the antenna shall have at least 8dB gains
and minimum 12dB front-to-back ratios.
The outdoors antennas shall be rigidly supported on an antenna pole and brackets
securely mount to any suitable structures / surfaces. The antenna pole and
brackets should be able to withstand the weight of the antennas and shall be able
to withstand the corrosion factor due to local weather condition to a certain
satisfactory limit.
The antenna shall be capable to receive UHF and VHF for Malaysia’s TV
channels covering the whole of CCIR Band frequencies ranging from 40MHz to
2150MHz. Each antenna system shall consist of one aerial each to receive RTM1,
RTM2, TV3, NTV7, 8TV, TV9 and Satellite TV.
.3 Broadband Amplifier
The system must be multi-purpose, fully tropicalized, compact and modular type
suitable for all type of SMATV installation.
The UHF range shall be at least between 470MHz to 862MHz. The channels shall
be tuned to Band IV and Band V.
The VHF range shall be at least between 174MHz to 230MHz and channels shall
be tuned to Band III.
The Satellite range shall be at least between 862MHz to 2150MHz and channels
shall be tunable accordingly. The LNB must be of Quattro type.
The top channels amplifier must be as possible to the antenna, mounted in a

weatherproof lockable steel cabinet.
The cabinet shall be fabricated from 16-gauge sheet and finished with rust
resistant paint. It shall be wall mounted, adequately sized (extra space for logical
future expansion) and provided with louvers allowing adequate heat dissipation so
that components can operate within manufacturer’s specified ambient operation
temperature.
The broadband amplifier shall be designed for 24 hours operation and fully
tropicalized.
SECTION 4-17
PAGE 4
.4 Multi-Splitter / Multi-Tap
The multi-splitters shall be of an indoor wall mounted type and are built-up in all
metal chassis provided with metal cover. The multi-splitters shall be of high quality
and low losses. One-way multi-taps and two-way multi-splitters of 8 SAT-IF
polarizations and 1 Terrestrial-TV signal. Application in 9-cable systems as well as
in 17-cable systems by using two units per level.
The multi-splitters / multi-taps shall be installed in the riser.
The tee units shall be of the outdoor (weatherproof) wall mounted type and are
build-up in all metal chassis provided with metal cover. The tee-units shall be of
high quality and low losses and shall be installed along the corridor.
End of line tee unit shall be of a terminated type.
All these units shall be housed in a metal casing with hinged lockable door.
.5 Cascadeable 9x4 or 9x8 multi-switches
9x4 multi-switch amplification of 8 SAT-IF polarizations will need to compensate

for the distribution losses in 9-cable distribution systems. Two launch amplifiers
can be used to amplify 16 SAT-IF polarizations in 17-cable systems. Cascadeable
with multi-switches RC-9000 and other 9-cable system components.
Continuous attenuation and equalization adjustments with local DC powering done

using the PSU-015 power supply. Power voltage should stand on the 8 SAT input
ports for line-powering LNBs and may be inserted on the 8 SAT output ports for
line-powering possible RL-9100/9200 line amplifier. Three LEDs to inform about
power connection and +15V DC presence at the input and output ports.
Furthermore the 9x4 multi-switch can either be indoor mounting or wall fixing.
The 9x8 multi-switch needs to be a cascadeable multi-switch for 9-cable systems

with distribution of 8 SAT-IF polarization and 1 terrestrial-TV signal. There are
eight tap lines per multi-switch, 4 models for 4 levels of tap loss and slopped
response for satellite frequencies.
All models must support DiSEqC 2.0 commands and are compatible with voltage /
tone / ToneBurst switching signals. Presence of DC passing between input and
output SAT lines. The 9x8 multi-switch can either be indoor mounting or wall fixing.
.6 Distribution Cable
Distribution cables shall be radio-frequency coaxial type having characteristic

impedance of 75ohms and able to carry signal up to 2300MHz or more.
The loss of signal strength due to the cable shall not exceed 6dB per 100 meter
length over the frequency range specified. However, larger low-loss cables will be
required for the main feeder lines as determined by the system requirements.
Proper plugs and sockets shall be used for cable terminations.

SECTION 4-17
PAGE 5
.7 Outlet Unit
The wall outlets (TV, FM and SAT) should be suitable for all FM, TV and SAT
receivers. A flush mounted plastic outlet boxes shall be supplied and installed in
each outlet location.
Each outlet shall be incorporated with an isolating capacitor to protect both

receiver and distribution system from dangerous voltages generated in the event
of a fault.
.8 Surge Protector
It shall be outdoor type with F-type connector.
Frequency range shall be 40 to 862MHz at least.
Impedance shall be 75ohms.
2.2 EXECUTION
.1 TESTS
- Type Tests
Perform all relevant type tests at works for all equipment. Certificates issued
by acceptable independent testing laboratories shall be submitted to the
- Routine Tests
Before the products leave the works, the manufacturer shall carry out the
delivered with time intervals and the results shall be recorded in a test report.
- Acceptance Tests at Manufacturer’s Works
Acceptance tests shall be carried out on the completely assembled units.
- Site Tests
After installation of the system and prior to handling over to the employer, the
Contractor shall be required to test the system in the presence of the
Employer’s Representative and the signal levels should be in accordance to
the calculated values at close tolerances. If it is found to be out of the
specified range, the Contractor shall take remedial action to rectify and
improve the system. All measuring and testing equipment should be provided
by the Contractors.
.2 PACKING FOR TRANSPORAT AND HANDLING
The MATV System shall be packed and delivered approximately labelled in

accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Each shall be provided
with the respective label as shown in the Contract Documents for easy
identification at site. They shall be securely packed to prevent any movement and
damage during transport and against tropical climatic conditions encountered
during transportation.
SECTION 4-17
PAGE 6
Manufacturer shall provide information for unpacking and lifting safety, including
details of any special lifting and positioning devices, which are necessary.
On arrival at site, the consignment shall be checked against the delivery notes.
.3 STORAGE
On delivery to site, the MATV System shall be stored indoor in a clean, dry and
ventilated place. For prolonged storage, anti-condensation heaters shall be used
to prevent moisture condensation and consequent damage and mal-operation.
.4 INSTALLATION
Install all equipment and complete cabling in accordance with design requirements
and manufacturer’s instruction.
.5 O&M MANUALS
Each MATV System shall be provided with a set of schematic drawings of the
components installed in the units. All wirings, schematic and layout drawings shall
be submitted for approval of the Employer’s Representative. Instruction manuals
for the installation, operation and maintenance of the MATV System shall be in
accordance with the general requirements of the specification.
.6 TRAINING OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE STAFF
Provide training schedule and agenda and list of instructors from original
equipment anufacturers (OEM) and the trader contractor.
Provide classroom training.
Provide field training with demonstration on operation, maintenance and trouble

shooting.
Review O&M Documentation and Test Results.
Review Spare Part List.
.7 HANDING-OVER AND EMPLOYER’S ACCEPTANCE
Endorse defects list.
Provide all keys.
Provide “Certificate of Readiness” for the hand-over.

IMPLEMENTATION OF TESTING AND ADJUSTING, COMMISSIONING,
HANDOVER - EMPLOYER ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURE
SECTION 4-20
PAGE 1
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1 The importance of the management of the test and adjust/commissioning/

handover - employer acceptance procedure must be emphasized.
.2 Successful operation of a completed facility involves a staged sequence of testing,

witnessing, training and information delivery to the employer by the contractor. The
end result is a completed facility with an employer being confident of the proper
installation of operating system, meeting the full intent of the contract drawings and
specifications; such systems successfully operated and demonstrated; and
operating personnel fully trained with detailed as-built drawings and operation and
maintenance manuals on hand allowing confidence in the ability to operate and
maintain the facility.
.3 The accompanying information presented is in the form of a "Commissioning

Manual".
.4 The "Commissioning Manual" is intended to provide a common framework of

standards and employer expectations across the project. It is not substitute for
individual project specification requirements. It is, however, a minimum standard
that all contractors must recognize as complementing the specifications, providing
a framework for facility completion and employer Certificate of Practice
Completion.
.5 This manual, with its suggested minimum requirements and handover procedures,
is required of each contractor.
2.0 TASK DEFINITIONS
.1 Task Description
.1 Commissioning Manager - The general contractor shall appoint a qualified

and experienced Commissioning Manager for the management, planning,
coordination and implementation of the process described in this Manual.
Contractor to submit his C.V. to the Employer’s Representative for
approval.
.2 The Commissioning Manager shall prepare a detailed and comprehensive

commissioning programme and event schedule. The schedule shall be
submitted no later than ten months prior to the contract completion date.
The schedule shall be based on the input of the trade contractors and sub-
contractors own detailed programmes and schedules. The overall
schedule shall include (for each trade) main activity items and duration
identified within the major components of:
.1 Pre-commissioning / installation testing as required by

specification and by the code authority.
.2 Final snagging/defect clearance.
.3 Commissioning (system operation, test and adjust).
.4 Employer and operator Training/Documentation Submittal.
.5 Hand over
SECTION 4-20
PAGE 2
.3 Progress measured against this schedule shall be monitored by the

Commissioning Manager and shall identify critical path network items by
other trades which could impact/delay progress. Such impact / delay shall
be highlighted on the event schedule with the schedule revised as
necessary to maintain progress.
.4 The Commissioning Manager shall call regular commissioning team

meetings. The meetings shall be minuted with action items and
responsibility clearly identified. Weekly meetings shall be required for the
final six months of construction for each facility. Meeting minutes (and
progress against the event schedule) shall be reported to the Employer’s
Representative.
.5 The Commissioning Manager shall ensure each major trade contractor

appoints a person responsible for progressing commissioning. Such a
person may typically be the trade contractor’s project manager. In any
event, such person shall have the authority to progress decisions taken
within the text of commissioning. Each trade contractor’s designated
commissioning manager’s name shall be reported to the Employer’s
Representative.
.6 The Commissioning Manager shall be responsible for and shall maintain

the snagging / defects tracking system from contract initiation to
completion.
.7 The Commissioning Manager shall coordinate with the Employer’s

Representative.
.8 The Employer’s Representative shall be invited to attend all

commissioning team meetings called by the Commissioning Manager.
.9 The Commissioning Manager shall obtain from Employer’s Representative

the Employer’s designated operations personnel names and
responsibilities prior to the start of required system training and coordinate
the training schedule with the Employer’s Representative.
.10 Commissioning Specialist - A trade contractor may elect to source start-

up and handover by a specialist commissioning company. In some cases,
at least a portion of the commissioning work (air and water balance for
instance) is required to be performed by independent contractors.
.11 If a trade contractor elects to hire a specialist company, the details

of such company must be reported to the Employer’s
Representative prior to such company starting work. Details to be
submitted include personnel with relevant project experience, previous
similar assignments, scope of work to be undertaken on this assignment,
company resources and equipment.
.12 Use of a Commissioning specialist by a trade-contractor shall not relieve

the Commissioning Manager of his obligation to name one of his own
employees as the person responsible for progressing commissioning.
.13 The Commissioning Manager shall
.1 Inform the Employer’s Representative the required witnessing of

installation and commissioning tests at least 24 hours before
hand.
SECTION 4-20
PAGE 3
.2 Submit the commissioning documentation, as-built drawings

operation and maintenance manuals, test data, etc. for Employer
Representative to review.
.14 Trade Contractor
.1 The trade contractor shall appoint a responsible manager for the

implementation of the commissioning process described in this
Manual. He shall prepare a trade specific commissioning
programme and event schedule for submission to the
Commissioning Manager. He shall work closely with the
Commissioning Manager to help develop the-overall
commissioning programme.
.2 Progress against his trade specific schedule shall be reported to

the Employer’s Representative prior to each scheduled
commissioning team meeting. Slippage shall be reported with the
intended means to recover to the Employer’s Representative.
Commissioning delay without an intended work programme to
recover the delay is not acceptable.
.3 The trade contractor commissioning manager charged with the

responsibility to fulfill the obligations imposed by this
commissioning manual.
.1 Trade Specific Commissioning Programme
2.1 TYPICAL ACTIVITIES TO BE DESCRIBED WITHIN A COMMISSIONING PROGRAMME
.1 Important Note
.1 The following list is NOT EXHAUSTIVE. It is intended to highlight some of

the main items required to be included in the commissioning/ handover
programme.
.2 The list shall be expanded by the contractor to cover the specific detailed
needs of individual buildings and their systems.
.3 The following lists are indicative of activity main items required to be

included for each facility commission / handover programme. Although
not specifically listed, such programmes are required for site work utilities
and area development work packages.
.2 Electrical Services
.1 Electrical Systems
.1 Power to Employer HV Systems
.2 Power to LV Systems
.3 Power to Mechanical Plant
.4 Power to Building Control System
.5 Power to Elevator Installation

SECTION 4-20
PAGE 4
.6 Power to Fire Alarm System
.7 Power to Security System
.8 Test/Commission Bus bar Systems
.9 Test/Commission MCCs
.10 Generator Load Testing
.11 Emergency Systems Tests
.12 Generator Fuel System Tests
.13 Earthing Tests
.14 Lightning Protection System Tests
.15 PA System
.16 MATV System
.17 UPS System
.3 General Activities
.1 Employer Training Date (By System)
.2 Power on Dates (By System)
.3 Employer Witnessing/Demonstration (By System)
.4 Operating and Maintenance Manual Submission
.5 Statutory Inspections
.6 Insurance Certification
.7 Drainage System Tests
.8 Environmental Tests
3.0 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
.1 Required Action
.1 Specific Testing During Construction
.1 Contractor to schedule, notify the Employer’s Representative prior

to specified test.
SECTION 4-20
PAGE 5
.2 Employer’s Representative shall confirm schedule after being

notified by the Commissioning Manager.
.3 The Employer’s Representative shall be the witness. The

Commissioning Manager to sign documentation.
.4 Commissioning Manager to log and maintain signed Test

Certificates. One copy to Contractor for inclusion in Operating and
Maintenance Manuals.
.2 Local Authorities Testing
.1 During construction.
.2 After commissioning to prove performance to code requirements.
.3 Contractor to provide preliminary schedule, notify Commissioning

Manager prior to scheduled test/demonstration.
.4 For completed system, prior to scheduling the Local Authorities,

the Contractor shall furnish a "Certificate of Compliance" to the
Commissioning Manager. The Commissioning Manager may then
confirm the schedule.
.5 Commissioning Manager to confirm schedule, notify all parties.

Notify and confirm schedule with Local Authorities after
Employer’s Representative approval that test / performance
demonstration may proceed.
.6 Commissioning Manager and Employer’s Representative to attend

with the Local Authorties. Commissioning Manager to provide and
secure Local Authorities signature on required document.
.3 Commissioning / Start-Up / Test / Adjust / Balancing
.1 Contractor to verify system is complete, disengaged and ready for

test and balance. Contractor to submit to the Employer’s
Representative (through the Commissioning Manager) detailed
proposals for test and balance procedures four (4) weeks prior to
scheduling such tests. Reporting formats outlined in this Manual
shall be used.
.2 Commissioning Manager to field verify Contractor’s verification of

system completeness. Commissioning Manager to notify
Contractor to proceed.
.3 Contractor to schedule, notify Employer’s Representative prior

prior to schedule testing / balancing.
.4 Commissioning Manager to notify Employer’s Representative that
procedure is ready to proceed.
.5 Employer’s Representative to witness Contractor is doing properly.
.6 Commissioning Manager to log and maintain signed test and

balance data. One copy to Employer’s Representative for
verification and approval for inclusion in Operation and
Maintenance Manual.
SECTION 4-20
PAGE 6
.2 Test Equipment
.1 General Requirements
All field test instruments to be used on the works shall comply with the
following:
.1 Be complete with calibration certificate not more than 6 months

old and issued by a recognised independent testing authority.
.2 Copies of calibration certificates together with instrument serial

numbers shall be submitted to the General Contract
Commissioning Manager prior to their use on site.
.3 Be free from damage, or if damaged during use shall be

recalibrated.
.4 Be complete with all manufacturer’s instructions.
.5 Instructions shall be carried at all times by the personnel

conducting the test/balance procedure.
.6 The following schedules indicate the suggested basic types of

equipment required for testing of air and water systems. The
Contractor shall provide detailed inventories of all equipment held
at site (prior to use) to the Commissioning Manager. Such
inventory lists shall be submitted by the Commissioning Manager
to the Employer’s Representative for approval prior to use.
.2 After Commissioning to Prove Compliance with

Local Authorities Requirements
.2 Commissioning / Start-up / Test / Adjust and Balance
.2 After Commissioning Requirements
.5 Commissioning / Start-up / Test / Adjust and Balance
4.0 IMPLEMENTATION / DESCRIPTION
.1 The snagging system shall be maintained by the Commissioning Manager from

contract initiation to completion.
.2 All input to this system shall be coordinated through the Commissioning Manager.
.3 Additionally each snagging report, regardless of whomever generated shall be

copied to the Employer’s Representative. The Employer’s Representative shall
SECTION 4-20
PAGE 7
periodically check that all snags have been properly documented by the
Commissioning Manager.
.4 The snagging system also is used to define outstanding/incomplete work. Thus
the snagging report becomes the single document allowing the Employer to
monitor progress towards completion.
.5 Additionally, a thorough log allows the Employer’s Representative a rational basis

to judge both the progress of the work and payment for same.
4.1 TASK DESCRIPTION
.1 Commissioning Manager
.1 The Commissioning Manager shall maintain the overall Defect Control

Log. All input to the system shall be coordinated through him.
.2 He shall maintain the log and report on a regular basis to the Employer’s
Representative.
.3 No defect shall be cleared from the report log until it has been signed by
the Contractor, the organisation initiating the snag, and the Employer’s
Representative.
.4 Two defect logs shall be maintained. The main log showing all defects
shall be maintained in a complete form.
.5 A supplement log shall be maintained which is printed from the main log.
.6 Provide an outstanding defects list.
.7 Print out the defects by trade.
.8 The Commissioning Manager shall ensure that disengaging is

accomplished by the responsible trade contractor. The Commissioning
Manager shall hold regular review meetings with each trade contractor's
project manager. The defect log shall be reviewed with the trade
contractor and specified dates agreed for defect clearance.
.9 If a trade contractor becomes seriously arrears in his defect clearance, the

Commissioning Manager shall report such to the Employer’s
Representative.
.10 Defect clearance performance should be incorporated into the

Contractor's recommendation for each trade contractor's monthly
application for payment.
.11 Handover procedures to the Employer’s Representative shall not be
implemented by the Commissioning Manager until that trade contractor’s
outstanding defects list has been reduced to a minimum.
5.0 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
.1 General
.l The Trade Contractors shall provide the specified number of O&M

Manuals.
SECTION 4-20
PAGE 8
.2 The manuals shall be submitted to the Commissioning Manager initially in

draft format for employer review a minimum of ten (10) weeks before
intended demonstration / handover. The final version to be available - a
minimum of six (6) months before intended demonstration / handover.
.3 The Contractors shall ensure that the necessary information is requested
from all other parties in adequate time for the above requirements to be
met.
.4 The manual cover shall be stiffened PVC / Rexine covered 4 ring clip
binders in an agreed colour. The manual cover and spine tab shall contain
the project name, title etc., generally as set out in the attached sample
format.
.5 The manual page size shall be ISO size A4.
.6 Each section and sub-section within the manual(s) shall be subdivided

with colour coded and numbered dividing tabs.
.7 The Contractors O&M Manuals shall also incorporate manufacturers’s

technical literature, spare parts manuals and warranty certificates.
.8 Additionally all test certificate, balancing and adjusting reports, Local

Authority compliance documents shall be included in the O&M Manual.
.9 Attached to this procedure is a typical operation and maintenance manual

index, which will need fine tuning to suit individual building needs. In all
cases the Commissioning Manager shall obtain the draft manual from the
Trade Contractors and submit for Employer ‘s Representative review
within the above listed time frame.
.10 It is likely that some sub-sections of the manual will need to be a complete
manual in their own right; however the format, cover, number system etc.,
must coordinate with other manual(s) to form a comprehensive set.
.1 Draft Cover.
.2 Draft Tab.
.3 Sample Format.
6.0 AS-BUILT / RECORD DRAWINGS
.1 Requirements
.1 Generally all works shall be installed as per the approved shop drawings.
Where on-site revisions are necessary to overcome coordination
problems, such revisions shall be incorporated into marked-up copies of
the working drawings on a regular basis throughout the course of the
works. These marked-up prints will form the basis of as-built / record
drawing production.
.2 All as-built / record drawings shall be suitable for microfilming.
.3 The contractor shall submit a schedule of his proposed as-built drawings

when submitting his draft O&M manual.
SECTION 4-20
PAGE 9
.4 All drawings shall be clearly marked "As-Built / Record Drawings" in

minimum 10mm high lettering. All submittals of "As-Built / Record
Drawings shall be made via the existing drawing control system.
.5 All manufacturer supplied drawings shall also be provided with the

standard project title block and issued as an "as-built" drawing generally as
set out as above.
.6 A typical format for as-built drawing title blocks based on Project

Procedures Manual Standard is included within this section.
.7 The quantities and types of print and negatives to be issued for "as built"
use are the same as for normal document issues, as set out in the Project
Procedures Manual.
.8 All existing revision information on working drawings shall be removed

prior to their issue for "as-built" status. A new series starting "R1 " shall be
instituted for first "as-built" issue.
6.1 SAMPLE FORMAT - TYPICAL INDEX TO OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
.1 Important Note
.1 The following list is not exhaustive. It is intended to highlight some of the

main items required to be included in the operating and maintenance
manuals. The list will need to be expanded to cover the specific detailed
needs of the individual buildings and their system.
Sec. Description Sub-Sections
.1 GENERAL .1 Introduction
.2 Services Identification
.3 List of Abbreviations
.4 Schedule
.5 Directory of Suppliers
.6 Warranty Contacts (list all
major equipment with
warranty beginning and
end dates)
.2 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS .1 High Voltage Systems

.2 Low Voltage Systems
.3 Power Generation
.4 Emergency Lighting
.5 Lightning Protection
.6 Earthing
.3 OPERATING .1 General
PROCEDURES .2 Initial Set-Up
.3 Routine Inspection Charts

Schedules
.2 Spares Policy Recommended
.3 Schedule of Spares Supplied
At Handover
SECTION 4-20
PAGE 10
.4 Equipment Start-Up / Shut

Down Procedures
.5 Filling-Up
.6 Draining Down
.7 Lubrication Charts
.8 Filtration Charts
.9 Preventative Maintenance
.10 Lead / Lag Arrangements
.11 Fault Finding
.5 EMERGENCY .1 General
PROCEDURES .2 Health and Safety
.3 Failure of Electrical
Supply
.4 Refrigerant Leaks
.5 Water Leaks
.6 Fuel Oil Leaks
.7 Fire Situations on
MEP Systems
.8 First Aid Procedures
.6 MANUFACTURER’S .1 Factory Test

DATA Certificates
.2 Certified Drawings
.3 Nameplate Date
.4 specific / Specialized
Maintenance Recommendatiions
.5 Performance Curves
.6 Catalogue Cut

Schedules
.2 Spares Policy
Recommended
.3 Schedule of Spares
Supplied At Handover
.8 TEST CERTIFICATES .1 Pressure Tests

.2 Environmental Tests
.3 Commissioning Checklists
.4 Snagging Sign-Offs
.5 Electrical Safety
.6 General Tests
.11 SYSTEM SCHEMATICS .1 Wiring Diagram (HV)

.2 Wiring Diagram (LV)
7.0 OPERATING TRAINING
7.1 TRAINING TO EMPLOYER AND BUILDING OPERATORS
.1 General
.1 This section defines the general scope and content of Employer Building
Operators training.
SECTION 4-20
PAGE 11
.2 Given the requirements of the Health and Safety at Work Act and the need
to maintain warranty conditions it is an absolute prerequisite that full
training occurs prior to handover of any equipment or systems.
.3 The Commissioning Manager shall coordinate all training proposals into a

comprehensive training schedule. This schedule is to be submitted to the
Employer for review and agreement. The General Contractor
Commissioning Manager shall incorporate all reasonable requirements
into a final training programme and arrange attendance of the required
training personnel.
.4 As a general matter of policy the Employer’s Representative will require

training on equipment to be carried out by engineers / instructors of the
original equipment manufacturer (OEM) supplemented by the Trade
Contractors as necessary.
.5 In submitting a comprehensive training schedule the Commissioning

Manager must confirm the following:-
.1 Name and title of persons carrying out training
.2 Name of company employing trainers
.3 Proposed location of training i.e. job site, classroom or factory.
.4 Details of training aids to be used, i.e. manual, audiovisual etc.
.5 Details of any spares/tools to be provided
.6 For each training session a training agenda shall be provided,

generally set out as per the attached standard format.
.7 The contractor shall arrange to digital record the training session

and provide a copy of the VCD/DVD for Employer’s
Representative retention.
.2 Training Periods
.1 The following schedule sets out for each facility, the general systems /
equipment requiring demonstration/training and also gives minimum
duration and responsibilities; unless otherwise noted in the specifications:
Minimum
Who Carried
No. System / Subject Duration
Out Training
(Hours)
.1 General Electrical 4 Electrical Trade Contractor
.2 Fuel System 2 Installation Contractor
.3 Motor Control Systems 4 Electrical Trade Contractor
.4 LV & Power Factor Board 4 Equipment Manufacturer
.5 Lighting and Controls 4 Electrical Trade Contractor
.6 High Voltage 4 Equipment Switch gear
Manufacturer
.7 Transformers 2 Equipment Manufacturer
.8 Standby Generator 4 Equipment Manufacturer
SECTION 4-20
PAGE 12
.9 UPS 4 Equipment Manufacturer

.10 P.A.System 4 Equipment Manufacturer
.11 SMATV 4 Equipment Manufacturer
.2 Where more than 1 manufacturer supplies a given type of equipment or

system, the duration gives above applies to each individual manufacturer.
.3 Additional training course to those noted above may be required to cover

specific items of equipment in a particular building.
.4 Documentation Examples.
.2 Sample Format
Building: Contractor:
Date of Seminar
Time of Seminar
Location of Seminar
.4 Title of Seminar
.5 Attendance List
.6 Opening Introductions by Chairperson
.1 Introduction of Instructors
.2 Introduction of Owners Representatives
.3 Introduction of Manufacturers Specialists
.4 Presentation of Course Training Aids
.5 Statement of Course Aims/Scope
.6 Training (Classroom)
.1 Description of System and Equipment
.2 Inter - Relationship with other Systems
.3 Recommended Maintenance Requirements
.4 Presentative Maintenance Check List and Recommended

SECTION 4-20
PAGE 13
Spare Parts
.5 Health and Safety Precautions
.7 Field Training
.1 View Equipment at Location
.2 Demonstrate Maintenance Access
.3 Review of Overall System and Associated Interfaces with Other

Systems
.4 Demonstrate Actual Start - Up Procedures
.5 Demonstrate replacement of Common Spare Parts
.8 Review of O&M Documentation and Spare Parts List
.1 Site Review to Compare with Actual Installation of Accuracy
.2 Review Description of Systems and Certified Manufacturers

Drawings
8.0 SPARE PARTS
8.1 GENERAL
.1 The Contractor shall coordinate the supply of all specified spare parts to the
owners operations staff.
.2 The information for a given project shall be organised by system and shall include
the following:-
.1 A list of spare parts, special tools, lubricants etc. for each item equipment
which has been purchased as part of the relevant trade contract.
.2 Similar list to (a) above covering spare parts etc. for all other equipment
for each spare parts have not been included in the Trade Contract.
.3 A list of spare items for standard systems i.e. fuses, gaskets etc.
.4 The above lists shall be based on manufacturers recommendation and

cover a period of 2 year from handover of equipment/system to employer.
.5 Standard spare parts schedules shall provide the following information as

a minimum:-
.1 Manufacturers part name.
.2 Manufacturers name, address, phone and fax numbers.
.3 Manufacturers part number.
.4 Quantity recommended for 2 (2) year.
.5 Unit.
SECTION 4-20
PAGE 14
.6 Lead time.
.7 Shelf life.
.8 Alternative suppliers of parts.
.9 Local stockist(s) name, address, phone and fax number.
.6 Preliminary list of spare parts, tools etc. shall be submitted a minimum of

60 days prior to intended system handover for Employer’s Representative
review. The employer’s Representative reserves the right to add to,
reduce, or omit entirely the recommendations contained on these lists.
.7 Upon approval by the Employer’s Representative of the spare lists either

original or amended form the Contractor shall instruct the Trade
Contractors to supply those items covered by the relevant trade contracts.
.8 Those items so supplied shall be in manufacturer’s original packaging and

shall be tagged with a unique number coordinated with the relevant
handover schedule.
.9 These parts shall be available for handover to owners operations

personnel at least 30 days prior to handover of the associated systems.
9.0 DESCRIPTION OF THE HANDOVER PROCESS
.1 Introduction
.1 As buildings reach the final stages of completion the Employer will require
operations to take over areas and systems as they are almost complete.
This initial phase is part of the inheritance of the buildings by operational
management who will control security and access to the areas and
systems prior to the acceptance into service and practical completion.
This is the first step towards the acceptance into service.
.2 The Documentation Summary is a required document to be maintained by

each building's Employer assigned Commissioning Manager. It lists each
system proposed to be handed to operations. The proposed systems shall
be agreed with the Commissioning Manager at an early date and shall be
transmitted to each trade contractor as a requirement.
.3 The take over confirmation is an internal document of operations recording

the steps leading to areas/system being offered to operations.
.2 Takeover Confirmation Systems
.1 This certificate is based on a checklist extracted from the M&E

Commissioning and Handover Procedures Manual.
.3 O&M Manuals and Test Certificates
This information may be presented in draft form but the content must encompass
all aspects relating to the operation and fault finding areas.
.4 As-Built or Record Drawings

SECTION 4-20
PAGE 15
The suppliers recommended spare list should be provided in the O&M Manuals
although further revisions may be incorporated in the final issue with operations
agreement.
.5 This training will take place after receipt of the draft documents and with the
agreement of the Building Manager or Building Services Manager in respect of
content, time scale and dates for training.
SECTION 4-20
PAGE 16
.6 Current Snags List
The snag list will consist of items both in numbers and content that are considered
manageable by the Building Manager. The attachment of the list at this time does
not deem to represent or limit the scope for adding items that arise through the
operation of areas and system by operations throughout the defects liability period.
A status report of the current snag list will be provided with the certificate of
readiness.
.7 Keys
All door keys are to be presented to the Building Manager from the Project
Executive in an orderly manner at a mutually acceptable time. This will also include
all keys associated with engineering items of plant and equipment.
.8 Authority
The Building Manager is the authorised representative for operations and will issue
the certificate.
.9 Warranty and Maintenance
These items are covered by the narrative for the certificate of Practical Completion
and do not from part of this procedure.
.10 Certificate
.1 The Certificate of Practical Compeliton is initiated by the Commissioning

Manager, signed by the Employer’s Representative before a signature of
agreement by the authorised representative of operations. The distribution
of the completed certificate to be arranged by operations as required.
.2 A list of plant that is operational in the building must be provided with the
certificate.
.3 A status report on the current snag list as the date of issue of the
certificate will also be attached.
.1 Owner/Construction Manager Documentation Summary

.2 Takeover Confirmation
END OF SECTION 4-15

QUALITY ASSURANCE, INSPECTION, TESTING & COMMISSIONING
SECTION 4-21
PAGE 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The quality assurance, inspection, tests and commissioning procedures shall be

carried out upon placing of contract for the electrical facilities.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide quality assurance manual (QAM), works quality assurance programme

(WQAP), field quality assurance programme (FQAP) and quality plan.
B. Tests at manufacturer's works.
C. Provide assistance and testing equipment for witnessed site inspection and tests.
D. Perform site tests and commissioning for the following (where applicable):
1. 11 KV switchgears
2. Distribution transformers
3. Emergency power system
4. 600/1000V cables
5. D.C. power supplies
6. Motor control centers
7. LV main switchboards
8. Individual motor starters
9. Fire alarm and detection system
10. Automatic transfer switches
11. Cable conduits

12. Distribution panels
13. Auxiliary board
14. Lighting and power wiring
15. Lighting luminaries
16. Switches and switched socket outlets
17. Protection, metering and control
18. Earthing systems
19. Fire stops
20. Lightning protection system

SECTION 4-21
PAGE 2
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. After Contract Award, submit the following:-
1. Quality Assurance Manual (QAM)
2. Works Quality Assurance Programme (WQAP)
3. Field Quality Assurance Programme (FQAP)
4. Quality Plan
a. For inspection and testing, submit inspection and testing

procedures, programme, record sheets applicable at each hold
point.
b. After completion and testing, submit test records, packaging,

transportation and storage instructions and methods.
c. For site installation and commissioning, submit installation methods

or procedures, notification and procedures for pre-commission and
commissioning.
d. After commissioning, submit site test records, as-built drawings, etc.
A. The Contractor shall refer to the appropriate parts of ISO 9000 series as guidelines
for implementation of the quality programmes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE CONCEPT AND CONTROL
A. Minimum requirements for establishing and implementing a quality assurance

programme shall be applied to all aspects of the work necessary for carrying out the
Contract. Quality assurance shall extend to material parts, components, systems
and services as a means of obtaining and sustaining the reliability of critical items,
operating performance, maintenance and safety.
B. Acceptance of the Contractor's quality assurance programme does not relieve the
Contractor's obligation to comply with the requirement of the contract document. If
the programme is found to be ineffective or inadequate in providing for quality
assurance or control, then the Employer's Representative reserves the right to
request for necessary revisions of the programme.
C. The Contractor is required to produce readily identifiable documentary evidence

covering the extent and details of both his own and his sub-contractors' quality
assurance system.
D. The documentary evidence should take the following form:-

SECTION 4-21
PAGE 3
1. Quality Assurance Manual (QAM)
4. Quality Plan
5. These documents shall be prepared separately and submitted to the

Employer's Representative at the time of tendering.
6. Quality Plan and Manual shall be prepared by the Contractor for all items
and services to be supplied, after the Contract has been placed, but before
commencement of fabrication, and shall be subject to evaluation and
acceptance by the Employer's Representative before start of works.
E. Quality Assurance Manual (QAM)
1. The QAM shall be a general comprehensive document outlining the

Contractor's basic organization, policies and procedures. The information to
be given in the QAM shall include but not limited to:
a. Quality policy
b. Quality assurance programme
c. Organisation structure showing inter-relationships
d. Functional responsibilities and levels of authority
e. Lines of communication
f. Customer relations
g. Laboratory facilities
a. The WQAP shall detail the Contractor's quality assurance

programme at works applicable throughout all phases of Contract
performance including design, procurement, manufacture,
inspection and testing. It shall identify each of the programme
elements to be designed, developed, executed and maintained by
the Contractor for the purpose of ensuring that all supplies and
services comply with this Specification.
b. The information to be given in the WQAP shall include but not

limited to:
(1) Organization and Responsibility
(2) Contract Review
(3) Design and Document Control
(4) Procurement Control
(5) Control on Sub-contractors

SECTION 4-21
PAGE 4
(6) In-process Quality Control and Traceability
(7) Production Control
(8) Inspection and Testing
(9) Control of Non-conformances
(10) Corrective Action
(11) Control of Inspection, Measuring and Test Equipment
(12) Handling, Storage, Packaging and Delivery
(13) Records
(14) Quality Audits
(15) After-sales serving
a. The FQAP shall detail the Contractor's Quality Assurance

Programme at Site applicable throughout site construction, erection
and commissioning. It is the underlying philosophy that the quality
built into the product at works shall be maintained throughout the
construction and commissioning stages.
b. While, in principle, the FQAP shall include the items discussed in

WQAP, it shall, however, be approached differently to take into
account site conditions.
c. The FQAP shall include, but not limited to the following information:
(1) Organization and Responsibility
(2) Control of Drawings and Documentation
(3) Product Checklists
(4) Control and Traceability of Purchased Materials and

Services
(5) Receipt Inspection of Materials at Site
(6) Material Storage Control
(7) Inspection and Examination Procedures
(8) Control of Painting and Insulation Works
(9) Pre-commissioning
(10) Commissioning
(11) Control of Non-conformances
(12) Corrective Action

SECTION 4-21
PAGE 5
(13) Control of Inspection, Measuring and Test Equipment
(14) Records
(15) Quality Audit
(16) Personnel Training
(17) Servicing during Defects Liability Period
4. Quality Plan
a. The Contractor shall be required to prepare manufacturing and

construction/erection quality plans for all equipment items and
services. The quality plan shall also define the involvement of the
Employer's Representative in the inspection and test programmes.
b. The Quality Plan shall incorporate as appropriate:
(1) Charts indicating flow of materials, parts and components

through manufacturing quality control, inspection and test to
delivery and erection.
(2) The charts shall indicate the location of hold points for
quality control, inspection and test beyond which
manufacture shall not continue until the action required by
the hold point is met, and the documentation required is
generated.
(3) The control documents associated with each hold point, i.e.
drawings, material specification, Works Process Schedule
(WPS), Process Quality Records (PQR), quality control
methods and procedures and acceptance Standards.
(4) These control documents should also include Process

contract document Sheets, Inspection Procedure Sheets,
Site Fabrication Specification, Cleaning and Protection
Application Sheets and Purchase Specifications (for Sub-
Contract jobs).
(5) These documents shall detail the procedures and approvals

with which the process complies.
(6) An indication of the organisation responsible for the quality

activities covered.
(7) Reference to quality assurance procedures, goods inward

procedures and non-conformance procedures.
(8) The Contractor shall submit his sub-Contractor's quality

plans. The Contractor shall determine and agree with the
Employer's Representative the control to be exercised over
the sub-Contractors and the degree of surveillance that will
take place.
(9) Provision for the Employer's Representative to insert hold

points at which quality activities are to be witnessed.
SECTION 4-21
PAGE 6
(10) The Contractor shall prepare education and training

programmes as required for the indoctrination of his quality
assurance and quality control personnel. Where personnel
are required to be certified by this contract documents, e.g.
skilled wiremen, the Contractor shall keep an up-to-date
register which will be subject to examination by the
5. Repair Procedures
a. The Contractor shall prepare a Repair Procedure based on the

specification requirements and approved Standards. The procedure
shall take into account Site conditions, and be detail enough to
include, for example, equipment to be used, methods of repair,
acceptance/rejection criteria, inspections required, etc. The repair
procedure shall cover painting etc. but shall not cover components
which shall be replaced if they are faulty.
6. Other Documents
a. The Contractor shall submit to the Employer's Representative one

copy of other relevant documents, such as manufacturer's
instructions, technical papers, etc., where such documents are
being referred to in the documents.
7. Site Quality Control Section
a. The Contractor's Quality Control (Q.C.) Section shall be headed by

an experienced Quality Control Engineer. He shall be assisted by
other supervisors. The Section shall be an independent one,
reporting to the Contractor's Site Manager only on administrative
matters, but otherwise under full control by the Contractor's
Corporate Quality System Management.
b. The Contractor's Q.C. Section shall liaise closely with the

Employer's Representative in charge of Quality Assurance/Quality
Control, and to whom it shall give fullest cooperation. It is the
underlying principle of this contract document that while the
Contractor's Q.C. Engineer implements the Contractor's quality
programme, the adequacy and effectiveness of that implementation
shall be audited by the Employer's Representative at Site whose
recommendations on improving or maintaining quality shall be acted
upon promptly by the Contractor's Q.C. Section.
3.2 INSPECTION AND TESTING AT WORKS AND AT SITE
A. General
1. All equipment and components supplied shall be subjected to inspection and

tests by the Employer's Representative during manufacture, erection /
installation and after completion. The inspection and tests shall include but
not be limited by the requirements of this contract document. Prior to
inspection and testing, the equipment shall undergo pre-service cleaning
and protection.
SECTION 4-21
PAGE 7
B. Third Party Certification
1. The Employer shall arrange for an independent third party insurance

classification organisation to certify the design, materials and construction of
the equipment in his scope to comply with statutory requirements and for
insurance purposes. The certification shall include all pressure vessels and
lifting equipment and shall cover both fabrication at the manufacturer's works
and at the site.
C. Guarantees
1. Tenderers shall state and guarantee the technical particulars listed in the
Schedule of Technical Data. These guarantees and particulars shall be
binding and shall not be varied without the written permission of the
2. No tolerances shall be allowed other than the tolerances permitted in the

relevant approved Standards shall apply unless otherwise stated.
D. Rejection
1. If the guaranteed performance of any item of equipment is not met and/or if

any item fails to comply with the specification requirement in any respect
whatsoever at any stage of manufacture, test or erection, the Employer's
Representative may reject the item, or defective component thereof,
whichever he considers necessary, and after adjustment or modification as
directed by the Employer's Representative, the Contractor shall submit the
item for further inspection and/or test.
2. All repair procedures shall not be performed without the prior approval of the
Employer's Representative. In the event of a defect on any item being of
such a nature that the specification requirements cannot be fulfilled by
adjustment or modification, such item shall be replaced by the Contractor, at
his own expense to the entire satisfaction of the Employer's Representative.
Any item of plant repaired to an approved procedure shall not be accepted
as a part of the Works as a permanent solution or replacement unless the
Contractor guarantees in writing that the repaired plant or component shall
have the same service life and efficiency as the component originally
manufactured.
3. The approval of the Employer's Representative of inspection and/or test

results will not prejudice the right of the Employer's Representative to reject
an item of equipment if it does not comply with the contract document when
erected or prove completely satisfactory in service.
E. Sub-Contracts
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for the timely transmission of the

relevant and appropriate sections of the contract document to sub-
Contractors and other manufacturers and the proper execution of all tests on
work or plant or materials carried out or supplied by sub-Contractors,
wherever such tests may be carried out, to the same extent as if the tests on
work, plant or materials were carried out or supplied by the Contractor
himself.
SECTION 4-21
PAGE 8
3.3 TESTS AT MANUFACTURER'S WORKS
A. General
1. Where no specific test is specified then the various items of materials and
equipment shall be tested in accordance with the acceptable Standards.
Where no acceptable standard is available, tests shall be carried out in
accordance with the manufacturer' Standard practice, subject to the prior
approval of the Employer's Representative. In all cases, works tests shall
include electrical, mechanical and hydraulic tests in addition to any test
called for by the Employer's Representative to ensure that the equipment
being supplied fulfils the requirements of the contract document.
2. If considered necessary by the Employer's Representative, any multi-part

assemblies shall be fully erected in the Works prior to packing and dispatch
to Site.
3. All tests to be performed during manufacture, fabrication and inspection shall

be agreed with the Employer's Representative prior to commencement of
the work. The Contractor shall prepare the details of the schedule and
submit these to the Employer's Representative for approval. It must be
ensured that adequate relevant information on the design code/Standard
employed, the manufacture/fabrication/ assembly procedure and the
attendant quality control steps proposed are made available to the
Employer's Representative. The Employer's Representative will mark in the
appropriate spaces his intention to attend or waive the invited tests, or
inspections.
4. A minimum of twenty-one days' notice of the readiness of equipment for test

or inspection shall be provided to the Employer's Representative by the
Contractor (whether the tests be held at the Contractor's or sub-Contractor's
works). The subject items should remain available for Employer's
Representative inspection and test up to a minimum of 10 days beyond the
agreed dates of witnessing the test. Every facility in respect of access,
drawings, instruments and manpower will be provided by the Contractor and
his sub-Contractor to enable the Employer's Representative to carry out the
necessary inspection and testing of the Plant.
5. No plant shall be packed, prepared for shipment, or dismantled for the

purpose of packing for shipment, unless it has been satisfactorily inspected,
all tests called for have been successfully carried out in the presence of the
Employer's Representative or approved for shipment, or alternatively
inspection has been waived.
6. Functional electrical and mechanical tests shall be carried out on completed

assemblies in the Works. The extent of these tests and method of recording
the results shall be submitted to, and agreed by, the Employer's
Representative in sufficient time to enable the tests to be satisfactorily
witnessed, or if necessary for any changes required to the proposed
program of tests to be agreed.
SECTION 4-21
PAGE 9
7. All instruments and apparatus used in the performance of the tests shall be
supplied by the Contractor, to the approval of the Employer's Representative
and shall be calibrated to an agreed standard by the Employer's
Representative. Calibration Tests Certificates shall be submitted in respect
of each and every instrument and apparatus. All calibration shall be
conducted within 6 months before the date of the actual tests and the
corresponding tests certificates shall be issued and submitted to the
Employer's Representative at least 1 month before commencement of the
test. Calibration done and Certificates issued outside the period
aforementioned shall not be valid and the Contractor shall arrange for the
recalibration of the instrument or apparatus at no extra cost to the
8. The Employer's Representative reserves the right to visit the Manufacturer's

Works at any reasonable time during fabrication of equipment and to
familiarize himself with the progress made and the quality of the work to
date.
B. Material Tests
1. Representative samples of all plates, bars and pipes, etc., which form
components of the equipment shall be tested as required by the relevant
approved Standard. All test pieces shall be prepared and supplied by the
Contractor at his own cost. If any test piece fails to comply with the
requirements of the specifications for the material in question, the
Employer's Representative may reject the whole of the material represented
by that test piece.
C. Test Certificates
1. Within 30 days of the completion of any test, triplicate sets of all principal test
records, test certificates and correction and performance curves shall be
supplied to the Employer's Representative.
2. These test records, certificates and performance curves shall be supplied for
all tests, whether or not they have been witnessed by the Employer's
Representative or not. The information given on such test certificates and
curves shall be sufficient to identify the material or equipment to which the
certificate refers and should also bear the Contract reference title.
3. When all equipment has been tested, the test certificates from all Works and
Site tests shall be compiled by the Contractor into volumes and bound in an
approved form complete with index and four copies of each volume shall be
supplied to the Employer's Representative.
3.4 TYPE TESTS
A. Type tests are required on all equipment whether specifically noted or not to prove
the general design of the equipment in accordance with the relevant acceptable
Standards and the Contractor may submit test certificates of tests which have been
carried out on identical equipment. Notwithstanding any provision in a Standard, the
Employer's Representative shall have the right to accept or reject such certificates in
lieu of the specified type tests.
B. The type tests prescribed shall be carried out at the Contractor's cost in all cases
where such certificates are not available or are rejected.
SECTION 4-21
PAGE 10
C. Notwithstanding the above one type of each rating of equipment shall be type tested
under this Contract, to the relevant acceptable Standard, and test certificates
submitted to the Employer's Representative.
3.5 ROUTINE TESTS
A. All equipment and components shall be subjected to routine tests as specified in the
relevant standards at the Manufacturer's Works.
3.6 ACCEPTANCE TESTS
A. Acceptance tests shall be carried out by random sampling of manufactured

equipment in accordance with IEC. The results of tests shall be recorded and
verified by the Employer's Representative. Three copies of the test results shall be
submitted to the Employer's Representative. The same set of test results shall be
included in the Operation and Maintenance documentation.
3.7 TESTS AT SITE
A. General
1. All equipment and assemblies shall pass site tests to prove compliance with
the contract document independently of any tests which may have already
been carried out at the Manufacturer's Works.
2. The Contractor shall check the electrical and mechanical connections to all
equipment and assemblies supplied under the Contract before they are
brought into commission and shall be responsible for the correctness of
such connections in accordance with the contract document.
3. In particular all functional and pressure tests on fully assembled and

complete items of equipment and assemblies which have not been carried
out at the manufacturer's works, shall be carried out at Site.
supplied by the Contractor and shall be to the approval of the Employer's
Engineer and shall be calibrated to an approved standard approved by the
Engineer. Calibration Tests Certificates shall be submitted in respect of each
and every instrument and apparatus. All calibration shall be conducted within
6 months before the date of the actual tests and the corresponding tests
certificates shall be issued and submitted to the Employer's Representative
at least 1 month before commencement of the test. Calibration done and
Certificates issued outside the period aforementioned shall not be valid and
the Contractor shall arrange for the recalibration of the instrument or
apparatus at no extra costs to the Employer's Representative.
5. The Contractor will be responsible for the submission to the Employer's

Representative for Site inspection and tests of all equipment in his supply.
6. The Contractor shall submit a written programme of tests and checks for the
approval of the Employer's Representative.
7. The Contractor shall provide experienced test personnel subject to the

approval by the Employer's Representative (CV's shall be submitted) and
conditions imposed by the Electrical Supply Regulations and any regulations
ruling at that time on such practice.
8. The testing shall be carried out during normal working hours as far as is
practicable.
SECTION 4-21
PAGE 11
9. The Contractor shall advise the Employer's Representative in writing at the

time of commencement of site erection of the site supplies which will be
required for the operation of the test equipment.
3.8 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION
A. During the course of erection, the Employer's Representative shall have full access
for inspecting the progress of the work and checking its accuracy by witnessing such
checks as may be required by him.
B. The Contractor shall provide all temporary scaffolding, ladders, platforms with
adequate and safe flooring and handrails essential for proper access of the
Employer's Representative to carry out inspection.
C. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials and instruments and other resources
necessary for the use of the Employer's Representative for checking, setting out of
the Works, for the periodic measurement of the works executed and for the
aforementioned Site inspections and tests.
D. On completion of erection, tests on all equipment shall be carried out by the

Contractor and witnessed by the Employer's Representative to demonstrate
adequately that the equipment as erected on Site, is entirely suitable for operation.
E. The Contractor shall provide all erection check lists for the Works, copies of which
are to be provided to the Engineer after signing at each stage of inspection.
F. The Contractor shall record the results of the tests clearly, on an approved form and
with clear reference to the equipment and items to which they refer, so that the
record can be used as the basis for maintenance tests by the Employer during the
working life of the equipment. The required number of site test result records shall
be provided by the Contractor to the Engineer as soon as possible after completion
of the tests. Both the Employer and his representative require this information before
the plant will be accepted for initial energizing.
G. No tests as agreed under the program of tests shall be waived except upon the
instruction or agreement of the Employer's Representative in writing.
H. The Contractor shall submit to the Employer's Representative for his approval a list
of recommended settings for all protection and other types of automatic equipment,
not less than three (3) months before such equipment is required in service. Where
the settings involve discrimination with settings of the Shanghai Power Company 's
network or plant, the relevant information shall be supplied to the Contractor.
I. The Contractor's test equipment shall be of satisfactory quality and condition and
shall be appropriately calibrated by an approved authority or standard at the
Contractor's expense. Details of the test equipment and instruments used shall be
noted in the test sheets in cases where the instrument or equipment characteristics
can have a bearing on the test results.
3.9 PAINTING INSPECTION
A. The various inspection methods included in the various parts of the specification
shall provide a reference base for both the Contractor and the Employer's
Representative in order to ensure that all coating related activities and the final
coating film conform to the requirements as laid down in this specification.
SECTION 4-21
PAGE 12
B. Approved inspection procedures shall be used singly or in conjunction with each

other - as circumstances may warrant - to resolve disputes related to application
condition, film, thicknesses, degree of cure, adhesion to the substrate or between
coats, determination of the correct time between coats, etc. and to determine
whether individual coating films or the total coating system meet the acceptance
criteria specified.
3.10 SITE CLEANING
A. No plant items incorporating copper or aluminum or their alloys, or zinc coatings shall
undergo any chemical cleaning other than flushing or manual cleaning.
B. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure that the internal
surfaces of all plant are kept clean and free from injurious matter during erection.
C. When all equipment/plant has been erected or at such other time as may be required
for sub-assemblies, the installation shall undergo an approved procedure for site
cleaning in accordance with the site requirements.
3.11 DISPOSAL OF WASTE EFFLUENT AT SITE
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for satisfactorily disposing of all waste effluent
and materials and treating them to render them suitable for discharge to waste in
accordance with regulations prevailing at site regarding disposal of waste effluent.
3.12 INSPECTION
A. At the end of the plant cleaning operations at site the plant shall be made available
for inspection.
B. In the event that the surfaces are not cleaned to the Employer's Representative's
satisfaction, such parts of the cleaning procedure or agreed alternatives as are
deemed necessary to overcome the deficiencies shall be carried out at the
Contractor's sole expense.
3.13 PRE-COMMISSIONING CHECKS AND COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES
A. General
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe and efficient setting to work
of the whole of the plant and equipment in its supply. The methods adopted
shall be to the approval of the Employer's Representative on site, and shall
be in accordance with any safety and permit regulations in force on the site.
2. The Contractor shall give sufficient detail in the program as required in this
Contract Document to satisfy the Employer's Representative that the
sequence and duration of the proposed commissioning activities are logical
and realistic. Details of the Contractor's commissioning staff necessary to
achieve the program shall be given.
3. It shall be necessary to coordinate the commissioning tests and all trades

contractors will be required to cooperate in this activity.
4. The electrical trades Contractor is required to cooperate with the Engineer

by organizing and setting-up the assigned inputs of the Building Control
System, Fire Alarm System and if required the Standby Generator Control
System and in the production of application programs for logs and displays,
for the periods of pre-commissioning, and commissioning.
SECTION 4-21
PAGE 13
5. At least four months before commencing the commissioning of any plant or

equipment, the Contractor shall submit for approval full comprehensive
procedures of pre-commissioning checks as applicable to each item of the
plant and equipment provided. These procedures shall then be used during
pre-commissioning as guide to the methods to be followed and to record the
actual activities carried out with the appropriate date, together with details of
all work yet to be completed, variations and modifications to design
conditions. The procedures should describe the pre-requisites for that
particular test:-
a. Test which should have been previously satisfactorily completed.
b. Systems which must be live, or charged.
c. Special precautions required e.g. safety, or erection of temporary

equipment.
d. Reference to relevant drawings.
6. Each procedure shall be accompanied by a check list. The check list shall
include as a minimum the following:-
a. Contract title.
b. Plant item/system name.
c. Schedule of checks to be carried out.
d. Space for data obtained during checks to be entered and initialed.
e. Space for date and names of persons carrying out and witnessing
tests.
f. Item/system data e.g. expected range of results.
g. Space for remarks.
7. The Contractor shall provide at site the necessary certified standard

instruments and gauges and any other equipment necessary for checking
the installation as and when required and shall operate the plant and carry
out the tests to the satisfaction of the Employer's Representative.
8. Each activity on the pre-commissioning procedure, when completed to the

satisfaction of the Employer's Representative, shall be signed and dated by
the Contractor. The schedules shall be countersigned by the Employer's
Representative as necessary.
9. The Contractor shall also submit for approval schedules of commissioning

procedures that he proposed to follow when bringing into service groups of
plant items during the commissioning period. These schedules shall detail
the tests necessary to ensure the complete and satisfactory commissioning
of each section of plant and shall detail all operational limitations. The
schedules shall be used during commissioning which shall only commence
when the relevant pre-commissioning check schedules have been
completed. The procedures and check lists in the commissioning schedules
shall take the same format and layout as described above for pre-
commissioning.
SECTION 4-21
PAGE 14
10. Each activity on the commissioning procedure schedules when completed to

the satisfaction of the Employer's Representative, shall be signed and dated
by the Contractor and shall be countersigned by the Employer's
Representative as necessary.
11. The commissioning procedures shall ensure that the commissioning of any
section of the Works does not interrupt the normal operation of any
previously commissioned sections(s) or other running plants in the building.
12. The Contractor shall remain fully responsible for the operation, maintenance
and cleaning of equipment as necessary throughout the commissioning
period up to the time takeover.
13. The Employer's Representative will introduce a coordinated 'Permit to Work'

system during the course of the site works in order to establish control over
the safe access to all plant that has been commissioned, charged, made live
or energised, and to sure both personnel safety and security of plant
operation.
14. The Contractor shall comply fully with such safety procedure and permit
systems and shall accept and accommodate the resulting limitations on
access to his plant without claim on the Employer.
15. When the commissioning of each section of the Works is complete, the
Contractor shall carry out such preliminary tests as are necessary to
establish that the plant is functioning correctly and efficiently, and shall make
any adjustments required.
16. The Contractor shall supply all test equipment, paper charts, continuous
stationery, and magnetic tape and disc, tools, chemicals, lubricating oils and
grease and other materials required for the aforementioned operations.
17. Within two months of the completion of commissioning tests the Contractor
shall submit a comprehensive commissioning report with a completed set of
signed check sheets and procedures.
B. Contractor's Site Supervisory Staff
1. During the commissioning and subsequent testing of any item of plant the
Contractor shall provide for the services of any special supervisory staff
necessary for the purpose of ensuring proper commissioning and the
satisfactory completion of all tests.
3.14 EQUIPMENT TESTS
A. General Checks
1. A general check of all the main switchgear and ancillary equipment shall be
made and shall include a check of dimensions, location and routing, and the
completeness, correctness and condition of earth connections, labelling,
clearances, painted surfaces, cables, wiring, pipework, blanking plates and
all other auxiliary and ancillary items.
B. HV Dielectric Tests
1. All electrical equipment shall be subjected to comprehensive insulation tests

at an appropriate voltage level.
SECTION 4-21
PAGE 15
2. All high voltage cables, the main and auxiliary circuits in switchgear and bus
systems shall be subjected to a high voltage test at the appropriate voltages.
3. During these tests the following precautions shall be observed:
a. Voltage transformers shall be isolated.
b. Current transformer secondaries shall be short circuited and

earthed.
c. Cables shall be isolated.
d. Circuit breaker frames shall be earthed.
supplied by the Contractor and be to the approval of the Employer's
Representative. If required by the Employer's Representative, the
equipment shall be calibrated at an Authority approved by the Employer's
Representative. Calibration test certificates shall be submitted in respect of
each and every instrument and apparatus. Certificates issued more than 1
year before date of test shall not be valid, and the Contractor shall arrange
for the recalibration of the instruments or apparatus at no extra cost to the
Employer.
5. All electrical equipment shall be subjected to comprehensive high voltage

tests and insulation tests in accordance with the requirements of the relevant
Standard.
C. Tests on the 415/240V system shall comply with the Malaysian Standards. In this
respect detailed inspection of the installations shall be carried out prior to the tests
being performed. The sequence of performance of site tests shall be:
1. Verification of continuity of protective conductors
2. Verification of continuity of ring final circuit conductors, if any.
3. Insulation resistance measurement between live conductors and between

live conductor and earth. Electronic devices shall be disconnected.
4. Insulation resistance measurement of any exposed-conductive parts to live

parts.
5. Verification of protection provided against direct contact.
6. Polarity checks.
7. Earth fault loop impedance measurements.
8. Earth electrode resistance measurements.
9. Operation of residual current operated devices.
D. Protection System
1. The protection system and its ancillary components shall be tested as

follows:
SECTION 4-21
PAGE 16
a. Secondary Injection
(1) Secondary injection shall be carried out on all protection

relays, using voltage and current of sinusoidal wave form
and at rated power frequency to confirm satisfactory
operation and range adjustment.
(2) The fault setting checks for the type of protection shall be
established by secondary injection, where it is impracticable
to ascertain this value by primary injection. Injection shall
be made across the appropriate relay bus wires with all
associated relays, setting resistors, and CT's connected.
2. Primary Injection
a. Primary current injection tests shall be carried out by the Contractor

and the methods employed for a particular installation shall be
agreed with the Employer's Representative.
b. Tests shall be carried out as follows:-
(1) Local primary injection to establish the ratio and polarity of

current transformers as a group, care being taken to prove
the identity of current transformers of similar ratio.
(2) Overall primary injection to prove correct interconnection

between current transformer groups and associated relays.
(3) Fault setting tests, where possible, to establish the value of

current necessary to produce operation of the relays.
3. On Load Tests
a. On load checks shall be made after the protective gear has been
placed in service to ensure that all connections and test links have
been replaced and test leads removed, as well as to confirm the
integrity of the current transformer circuits. Where necessary
voltage readings shall be taken at the terminals on each relay to
ensure that loop connections between the relays are complete.
4. Other Tests
a. Other tests that are specified in the respective equipment

specifications shall be carried out.
END OF SECTION 4-16

M&amp;E 1.0 Tender Specification

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

M&amp;E 1.0 Tender Specification

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SECTION 4

COLD WATER AND SANITARY PLUMBING SYSTEM

4-1 SCOPE OF WORKS

4-2 PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

4-3 PLUMBING PIPING AND FITTINGS MATERIALS

4-4 PLUMBING HANGERS, ANCHORS AND SUPPORT

4-5 PLUMBING VALVES

4-6 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM

4-7 SOIL, WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM

4-8 PLUMBING TANKS

4-9 PLUMBING VIBRATION ISOLATION

4-10 PLUMBING INSULATION

4-12 PLUMBING PUMPS

4-13 THERMAL STORAGE ELECTRIC WATER HEATER

4-14 ELECTRICAL WORKS

4-15 PLUMBING TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

4-16 FREQUENCY INVERTERS

4-17 BIOMATIC GREASE INTERCEPTOR & OIL INTERCEPTOR

.1 Provide the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

The work includes, but is not limited to the following:

.1 Cold & Hot Water Plumbing Services

.2 Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester tanks and all accessories in the

.4 Pumpsets, starter and control panels, piping, fittings and

.5 Pumping mains piping, fittings, valves and accessories.

.6 Distribution of piping, fittings, valves and accessories to sanitary

.7 Installation of architectural taps, basin, shower sets, hoses and

.2 Sanitary Plumbing Services

.1 All soil, waste and vent piping and accessories.

.2 Floor traps, WC connector; floor gratings (where applicable), etc.

.3 Sewer house manhole fitting out.

.4 Sewer ejection system.

.5 Grease and oil interceptors.

.6 Carpark drainage pumping system.

.7 Installations of sanitary fixtures and accessories.

.4 Supports, anchors, hangers and auxiliary structural members

.5 System flushing, cleaning, sterilizing, balancing, testing, adjusting

.6 Operation and maintenance manuals.

.8 Adjusting, balancing and supervision of service and maintenance

.9 Training to Employer’s and Operator’s personnel.

.10 Approval and certification from the relevant authorities.

END OF SECTION 4-1

.1 Work of this Section shall conform to the requirements of the Contract

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Provide the following Manufacturer's Specifications and Engineering

.2 Submit dimensional drawings to E.R. for approval showing pipe

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Comply with requirements of the Malaysian Standards and British

.3 Minimum test pressures to be 1.5 times maximum system marking

.4 BS 5572: 1978 ; Code of Practice for Sanitary Pipework

.5 Local Water Authority Requirements

.7 Jabatan Kerja Raya Recommended Practice

.8 Code of Practice 310

.10 Suruhanjaya Perkhidmatan Air Negara (SPAN)

2.1 APPROVAL ASSURANCE

.1 All products to be used shall be approved by the local water authority

No Services Sleeve Materials

.2 Sleeves for Insulated Piping: Adequate size to accommodate the

Location Sleeve Length

Equal to depth of construction and terminated

.5 Retaining Wall Penetrations

.1 Seals shall be modular mechanical type, consisting of

.2 Contractor shall determine the required inside diameter of

M&E 1.0 Tender Specification

M&E 1.0 Tender Specification